Home

DX-80TM - TierOne Telecommunications

1. Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays To program Auto Log Off and or Log On Again timers P7290 IMM 3 195 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Input 08 05 then press This advances to the Auto Log Off programming screen To program settings for the built in modem e Input 04 15 then press 2 This advances to the Built in Modem programming screen e Press EY This advances to the Directory Number screen e Tochange to the built in modem directory number press e Input the appropriate directory number must be a valid extension directory number as allocated in System Application Numbering Plan Extension Directory Numbers e Press to temporarily store this data Or e Press 1t to advance to the modem Baud Rate screen e Dress r until the appropriate baud rate displays e Press MLS to return to the previous menu level or press MU to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press To program Auto Log Off and or Log On Again e Used
2. Press UL to return to the previous menu level or press lt 5 to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Use 8 to highlight System Resource and then press To program SPD No Assignment allocation Used 8 to highlight SPD No Assignment and then press To allocate speed numbers in the System List e Used to highlight System List and then press e Used 8 to highlight the Tenant Group speed dial allocation under either the Increase or Decrease column e Press toincrement the selected Tenant Group speed number allocation Each time that enter is pressed allocation is incremented by 50 e When all changes are made press the ESC escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting gt Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged gt Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override gt Press N
3. e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays Program extensions for CO Line Access 01 101 156 23 01 16 e Enter 01 xxx 23 yy to program xxx Extension for yy CO Line access e Press 2 This advances to CO Line Access for extension xxx and CO yy e Press EF mae until the iS value for this database item displays Y N e Press a 2 D up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen and input another extension and CO iy Or e Press 2 or Fest to select the previous or next sequential CO Line for the selected extension e Press 2 until the appropriate value for this database item displays e When finished programming CO Line Access press Miata screen or exit programming up or down to return to the DB Item Select Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Program CO Line Groups for Alternate CO Line Groups e Used to highlight Extension Then press e Used tohighlight CO Line Assignment Then press Notice the display header Extension 1 05 The 1 05 indicates that this is the first of five pages for this database screen Pag
4. to highlight System Application and then press e Used 8 tohighlight Category 1 and then press e Used to highlight the database item PC DBA Connection Auto Log Off Log On Again as required e Press until the appropriate value displays e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Used EB tohighlight System Resource and then press To program the built in Modem Directory Number and or Modem Baud Rate P7290 IMM 3 196 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Used EB to highlight System Resource and then press e Used EB tohighlight Modem A Serial Port and then press e Used to highlight the database item Built In Modem Directory Number e Press e Input the appropriate directory number as allocated in System Application Numbering Plan Extension Directory Numbers e Press
5. to highlight the Y N database item under the Record Allow column for the extension to be programmed As you move the cursor it can be positioned horizontally in association with the extension number under the vertical Record Allow column Press to change the value of the database item Y N Continue programming all those database items where changes are required When all changes are made press escape to exit this programming You will be prompted to confirm exit request press Y for yes P7290 IMM 3 26 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave System Reminder unchanged e Press Y to save changes e You will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave System Reminder unchanged e Press Y to save changes e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Used to highlight Extension Application and then press e Use to highlight Auto Recording Member and then press The cursor is now positioned on the first database item Mem1 Member 1 e Press to change or enter data for this database item If an extension number is already programmed into this position it will be displayed here If not the data will show NULL e Using the numeral keys of the keyboard enter the exten
6. Default Settings CO Line Private To is set to NULL none for all CO lines Range is Null any extension number Programming Abstract Program the CO Lines required for private operation to the designated extension via the Private To setting Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest pho ore and 2 4 lt are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the ascoclated operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 02 740 755 10 then press E This advances to the Private To programming for the CO Line selected e Press E3 e Input the extension number where this CO Line is to be assigned as private e Press HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press aii to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used to highlight CO Line and
7. Manual Diagnostics testing can be invoked for the entire system or for one module or module port EE Diagnostics oS SSS haa ii Self Test Test Report i Self Test pS SS l i Wait for Result Don t wait When invoking the test for the entire system it is recommended not to wait for the result since this will take several minutes and force PC DBA to wait for the diagnostic report While waiting it is not possible to perform any other PC DBA functions When the Test Report option is selected the DX 80 will deliver the last Diagnostics test report to PC DBA Screens and notes of the information included in this report are shown on the following pages P7290 IMM 4 20 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 i Cnt KSU Revision K16UMO F19 Date 01 02 14 Notes l i This is an overview screen of test results Diagnostics e At the time this report was taken the Modem Module MDM was in the testing state l i BOARD TYPE Notice that the PC 8 Module reports l CONNECT Since the PC 8 is its own l COMMON CTRL BOARD CPM BOARD self contained system that runs i independently of the DX 80 processor OPTION BOARD 8 VOICE MAIL BG CONNECT and DISCONNECT are the only conditions reported for this module l MODEM BOARD MDM BOARD Move the cursor to any board Cabinet and Cabinet 1 press to get
8. Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Voice Mail Analog Integration The DX 80 system may be interfaced to a third party voice mail system via spare analog ports Doing so occupies these ports and therefore reduces the number of system ports that can be used for the telephones FAX machines modems etc Use of the DX 80 DX SO voice mail system is highly recommended The DX 80 DX SO is a digital integration that does not occupy valuable port space of the DX 80 system See Voice Mail Digital Integration Using voice mail greatly enhances the use of the DX 80 system Features accessible when voice mail is installed vary depending upon the third party product connected Features that the DX 80 system will accommodate include Automated Attendant Extension unique voice mailboxes Call Forward to extension voice mailboxes Answering Machine Emulation UCD Queue Announcements P7290 IMM 3 235 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Menu Routing e Voice Record e Automatic Voice Record e Specific CO Line Greetings on Automated Attendant Related Features Auto Record Call Forward CO Line Predefined DISA Call Forward Extension Predefined CO Line Ringing Modes Universal Call Distribution Groups Messaging Voice Voice Call Recorder Call
9. You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Hold Abandon Each CO line has a programming option that directs the system to monitor distant party disconnect This is a useful network feature in busy office environments where the inside party accidentally presses the Hold ICM or DSS button while expecting the outside line conversation to be concluded Anytime the system detects a disconnect signal from the Central Office an existing Hold condition will be released freeing that line for future inbound outbound traffic Related Features Transfer CO Line Loop Supervision Hold Common System Call Abandon Hold Exclusive Related Programming CO Line Call Abandon Call Handling Hold Abandon Time Conditions a Alltypes of Hold e g System Hold Exclusive Hold and Conferen
10. to highlight Alternate Attendant database item Press to select this data item for change The data item is ready for input Enter the extension directory number to be assigned as the Alternate Attendant Extension Press Used 8 e to highlight the next database item to be changed and follow the conventions used in the previous steps to complete any other changes required When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note changes made via PC DBA are NOT updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming Guide section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Attendant Extension DSS Console Button Programming 1 The Attendant Extension DSS Console has 60 buttons that may be programmed for any of the available DX 80 system directory numbers Fo
11. 7 The recorder will return to idle and the conversation up to the time the code was entered second time will be recorded in this extensions voice mailbox The display will return to the connected condition Conditions a You may program a Flexible Feature button for this feature code b If you use a Flexible Feature Button for this feature e During recorder set up the associated lamp for that button will light steady red e When recording begins the lamp will light steady green c Outgoing call recording begins after the Call Duration Timer has expired d Placing a call on hold constitutes completing a call and ends the recording function Default Setting Extension Record Allow N Range is Y N Programming Abstract e Program the extension s that should be allowed to record calls for Record Allow Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest pho he and E42 are interactive LCD button operations Use the three Puttes below the LCD display to aciuate the SIE operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password H HH HH F Note This password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 01 101 156 20 to program Record Allow for the selected extension 101 156 e Press 2 The display will show the current setting for Record Allow for this extension P7290 IMM 3 234 DX 80 I
12. Call Abandon Call Handling CO Line Conference Call Handling Talk Abandon Time Call Handling Meet Me Conference Talk Time Call Handling Conference Tone System Application Meet Me Conference Directory Number Operation transfer a caller to a Meet Me Conference 1 While connected to another extension or CO Line press sl 2 Dial the Meet Me Conference location where this party is to be connected 390 397 3 Hang up to complete the transfer Operation join a Meet Me Conference 1 Dial the Meet Me Conference location that you wish to join 390 397 2 Hang up when finished Operation join a Meet Me Conference from the auto attendant 1 When answered by the DX 80 system automated attendant dial the Meet Me Conference location that you wish to join 890 397 2 Hang up when finished Conditions a Itis highly recommended that the all CO Lines be set at the factory default for Call Abandon Y to optimize Meet Me Conference functionality b When Call Abandon is set to N for any CO Line you must set the Meet Me Conference Talk Time to some value other than 0 This is the only facility that will allow the CO Line to be disconnected if Call Abandon is No c Upto four simultaneous connections may join any one conference d Upto eight simultaneous conferences may be established at any one time Default Settings Call Handling Meet Me Conference Talk Time is set at O unlimited
13. DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Use 8 to highlight Call Handling Then press Use 8 to highlight Category 2 Then press Use to highlight SLT Hook Flash Start or End Press until the appropriate timing displays Continue making other programming changes as required When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Flash CO Line Flash
14. DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Privacy Factory default settings provide privacy for all intercom and CO line calls These calls may not be monitored or interrupted by other extensions If your programmed Class of Service allows you to have the Privacy Release and Voice Over Busy features you may use those features to override the Privacy feature Related Features Intercom Calling Intrusion CO Line Calling Monitor Privacy Release Operation Whenever Privacy is not Released conversations are private from interruption Conditions a Monitor can be used to listen in on existing conversations b Intrusion can be used to Barge in on existing conversations c If Privacy Release is set to Y for any CO Line that CO Line conversation can be entered into by another extension Privacy Release Privacy Release simplifies call processing by removing one of the safeguards Privacy is typically required in most business applications but in some environments privacy encumbers the necessary operation CO Line access privileges can be freely accessible without regard to the conversation under way To implement this operation the Privacy feature can be programmed as Released on the CO Line s that are intended to function in this way This setting is often desirable when the system is installed in a home or home office The Privacy Release setting is applied on a CO Line basis That is one CO Line may
15. FCC Registration Numbers For systems configured for Key System operation each CO line appears D6XTAI 40144 KF T on its own dedicated button For systems configured for hybrid operation CO lines may be accessed D6XTAI 40145 MF T by dial codes and Pool Loop buttons Signaling internal data Audible Signals CO Line Ringing Scheme 0 300ms On 400ms Off 300ms On 4 seconds Off Scheme 1 1 second On 3 seconds Off Scheme 2 1 second On 3 seconds Off Distinctive 1 follows ring cadence of Ring Scheme selected Distinctive 2 follows ring cadence of Ring Scheme selected Distinctive 3 follows ring cadence of Ring Scheme selected Distinctive 4 follows ring cadence of Ring Scheme selected SLT SLT bell follows ring cadence of Ring Scheme selected Intercom Ringing Scheme 0 1 second On 3 seconds Off Scheme 1 1 second On 3 seconds Off Scheme 2 300ms On 400ms Off 300ms On 4 seconds Off Distinctive 1 follows ring cadence of Ring Scheme selected Distinctive 2 follows ring cadence of Ring Scheme selected Distinctive 3 follows ring cadence of Ring Scheme selected Distinctive 4 follows ring cadence of Ring Scheme selected SLT SLT bell follows ring cadence of Ring Scheme selected Message Wait Callback MO follows ring cadence of Ring Scheme selected P7290 IMM 1 19 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 MTBF Mean Time Between Failure data Mean Time Between Failure Analysis System components 170 0 CPM 29
16. File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged P7290 IMM 3 36 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Call Back CO Line cesk This feature allows you to queue a busy CO line and reserve that CO line for use when it becomes available This feature eliminates the need for you to continually observe the line status for availability You may only have one Call Back active at any time Related Features Delete all Call Back F Related Programming CO Line Assignment Operation 1 Press a busy solid Red LED CO Line or CO Line group button or dial a CO Line access group number 9 800 806 740 755 While the busy tone sounds the display will read 2 Press Esk Interactive Soft Button or Dial on the dial pad Confirmation tone will be heard and the display will read A few moments later the display will return to an idle state When the selected CO Line or a CO Line in the selected CO Line group becomes available fast ringing will be heard at the extensio
17. LNR empty SNR No Saved Number Memo No Saved Number Telephone Lock No Auto Hold No Page Receive Yes Busy Ring Yes Hotline to NULL none Dial Pad Confirmation Touch Tone I gt 1 Dial Pad Confirmation is a tactile response tone that confirms Dial Pad button operations Whenever a dial pad button is pressed while this feature is enabled default a low volume tone is emitted through the telephone speaker indicating that this dial pad button has been pressed This tactile response feature is either very desirable or disliked This feature code allows the function to be disabled if necessary Operation 1 While the telephone is idle press 1 Confirmation tone is heard and the display indicates the current status 2 Momentarily the display returns to idle Direct Inward System Access DISA Optional AAM required This feature allows you to remotely access system resources such as System Speed Dial CO Line Access and Intercom dialing Any number of DISA lines may be assigned as incoming DISA access based on the system service mode Day Evening DISA can be accessed via the Automated Attendant as well as by dedicated DISA lines Access to DX 80 system resources for out calling is secured by means of verified passwords against the assigned extension number Use of system resources is accomplished only when a valid extension number has been entered and when the password entered matches that stored for
18. Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing The program title page displays P7290 IMM 3 28 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press any key at the program title page to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the Main Menu The PC DBA menu is then shown e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu e Used tohighlight Call Handling Then press e Used tohighlight Category 2 Then press e Used to highlight one of the three Automatic Redial data items and press e Attempts requires input from the keyboard Once you press Enter you must input the appropriate value from 0 99 Note 0 disables Auto Redial After the data has been input must be pressed again to store the new data move on to the next database item e Interval can be set to one of the available choices which are selected in sequence with each press of the key e Waiting Time can be set to one of the available choices which are selected in sequence with each press of the key e Continue programming other database items as required e When all changes are made press escape to exit System Reminder programming You will be prompted to confirm exit request press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort chang
19. P7290 IMM 3 243 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 2 The display indicates the call status When the voice mail connection is complete you will hear your voice mailbox name 3 Use the voice mail user guide and audio prompts to retrieve messages and invoke other mailbox operations Send messages update personal settings etc 4 Hang up to disconnect the call Your voice mailbox will be closed automatically by the DX 80 system assuming programming has been properly completed Operation transferring a call to any users voice mailbox 1 While connected to a call press the Voice Mail button Can Or press WAY and dial 4 3 3 2 The display prompts you to enter the user s voice mailbox where this call should be routed Input the user s voice mailbox usually the same number as the extension Then hang up to complete the transfer 3 The call is routed to the mailbox entered in a record mode so that the caller can leave a message for the mailbox user Operation retrieving messages from your voice mailbox 1 When messages are waiting in your voice mailbox the display will indicate that messages are waiting and advise you of the number of new messages 2 Press the center LCD Interactive button Or dial the voice mail code 4 Aconnection is established and your voice mailbox will prompt you Use the voice mail user guide and audio prompts to retrieve messages and invoke other mailbox operat
20. Related Features CO Line Answering Position Transfer Distinctive Ringing CO Line Default Settings Distinctive Ringing is set to 1 Range is 1 8 Operation 1 Press the Distinctive Ringing Tone code 7 2 The current Tone is heard and the setting displays 3 Press 3 until the appropriate tone is heard and displayed Conditions a CO Line Distinctive Ringing overrides an extensions setting of Distinctive Ringing b The Distinctive Ringing code may be programmed on any available Feature button Default Settings CO Line Category 2 CO Ring Type is set to 0 for all CO Lines Range is 0 8 P7290 IMM 3 106 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Do Not Disturb 4 DND allows you to temporarily block and discontinue ringing from incoming CO calls and intercom calls You can activate DND while your telephone is idle or busy Some extensions with higher Class of Service may override an extension s DND condition When you have activated DND you will hear a special intercom stutter reminder tone when you lift the handset or use the speakerphone If you have assigned a button on your digital soeakerphone specifically for DND that button will light whenever you activate the feature Related Features Do Not Disturb Override Call Forward Do Not Disturb One Time Intercom Forced Intercom Call Forward Feature Button Disable Related Programming Extension Feature Button Disab
21. SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure P7290 IMM 3 155 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Intercom Calling Non Blocking Intercom Button 65 You can place an intercom call by dialing the intercom number associated to the extension you wish to call If a Direct Station Selection Busy Lamp Field DSS BLF button is programmed it can be used to place an ICM call Intercom calls can be placed hands free without lifting the handset Consideration must be taken for noisy environments that may be unsuitable for hands free connections Each extension can determine how you receive intercom calls Either Voice Announce Hands free mode Voice Announce Privacy mode or Tone Ringing mode See intercom Mode Selection Related Features Intercom Mode Selection Auxiliary Lamp Auto Line Select Intercom Mode Selection Forced Intercom Tone Ring Intercom Non Blocking Forced Intercom Call Forward Flexible Feature Button Programming Flexible Button Programming Operation 1 If Hot Key is disabled you must first press the Intercom Button E button or lift the handset to get intercom dial tone 2 Dial the extension number 101 to 156 Or Press the DSS button for the extension that you wish to call 3 Hang up to end the call Conditions a Some applications may require a button to indicate use of the intercom feature at
22. The momentary operation of the hook switch at the analog device is deciphered by the DX 80 system in such a way that the previous call in progress is held or placed in a status of transfer awaiting further instructions from the user Flash Recognition is the specific timing associated to a user flash request The DX 80 must be setup to decipher a flash command from an on hook command where the user may go on hook then immediately off hook again to place a call There are two settings in the flash recognition timing The Start Time and the End Time Related Features Transfer SLT Single Line Telephones Call Park SLT System Hold SLT Related Programming Call Handling Category 2 SLT Hook Flash Start Call Handling Category 2 SLT Hook Flash End Conditions a The Start Time can be set very low to detect very fast operation of the hook switch but care should be taken when using low Start settings since the timing may allow line noise to trigger a flash command b The End Time can be set very high to detect very slow hook flash operations but care should be taken when using high End settings since the timing may not allow the triggering of On Hook commands in an acceptable period for the user c Use the default Start and End timing wherever possible Default Settings Call Handling Category 2 SLT Hook Flash Start is set to 200 Range is 60 100 1400 milliseconds Call Handling Category
23. 2 The Service Mode is advanced to the next mode 3 Repeat until the appropriate mode of service displays Conditions a The Service modes are displayed as follows EVE evening ALT Alternate Day mode P7290 IMM 3 176 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 b The Service Mode code can be programmed onto any extension feature button to indicate system status but only the attendant or alternate attendant can change the service mode using this button c Service Mode can be changed at any extension using Attendant Administration d Time Mode adjusts the service mode automatically according to the programming of Time Switching See Automatic CO Line Ringing Mode e ALT mode is an integral part of Automated Attendant Default Setting The system is in Day mode at default Off Hook Voice Announce with Hands free Answerback With Off Hook Voice Announce OHVA you can receive a voice announcement from a DX 80 system extension while your telephone is busy OHVA uses the speakerphone circuit to accommodate a second conversation path to your telephone To receive an OHVA call you must be using the handset for the call in progress You can t be on speakerphone and receive an OHVA announcement An OHVA call can easily be rejected if the call in progress should not be interrupted Related Features LCD Interactive Buttons Operation placing an OHVA to another extension
24. EEN e Connect Disconnect EE e Used toselect Connect then press The following modem control string displays aa aaa eses MODEM Connect EE Input MODEM control string l ATX1E0Q0V08C18D28H08108K08MO8N3 e Input the telephone number to dial at the site location Then press P7290 IMM 3 95 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Dialing begins and then the modems negotiate connection A successful negotiation results in the following confirmation display ee MODEM Connect on Connect Succeed EE a e The connection is also noted with an icon that appears in the upper left corner of the display Mdm e Once a modem connection has been accomplished F4 Connect is possible F4 Connect is required to link PC DBA to the DX 80 system processor F10 RS232C e F10 RS232C is the utility to setup the PC COM port To successfully setup the PC COM port you must know how the PC hardware is configured In this utility you must select the COM Port number 1 or 2 supported and the baud rate that will be used for the connection At default PC DBA is setup to use COM Port 1 at 9600 bps 9600 bps matches the default baud rate set for the DX 80 CPM PC DBA Port e While using amodem connection it is best to set the COM port baud rate at 2400 bps since this is the speed of the DX 80 Optional Modem Setting this speed can expedite the modem negotiation process since compression
25. File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Voice Announce Hands free Reply 98 The Digital Soeakerphone provides the ability to receive incoming intercom calls in Voice Announce Hands free mode When your telephone is in this mode you can reply to an intercom call by using the speakerphone You may also choose to place your Digital Soeakerphone in Voice Announce Privacy mode In this mode you can hear the person intercom calling you but your Digital Soeakerphone s microphone remains muted so the person calling cannot hear you Therefore calls may be announced to your extension while maintaining a private environment In addition to Voice Announce Hands free and Voice Announce Privacy modes a third mode is available called Tone Ring mode When Tone Ring mode is active the telephone will tone ring whenever an intercom call is made to that telephone Each time the feature code 9 8 isdialed the next mode in sequence is selected the associated tone is heard and associated vis
26. NO CONNECTION OPEN 1 01 6 106 NO CONNECTION OPEN 1 01 7 107 NO CONNECTION OPEN 1 01 8 108 NO CONNECTION OPEN EE R16UMO F21 ee ee ee a ben a been a a a Get a Zeg heet Gen fen Een P7290 IMM 4 29 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 SW HW Revision SW HW Revision can be invoked to view the current version of software installed in the DX 80 The Hardware Revision HW Revision is a label only field that allows the user of PC DBA to record the revision of hardware installed at the site This information is stored in the Database Save operation of PC DBA i Cnt KSU Revision K16UMO F19 Date 01 02 14 Event Time 20 55 05 Maintenance SW HW Revision BOARD POS Sw Revision Hw Revision l l CPM BOARD K16UM0 F19 NULL l l 8VM CARD POMVMO FO1 NULL l MDM CARD NULL NULL l DPM BOARD 1 01 PEDUMO F09 NULL l l OPEN 1 02 NULL NULL l l OPEN 1 03 NULL NULL e APM4 BOARD 1 04 PEAUMO FO9 NULL l l OPEN 2 01 NULL NULL l l OPEN 2 02 NULL NULL l OPEN 2 03 NULL NULL l OPEN 2 04 NULL NULL l l COM BOARD 1 1 amp 5 PTLUMO FO9 NULL l l OPEN 2 1 amp 5 NULL NULL l l l l l l foo R16UMO F21 ee ee o E E E E AE The Event tracking operation can be invoked to record system actions processed for the purposes of debugging the system This operation is rarely required and usually invoked following a request
27. Overflow 1 Timer e Press e Input the appropriate Overflow 1 Timer for this UCD Group Then press e Used ES tohighlight Overflow 1 Dest e Press e Input the appropriate Overflow 1 Destination for this UCD Group Then press e Used 8 tohighlight Overflow 2 Timer e Press e Input the appropriate Overflow 2 Timer for this UCD Group Then press e Used ES tohighlight Overflow 2 Dest P7290 IMM 3 227 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press e Input the appropriate Overflow 2 Destination for this UCD Group Then press e Used ES tohighlight Overflow Count e Press e Input the number of times that Overflow 2 Destination should be played RAN for this UCD Group Then press e Used e tohighlight Re Route Dest e Press e Input the appropriate Reroute Destination for this UCD Group Then press e Press to go to the previous menu level and program another UCD Group as above e Continue making programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort c
28. P AF34 0120 50 B3 01 53 AO B2 00 B4 00 8B FO 2E C4 1E 60 01 P S c o l AF34 0130 26 FF 30 FF 76 FC EB 40 82 7E 08 00 74 3F BO 00 amp 0 v t AF34 0140 50 50 B3 01 53 AO BO 00 B4 00 D1 EO D1 EO 8B FO PP S AF34 0150 2E C4 1E 68 01 26 FF 70 04 FF 76 FC 9A 4D 13 F7 h amp p v M AF34 0160 AB BO 00 50 50 B3 01 53 8A 4E 08 B5 OO 8B Fl 2E PP S N AF34 0170 C4 1E 70 01 26 FF 30 50 9A 4D 13 F7 AB 8A 46 08 p amp 0P M F The memory block requested is shown This data can be output to a printer or collected in a text file by third party software and sent to customer service for analysis Press to view successive memory blocks Enter Address Note Memory Address On hexadecimal format XXXX XXXX l Software Warm Start Use Software Warm Start to cause the system to restart operations This operation requires confirmation since all calls in progress will be disconnected Software warm Start ao EE EE EE Progressive operations in KSU shall be forcedly abandon Please press Y y to confirm P7290 IMM 4 34 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Software Cold Start Use Software COLD Start to cause the system to restart operations and reload default customer database data This operation requires confirmation since all calls in progress will be disconnected and the curre
29. Press pave e Press f to view DSS Console s assignments for this extension and to advance and select the next tenant group to program an Attendant and Alternate Attendant e Press Gadd E and enter the Index for the appropriate database item for the appropriate tenant group Use the following table for Index information Database Item Selected 04 02 1 01 Tenant Group 1 Attendant 04 02 1 06 Tenant Group 1 Alternate Attendant 04 02 2 01 Tenant Group 2 Attendant P7290 IMM 3 35 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 04 02 2 06 Tenant Group 2 Alternate Attendant 04 02 3 01 Tenant Group 3 Attendant 04 02 3 06 Tenant Group 3 Alternate Attendant Press MEMOS to return to the previous menu level or press A screen or exit programming 1 to return to the DB Item Selection Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Use 8 to highlight System Application Then press Use 8 to highlight Category 2 Then press Used 8 to highlight Operator Code Length Press until the appropriate code length displays Use 8 to highlight Operator Code Then
30. SLT See Hold Common Call Handling Hold Recall DEKT See Hold Common Programming Abstract See the programming instructions for the specific feature Recorded Announcement Device Recorded Announcement Devices RANSs are third party ancillary analog message devices connected to specially programmed analog ports for the purpose of playing announcements while callers wait for their call to be answered This call scenario is part of the UCD Group call distribution process A typical RAN message is Please continue to hold Your call will be handled in the order in which it was received The significant advantage of these announcements is the software control of callers waiting in queue for a UCD Agent to become available A caller can be played messages to assure them that they are still in queue and not forgotten while the system maintains the queue priority See UCD Groups The DX 80 enhances this function significantly through the use of integrated RAN messages as part of the voice mail implementation Whenever the optional DX 80 Voice voice mail system is installed into the DX 80 system platform RAN announcement space is allocated for each of the UCD Group Overflow and Re route Destinations This significantly reduces the cost and complexity of applying this function to UCD operation Related Features Uniform Call Distribution Devices Voice Mail Digital Integration Related Programming Extension Port Ty
31. Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Use 8 to highlight System Resource Then press Use 8 to highlight CO Line Names Then press The CO Line directory number 740 755 is listed along the left side of the display The current name label programmed is listed adjacent to each directory number Used 8 to highlight the CO Line Name to be programmed Press to change the data item value Input the name label using the PC keyboard Press to temporarily store this data Continue programming other database items as required When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manua
32. Y yes to continue with the save operation e The main Call Handling screen is again visible Program the Conference Tone Operation e Used tohighlight Category 3 Then press e Used ES tohighlight Conference Tone e Press until the appropriate value displays Y N e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged P7290 IMM 3 83 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Conference Supervised Unsupervised 77 The system can accommodate eight 8 4 member party conferences simultaneously Conference combinations may consist of 3 CO lines maximum and any number o
33. buttons will light when activated DND Call Forward DSS BLF etc while others such as Call Pick Up Background Music Last Number Redial do not Features are separated into two distinct categories for programming onto Flexible Buttons Directory Numbers or Feature Codes Related Features Feature Look up Feature Button Disable DSS Button Programming Extension Line Assignment Related Programming System Application Feature Key Copy DSS Copy Extension Feature Button Disable PC DBA Feature Key Programming Operation 1 While idle press 3 The display indicates that you are in Feature Key programming mode by prompting you to press a key 4 To program the button you must know the code type It is either a directory number or a Feature Code In general directory numbers are DX 80 system resources that are designated dialing codes in the system such as extensions and Page Zones Feature Codes are those features that extension might invoke If you are unsure what type of code is to be programmed exit Flexible Feature Button Programming and use Feature Directory Number Lookup to locate the feature and code you wish to program 5 To program a directory number gaa r Ek 6 Input the directory number and then press If you make a mistake use F and E3 to re enter the number 7 To program a feature code press Se T 8 Press the Feature button 9 Input the feature code D for CID Table
34. e Goto the Main screen as seen below PC DBA Database Save Database Restore Exitto DOS e Use tohighlight the Database Restore then press The following window displays to confirm your intended restore operation and to request the input from where the files will be restored Data File Directory C DX 80 DBA EES e Input the directory drive data and press Y The following confirmation is requested EEN e When a Database Resiore operation is performed the files from the selected directory or floppy disk will be copied into the working directory overwriting the current files in the directory It is imperative that this operation be performed with the confidence that the files in this working directory are not needed because they cannot be retrieved without specific retrieval steps that require DOS operations outside of the PC DBA program environment e Press Y The files are copied into the working directory When complete the following screen displays Copy Complete Old Data Files Are Renamed to BAK Press Any Key To Exit e Press any key The restored files are now available for editing e Enter into Database Programming to edit as required PC DBA Control Menu e Atthe bottom of the PC DBA screen special control functions of PC DBA are shown The following line bar can be found at the bottom of the display F1 Help F2 Unsave F3 RCV F4 SND F5 Cnt F6 Disc F7 Prn F8 Init F
35. tohighlight System Resource and then press e Used 8 tohighlight Preprogrammed Message and then press e Used to highlight the message to be changed Then press e Input the message and then press to temporarily store this data e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure P7290 IMM 3 170 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Modem Optional MDM The DX 80 system can be equipped with an optional internal modem for DX 80 Remote PC DBA Programming support When equipped the Modem Module provides a dedicated communicatio
36. 0 4Kg 138mm 4 5 in 18mm 3 4 in APM4 Analog Port Module 4 Port 1 2Kg 7240 AAM Automated Attendant Module P7290 IMM 1 17 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Unit Specifications W 138 mm 4 5in H 21mm 7 8 in L 7241 FL 4 210mm 8 25 in 0 5Kg 138mm 4 5 in 21mm 7 8 in 7249 MDM Modem Module 7260 00 DET BK Digital Executive Telephone Black LCD Speakerphone 7266 00 DSS Console Black Wiring data 234 mm 9 36 in 1 2Kg 188mm 7 52 in 64 5mm 2 58 in Maximum Cable Length Digital Key Telephone 26 AWG 255m 850 ft Distance measures in linear feet of cable from KSU to DET 24 AWG 425m 1416 ft 22 AWG 700m 1983 ft Standard Single Line Telephone 26 AWG 195m Distance measures in linear feet of cable from KSU to IST 24 AWG 340m 22 AWG 476m 650 ft 1133 ft 1586 ft Am AA ro Om Signaling Central Office PSTN data Dialing Specifications DTMF Dialing mode Frequency deviation 1 Rise time 3ms Duration of DTMF signal programmable 50 150ms 70ms default Inter digit time programmable 50 150ms 70ms default VM Port DTMF duration programmable 60 150ms 120ms default VM Port Inter digit time programmable 60 150ms 120ms default Pulse Dialing mode Pulse dial rate 10 pulses per second Pulse Make Break ratio 60 40 Regulatory data P7290 IMM 1 18 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01
37. 1 Call the busy extension 2 Press bel The bottom row options change as follows 3 Press 2 The OHVA call is established over the called extension speakerphone Operation receiving an OHVA call 1 While on a call using the handset you receive an OHVA call 2 Respond to the OHVA caller using the telephone speakerphone or press reject to end the OHVA call 3 Respond to the OHVA caller using the telephone speakerphone or press reject to end the OHVA call Conditions a When placing an OHVA call to an extension that is busy using the speakerphone the display options will not include the option b Ifyou are on a line and have Mute activated the line will remain muted until the Voice Over Busy is complete P7290 IMM 3 177 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 On Hook Dialing Digital Soeakerphone extensions may make outgoing calls without lifting the handset and monitor the dialing status through the built in soeaker The button lamp is lit when monitoring a call The Digital Soeakerphones provide full hands free soeakerphone operation in addition to On Hook Dialing Related Features Automatic Line Selection Hot Key Operation 1 When Hot Key is enabled dial any extension number while on hook Or Press any CO Line button and dial while on hook 2 When Hot Key is disabled press the ON OFF button or press an idle CO Line button Then dial while on hook Page Allow Deny You ca
38. AGROUNDED WRIST STRAP IS THE BEST METHOD OF ASSURING THAT STATIC ELECTRICITY DOES NOT DAMAGE CIRCUIT MODULES Locate the CPM and MUSIC option strap Move the MUSIC option strap JP30 from the EXT factory position to the INT position To install an external music source to either MC1 or MC2 or both 1 Remove the KSU cover four screws at each corner of KSU1 2 Connect grounded wrist strap to a suitable earth ground If a grounded wrist strap is not available bleed any static charge from your body before touching circuit modules by touching the gold painted surface of the inside of the KSU cabinet If the KSU is properly grounded this will momentarily discharge static electricity from your body NOTE A GROUNDED WRIST STRAP IS THE BEST METHOD OF ASSURING THAT STATIC ELECTRICITY DOES NOT DAMAGE CIRCUIT MODULES Locate the CPM and the MUSIC option strap 4 Make sure that the MUSIC option strap is in the EXT position Required for external source to operate on MC1 P7290 IMM 9 15 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Locate CPM the MC1 and MC2 connector jacks on the CPM Using an eighth inch mini plug connect the output of the external music source to the appropriate MC1 or 2 connector At default MC1 is used for Music On Hold This is easily accomplished using a prefabricated mini plug to mini plug cable available at Radio Shack em 7 Adjust the m
39. Automated Attendant optional 3 17 Automatic CO Line Ringing Modes 3 22 programming 3 22 Automatic Hold 3 24 features 3 24 programming 3 24 Automatic Record 3 25 features 3 25 programming 3 25 Automatic Redial 3 27 features 3 27 programming 3 27 Automatic Selection CO Intercom 3 29 features 3 29 using 3 29 Auxiliary Lamp LED Status Bar 3 30 Background Music 3 31 external music source 3 121 P7290 IMM Index 1 Battery Backup Memory 3 31 Battery Back Up System 3 32 Busy Lamp Field DSS 3 32 Busy Ring Allow Deny 3 33 P cable connections 8 call 3 7 Call Back CO Line 3 37 Call Back Extension 3 38 Call Duration Timer 3 39 Call Forward extension 3 39 Call Forward CO line predefined 3 44 Call Forwarding Extension Predefined 3 46 Call Operator Attendant 3 34 Call Park code 3 48 Call Park Call Park Answer 3 48 Call Pick Up Group 3 49 call queuing Call Back CO Line 3 37 Call Back Extension 3 38 Caller ID analog ports 3 50 call table 3 51 CO lines 3 51 Caller Identification Table Callback 3 51 Camp On extension 3 55 Class of Service extension 3 55 Toll Restriction 3 214 clearing features Default Set 3 98 CO Line Distinctive Ringing 3 105 private 3 188 CO Line Alternate Route 3 57 CO Line Assignment 3 59 CO Line Call Limiter Warning Tone 3 247 CO Line calling 3 61 CO Line Flash Single Line Telephone 3 200 CO Line Grou
40. Automatic Record via DX 80 Voice Mail System 3 4 The system permits 8 extensions to have the Automatic Recording capability When this feature is enabled for an extension the system will record all conversations at that extension automatically whenever the user is on an internal external call The record will be deleted automatically after the call is released or placed on hold unless the user presses Voice Recorder button 67 to save the recorded conversation before ending or holding the call When saved the conversation is stored in the extension user s mailbox Related Features Voice Mail Digital Integration Related Programming Extension Application Voice Mail Table Record Digit and Automatic Record Member Call Handling Voice Mail Dialing Ratio Operation Note the extension s assigned for Automatic Record must have a Voice Record button programmed at their extension See Flexible Feature Button Programming and Voice Record 6 7 1 Whenever the Automatic Record Member digital soeakerphone is engaged in a call the Auto Record function is initiated 2 Prior to recording the conversation the connection to the voice mail box must be set up During this setup time the display will show RECORDER SETUP and the Voice Record button will be lit steady red 3 When the connection to the voice mail box is established the display reads RECORDING and the Voice Record button LED is lit steady green Importan
41. DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note ask pest Brau En and 2 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the soca d operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays Program an extension for External Call Forward Index 01 101 156 18 e Input 01 101 156 18 for the extension number to program e Press E This advances to the selected extension ECF database item e Press dl SS until the appropriate value displays e Press up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen Program the various system External Call Forward parameters e Input 03 32 01 to program the appropriate Service Mode for use with External Call Forward e Press baal This advances to the ECF Service Mode database item e Press r to until the appropriate value displays e Press to advance to External Call Forward Talk Time e Press until the appropriate value displays e Continue making other database changes e Exit programming mode when changes are complete Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directo
42. Extension Receive Assignment CO Line Tenant Group CO Line Group Private To Conditions Receive Assignment does not inhibit a user from accessing a CO Line for out calling Default Settings All DX 80 extensions are Receive Assigned Yes to all CO Lines Programming Abstract Program the required extensions for Receive Assigned No per CO Line Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Bra he EEF and ps are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the EE tg operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays Program extensions for the ability to Receive answer CO Lines while ringing 01 xxx 24 cc e Input 01 xxx 24 cc where xxx extension to be programmed and cc CO Line number 01 16 to be programmed e Press baue This advances to the Receive Assignment for the extension and specific CO Line selected e Press E3 until the appropriate value displays Y N e Press back or next to go to the previous or advance to the next CO Line to program for this extension e Press MEE up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen and input the next extension CO Line to program e When all changes are complete pres
43. IM Installation amp Maintenance Manual O 00 A O A L COM DI COMDIAL The Rising Star P7290 IMM 03 01 COMDIAL The Rising Star Comdial Corporation 106 Cattlemen Road Sarasota Florida 34232 1 800 COMDIAL www comdial com Every effort has been made to assure the accuracy of the information in this document The manufacturer assumes no responsibility express or implied for errors or omissions Copyright 2001 Information in product documentation is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Comdial No part of Comdial manuals may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying for any purpose other than the purchaser s personal use without the written permission of Comdial Products mentioned in this documentation that are not manufactured by Comdial may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturers Copyright Comdial 2001 All rights reserved DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Table of Contents Ne SOV WT 1 1 Ste TEMO lOO VE 1 1 OPINE UE o e 1 1 AM a e 1 2 Voice Processing Modules said 1 2 Ccontguration Table dd 1 4 ISO SEIS UE ea 1 4 OW CR SUOMI 1 5 CPM Cental Processor lee EE 1 6 408M KSU1 component EE 1 6 Eege A 1 7 APM4 Analog Port Module 4 Crceutsel EE 1 8 DPMS Digital Pon Module g e D EE 1 8 COM4 Centra
44. It is often necessary to use A to view all elements of some categories e Use to exit one category and return to the previous level e When all changes in a category have been made press the escape key to exit that database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press o escape again to move up through the menu levels P7290 IMM 3 89 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e You may continue making other programming changes Or e Exit PC DBA programming to do so e Continue pressing escape until the Main menu is again in view e Used to highlight Exit to DOS Then press Note Changes made via PC DBA are stored in the working directory and not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed e Use the information found with each feature description for specific details on programming the various features Database Save and Restore The working directoryis the location allocated in the PC for all changes while the PC DBA program
45. Leading 1 is set to 44 Range is any available non conflicting directory number System Application Numbering Plan Ext Pickup Group Leading 2 amp 3 are set to Null none Range is any available non conflicting directory number Programming Abstract e Program the Ext Pickup Group Length if the necessary code is not three digits long e Program the Ext Pickup Group Leading Digits 1 2 3 if the necessary code is not 440 446 e Refer to Flexible Numbering Plan for programming instructions Caller ID to Analog Ports Standard The Caller ID feature requires Incoming Caller Identification as facilitated by the local telephone company This telephone company feature requires a subscription to the telephone company service to operate When Caller ID data is received on CO Lines connected to the DX 80 system this caller ID data is re broadcast to analog devices connected to analog ports of the DX 80 system This means that standard analog telephones that support the telephone company enabled Caller ID will function for this purpose even when connected behind the DX 80 system as a system extension P7290 IMM 3 50 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Since the equipment to interface this telephone company feature is standard on CO lines the DX 80 will display this caller ID information when delivered from the telephone company to all extensions programmed to ring on incoming calls All Analog Port devices w
46. MODEM BOARD MDM CARD CONNECT l l i CABINET 1 l l i CABINET 2 l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l EE R16UMO F21 a e ij e e o ie ce e e a a Ce a e e it e fe e ee e bd Zem Beni en To view a board installed PCB in detail use 4 to select the Board and then press P7290 IMM DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 The following display shows the detail of the CPM Board i cnt KSU Revision K16UMO F19 Date 01 02 14 Time 20 37 50 l Configuration l l l l Board Type CPM BOARD l l RS232 1 CONNECT RS232 2 DISCONNECT RS232C To view a Cabinet 1 or 2 board use to select the appropriate Cabinet and then press P7290 IMM 4 15 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 The following is a display of Cabinet 1 i cnt KSU Revision K16UMO F19 Date 01 02 14 Time 20 38 54 l i Configuration Board Status Cabinet 1 l l l l i BOARD TYPE STATUS l l BOARD 1 408 BOARD CONNECT l l BOARD 2 OPEN OPEN l l BOARD 3 OPEN OPEN l l BOARD 4 APM4 CONNECT l l BOARD 5 COM4 CONNECT l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l i R16UMO F21 meee rn rn en em en em pn rn rn en em em pen pn rn rn el To view a board in this Cabinet in detail use 8 toselect the appropriate Board and then press P7290 IMM
47. N Range is Y N Call Handling SMDR Call Output Account Code is set to Y Range is Y N System Resource Modem amp Serial Port CIL X_Rate is set to 9600 Range is 1200 2400 19200 Programming Abstract e Set any extensions not to be recorded to N for the SMDR output e Set the conditions for call logging as required Outgoing Calls and or Incoming Calls P7290 IMM 3 207 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Set the baud rate of the serial port to match the baud rate of the connected device Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brea pns and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the associated operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press EP The DB Item Select screen displays All database programming items are indexed for fast access Note Press the volume up or down bar to return to the DB Item Select screen at any time e To program an extension for SMDR Output e Input 01 101 156 19 then press E This advances to the SMDR Output programming screen for the extension selected e Press to change this database item Each time that 213 is pressed the value changes e Press the Volume Bar up or
48. PN7243 the caller may be routed to a menu box for further routing Please refer to the instructions in the DX 80 VP manual P7290 IMM 3 229 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 d Ina RAN application the uses the DX 80 VP Overflow and Reroute destinations are the following voice mail boxes Table of UCD Group Overflow and Reroute Destination Announcement Boxes in DX 80 PC 8 more may be created if required UCD UCD UCD UCD UCD Group 1 Group 2 Group AT Group 4 Group 5 Overflow 1 3101 3102 3103 3104 3105 3201 3202 3203 3204 3205 3301 3302 3303 3304 3305 Default Setting Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Overflow 1 Timer 0 Range is 0 255 sec Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Overflow 1 Destination NULL Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Overflow 2 Timer 0 Range is 0 255 sec Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Overflow 1 Destination NULL Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Reroute NULL Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Overflow Count 1 Range is 1 128 DX 80 Voice Processing Module PN7243 see programming instructions Extension Port Type EXT Range is Ext V A Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Attribute UCD Range is UCD V A Programming Abstract e Determine if the UCD Group Overflow destinations will be an extension of a rec
49. Range is 0 120 minutes in 10 minute increments Call Handling Conference Tone is set to Y yes Range is Y N Call Handling CO Line Conference 3 Lines Range is None 2 3 Programming Abstract e See System Application Meet Me Conference for Directory Number programming e See CO Line Loop Supervision for CO Line Call Abandon programming e See CO Line Loop Supervision for Call Handling Talk Abandon Time e Program Call Handling CO Line Conference for none 2 3 lines e Program Call Handling Meet Me Conference Talk Time to limit conference time for CO Lines involved in conference calls Required when Call Abandon is N for any CO Line e Program the Call Handling Conference Tone for Yes No operation Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note psk Peet Brow Er EEF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to actuate the ER operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed P7290 IMM 3 82 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays Program the Meet Me Conference Time 03 37 e Input 03 37 Then press 2 244 e Press r until the Meet Me Conference Time displays e Continue making other programm
50. Repeat these steps to select the appropriate mode of operation Transfer and Answer Call 68 Transfer and Answer is a convenience feature that speeds the process of completing a transfer and answering a ringing call by making the operation possible by one button This feature must be used from a feature button that has been designated for the purpose When a busy extension user secretary or attendant is in the process of transferring a call and another call rings in the Transfer Answer button can be pressed to complete the transfer and answer the ringing call at the same time Related Features Transfer Flexible Feature Button Programming Operation setup Program an available Feature Button for the Transfer Answer code operation Reference Flexible Feature Button Programming Operation use 1 While on a CO Line call and another call is ringing initiate the transfer process a Press lus b Dial the destination intercom extension number OR a Press the DSS button of the destination extension number 2 Press the Transfer Answer button The transfer is completed and the ringing call is answered Conditions Ringing calls must be ringing at your extension for feature to operate Transfer Transfer is used to deliver calls at your extension to another extension while maintaining the privacy of the connection This means that calls can be routed to DX 80 system destinations Extensions UCD Groups Vi
51. Tenant Reminder 1 e Press to allow entry into this database item e Enter the time for this alert interval in 24hr format Then press e Move the cursor to the next alert interval time if necessary and press to input this data e Move the cursor to the Play Time data item e Press until the appropriate play time displays e When all changes are made press escape to exit System Reminder programming You will be prompted to confirm exit request press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave this data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e You will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave this data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Alphanumeric Display Super Twist The Digital Speakerphone provides a two line sixteen column Super Twist LCD that supports thirty two 32 alpha numeric characters Super Twist technology provides greatly enhanced viewing from most viewing angles and eliminates the need for contrast adjustment The LCD is very useful for sending and receiving preprogrammed me
52. This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays Enter into CO Line Group Directory Swapping 07 01 01 08 04 e Input 07 01 0g 04 where g the CO Line Group number 1 8 e Press EP The current directory number assigned to this CO Line Group displays e Press Ene to swap this directory number with another CO Line group directory number 9 800 809 e Input the directory number that is to be used to access this CO Line Group Note The selected number must be assigned to this system resource in Flexible Numbering Plan e Press 4 The data is stored e Press the Ma up or down to return to the Database Item Select screen or press H11 to enter another CO Line Group number for which the directory number is to be swapped e Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Use tohighlight CO Line Application Then press e Used EB tohighlight CO Line Group Directory Number Swapping Then press The current CO Line Group numbers and the assigned directory numb
53. and press You are now required to enter the directory number to store on this button P7290 IMM 3 14 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Enter the directory number e g 150 for extension 150 or 400 for All Page e Press This data is now stored Move the cursor to the next button to be programmed using the same sequence to program any button of the DSS Console e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note changes made via PC DBA are NOT updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming Guide section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Attendant Extension DSS Console The Attendant Extension DSS Console is aself contained digital terminal that interacts with a predetermined digital speakerphone T
54. can cause call processing and system malfunctions or resets All risks are assumed by the user pecans Se ESC to Exit or Any other key to continue DX80 PC DBA cnt KSU Revision K16UMO F19 Date 01 02 14 Time 21 09 38 l Engineering Maintenance Tool I O Memory Mapping r Value H S O DI oa DO ze zen Enter Address Jj Note Memory Address in hexadecimal format xxxx R16UMO F21 Se ee ee a A a a A A P7290 IMM 4 36 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Index 4 408E 1 7 408M 1 6 DS S AAM installation 2 14 AAM Automated Attendant Module 1 11 accessing Feature Directory Number Lookup 3 128 Account Codes 3 1 Forced Verified 3 1 using 3 1 Alarm Clock System 3 5 Alarm Clock System using 3 5 Alarm Clock Extension 3 3 using 3 3 Alphanumeric Display 3 6 Analog Device Support Single Line Telephone 3 201 ancillary devices controlling via the telephone system 3 161 Answering Machine Emulation 3 7 APM4 adding 2 10 APM4 Analog Port Module 4 Circuits 1 8 Attendant 3 11 extension password 3 11 Operator Code 3 34 Attendant Administration 3 9 features 3 9 using 3 9 Attendant Extension DSS Console 3 15 Button Programming 3 13 Programming 3 13 using 3 15 Attendant Extension DSS Console Button Programming 3 13 Auto Attendant 3 17 AAM 1 11
55. conference room associates office etc e Follow Preset Invoke call forward at your extension so that it can be changed from another extension e No Answer Forward your calls in no answer conditions e External Forward your calls to another location or different telephone number This feature must be enabled for your extension in database administration Forward conditions may be set as follows for each call forward type e Intercom calls only e Intercom and CO Line including transferred CO Lines calls e CO Line calls only Related Features Do Not Disturb Forced Intercom Call Forward Message Waiting Forced Intercom Tone Ring Intercom Mode Selection Related Programming Extension Receive Assignment CO Line Line Assignment Call Handling XFR_I Recall XFR_B Recall CO Line Preset CFW P7290 IMM 3 39 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Operation Setup Press The display will show All Call Forward 1 Press 211 The display will read Input the directory number extension or Hunt Group where calls are to be forwarded Press Pal Display will show Select the type of calls to forward e co CO Line incoming or transferred calls e icm co both intercom and CO Line calls e Gm intercom calls only Confirmation tone is heard the extension returns to idle the Auxiliary Lamp is lit green and the display shows Hii in the middle of the bottom row
56. connected on this circuit breaker Connection to the PC call accounting system is made via an available 9 pin serial port connector that is designated as COM1 or COM2 in the PC configuration Once the cable is linked between the collection device and the DX 80 CPM SMDR port the collection device must be programmed for compatible link protocol baud rate At default the SMDR port baud rate is set at 9600 bps SMDR 9 pin serial cable pin designations ESCHER Poco mo vo orm eno osa ars ors a Serial Cable Installation Procedure 1 Remove the KSU cover four screws at each corner of KSU1 2 Connect grounded wrist strap to a suitable earth ground If a grounded wrist strap is not available bleed any static charge from your body before touching circuit modules by touching the gold painted surface of the inside of the KSU cabinet If the KSU is properly grounded this will momentarily discharge static electricity from your body NOTE A GROUNDED WRIST STRAP IS THE BEST METHOD OF ASSURING THAT STATIC ELECTRICITY DOES NOT DAMAGE CIRCUIT MODULES Locate the CPM and SMDR serial port on the CPM Connect the male end of the 9 pin serial cable into this SMDR port Connect the other end female of the 9 pin serial cable to the PC collection device serial port OF E ge Replace the KSU cover P7290 IMM 2 18 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Power up Initialization Proper operation o
57. set for Tone Ringing Headset Jack All Digital Speakerphones have a standard 2 5 millimeter headset jack This headset jack facilitates industry standard headset equipped with this jack type Headset jack adapters are often available from headset manufacturers to adapt your headset to the 2 5 mm jack A headset connected to the headset jack can be operated as an integral component of the DX 80 digital speakerphone Refer to Headset Mode for operation Related Features Headset Mode Headset Mode 9 All Digital Speakerphones have a standard 2 5 millimeter headset jack When Headset Mode is selected either by pressing a preprogrammed headset feature key or dialing the Headset Mode code the 5 button is used to activate deactivate the headset While in Headset Mode when the d button is pressed the extension status changes to an off hook condition with the headset active When the W button is pressed again the extension status returns to idle disconnecting any call in progress Related Features Flexible Feature Button Programming Operation Activate Headset Mode While the telephone is idle press OI or press the Flexible Feature button programmed with the Headset Mode code The display indicates the new status Operation Deactivate Headset Mode While the telephone is idle press 1 9 or press the Flexible Feature button programmed with the Headset Mode code The display indicates the new status Operati
58. will hear ring back before the line is answered by the auto attendant e Enter the new answer delay time from 0 20 seconds then press baal e Press F x The next database item Ring No Answer displays value is updated to the next valid time interval Valid times are 10 90 seconds in 10 second increments e Press The next database item Drop No Extension Dialed displays button is pressed the value changes Y N When set to Y yes the caller will be automatically dropped by the system if they do not make a selection or dial a valid extension directory number When set to N no if a caller does nothing he is routed to the designated Answering Position e Press The next database item XFR Transfer Mode displays changes between the two available settings Ring Back Tone and Music On Hold RBT MOH This is the call processing that is provided to the caller after they have made a selection and are being routed in the system e Press The next database item Waiting Code displays option to wait for a busy extension and try that extension again after 10 seconds The code may be any dial pad single digit from 0 9 or Note The system will not allow any digit to be assigned to more than one function Therefore the Inquiry Code and DISA Codes must be considered when changing the Waiting Code e Enter the new Waiting Code digit and press E to store e Press The next d
59. 15 DTMF conversion from pulse 3 190 DX 80 processor connecting to 4 8 disconnecting from 4 9 P Electrical data 1 16 enabling Hot Key 3 150 End To End Signaling 3 108 Enhanced Lettering Scheme 3 110 Entering into PC DBA Maintenance 4 7 Environmental data 1 17 Extension Call Forward 3 39 Extension Feature Status Check 3 111 Extension Paging Groups 3 112 extension password Attendant 3 11 Extension Password 3 113 Extension Pick Up Groups 3 115 Extension Predefined Call Forwarding 3 46 Extension Programming Copy 3 117 P7290 IMM Index 2 Extension Swapping 3 118 Extension User Name 3 120 Extension CO Line monitoring 3 172 External Music Source 3 121 external pager installation 2 16 External Paging 3 123 FR FAX Detection with Automatic Transfer 3 125 FAX Tone Detection 3 125 feature button disabling 3 126 Feature Button Disable 3 126 Feature Key Reset 3 127 feature keys resetting 3 127 Feature Directory Number Lookup 3 128 features Busy Ring allow deny 3 33 Do Not Disturb 3 107 figures AAM Automated Attendant Module 1 11 APM4 Analog Port Module 4 Circuits 1 8 COM4 Central Office Module 4 Circuits 1 10 DET Digital Extension Terminal 1 12 Direct Station Selection DSS Console 1 13 DPM8 Digital Port Module 8 Port 1 9 DX 80 Key Service Unit 1 5 KSU1 1 7 MDM Modem Module 1 11 Flash analog port SLT flash recognition 3 130 CO Line 3 131 PBX Line 3 13
60. 2 SLT Hook Flash End is set to 1000 COS 1 7 are set to No Range is 100 1500 milliseconds Programming Abstract Program the necessary Start and End detection period to assure accurate hook flash detection at analog devices Analog devices typically send hook flash commands at 600 900 milliseconds so a Start time of 200 and an End time of 1000 is usually sufficient Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note psk pesi Brow Er EEF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to actuate the associated operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code I and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 03 14 then press Sal This advances to the SLT Hook flash programming e Press EY This advances to the Start screen e Press to change the Start Time to detect SLT hook flash e Press to advance to the End screen e Press r to change the End Time to stop detection of SLT hook flash P7290 IMM 3 130 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Press KEEL to return to the previous menu level or press MUSEOS to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing
61. 3 Press bied to hang up the call Or lift the handset to convert the call from a hands free speakerphone connection to a private handset connection P7290 IMM 3 201 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Conditions a The speakerphone function is impacted by environmental conditions b Operation of the speakerphone in high noise areas may yield less than adequate results If this is the case in the area where your telephone is located the handset may be used to improve connection conditions c Todial intercom numbers directly from an idle condition the Hot Key setting must be Enabled Otherwise the extension user must press a programmed Intercom Button or press the ON OFF button prior to dialing the extension number Speed Dial Extension System Speed Dialing allows you to store frequently dialed numbers These numbers are accessed for dialing by the associated speed dial directory number Speed Number Location The directory number may be stored on any feature button for instant one button operation Extensions may store up to fifty 50 personal extension speed numbers in memory At default 20 personal locations numbered 470 489 are available for extensions 101 140 There are also two hundred 200 Speed Dial bins allocated for system wide use locations 500 699 System Speed Dial is programmed via Attendant Administration or via customer database programming You may choose to first press an idle CO line o
62. 5 Remove the installed CPM by removing the four brass standoffs used to secure the board Retain these standoffs for later use Remove the ribbon cable that connects the CPM to the 408M then set aside 6 Remove the COM4 module from the packaging and locate the four brass color standoffs packaged with the module 7 Position the COM4 over the 408M E right hand side where the CPM was just removed KSU1 8 Use the four brass color standoffs supplied with the COM4 to secure the COM4 in position P7290 IMM 2 12 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 9 Connect the COM4 ribbon cable from the 408M E to the COM4 connector Press firmly but not forcefully on the connector to secure a good connection For KSU2 installation skip step 10 and proceed to step 11 10 Reposition the CPM over the installed COM4 and secure using the four brass color standoffs removed in step 4 11 Make cable wiring connections to the 4 CO Line ports as required The FCC requires that wiring of CO Lines into a Key Service Unit be separated from wiring of station apparatus into a Key Service Unit Therefore the installer must use a separate cable for wiring of stations and CO Lines 12 Replace the KSU cover and secure with cover screws 13 Restore KSU power Adding an MDM Modem Module One MDM Modem Module can be added to KSU1 The Modem Module will allow remote access to the DX 80 telephony system database and Maintenance functions using
63. 7890 123 456 7890 123 456 7890 into locations 500 and 501 enter into location 500 1 2 3 4 5 6 7890 1 50 1 82 where 5 O 1 isthe second speed number location Enter into 501 123 456 7890 123 456 7890 To dial this number access only location 500 Attendant E One primary attendant may be assigned in each of the DX 80 system s three 3 Tenant Groups The standard Digital Speakerphone will serve as the attendant telephone When assigned as attendant this extension supports general system functions like Line Recall Forced Incoming ICM Call Forward and manual evening or alternate service mode operation The attendant will receive all intercom calls directed to the Attendant Directory Number 0 at default The attendant extension has an internal call queue that allows multiple intercom calls to be directed to the attendant atthe same time A second alternate attendant position may be designated in each tenant group for common sharing of incoming CO line calls or load sharing during peak traffic periods The attendant s extension password allows for control of the system service mode Day Evening Alternate Time time of day settings System Speed Dial number programming and recording of the optional Auto Attendant greetings The attendant extension may be connected to any system station port and be assigned any intercom extension number in the numbering plan Related Features Do Not Disturb e Forced
64. 8 digits e Assign Account Codes Up to 600 unique account codes may be assigned Each is given a specific Class of Service to allow the associated dialing criteria established in that Class Of Service see Toll Restriction Default Setting Account Code length 3 digits Range is 2 8 Account Codes None programmed Range is any numeral 0 9 maximum of 8 digits Account Code Class of Service 0 Account Code Disabled N Extension Classes of service all calls allowed Account Code Access Code 79 P7290 IMM 3 1 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brau he EEF and 2 are interactive LCD button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the soca ed operation Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password HHH HH F Note This eight character password can be changed Press EY The DB Item Select screen displays Input 05 02 Press Fans Press Ent The Account Code database item LENGTH displays Press change until the appropriate account code length displays Press Fei The account code database item PASSWORD displays Press pre The ID Number of the account code to be changed is required Enter the account code number 001 600 to change display Press EPs The existing programming displays NULL empty
65. AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Program Digit Interval s and assign Extension CO Line COS to Digit Intervals e Used tohighlight Restriction and then press e Used tohighlight Toll Restriction and then press e Use Y tohighlight the FROM or TO column of the Digit Interval e Press e Input the digit s to be monitored E g to restrict long distance and operator calls input 2 in the From column and input ff in the To column Thereby eliminating 0 and 1 as possible first dialed digits e Use d Y tohighlight the Extension or CO Line COS under the service mode Day or Eve for the Interval e Press toselect Y or N for this COS Mode Interval e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Ove
66. AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Tochange the total length allotted to this message press 213 gt Enter the new time in seconds 00 99 then press sake The assay shows AUTO_ATT NO 1 indicating that you will eal the recorded greeting for the first port Keep in mind there are four ports Each recorded simultaneously during the record operation You may use the function to playback each individual port to test each for proper operation e Presspeceor to begin recording this greeting Once enart has been pressed the record operation is immediately begun Note The length of the message greeting to be recorded cannot exceed the allotted time length for this greeting message gt Press E 3 to end the recording of this message Note If the Record Time is exceeded the record BEE will end automatically J button to return to the previous level of setup 1 DAY GREETING e Press the Walz To skip to the next greeting message press Feil The display will show 2 ALT GREETING Use the conventions described for 1 DAY GREETING to playback and record all greeting messages When finished with setup of the automated attendant press or hang up the handset to end the setup session Conditions a D Automatic CO Line Ringing time settings must be programmed in Time Switching and completely set for a seven 7 day week for Automatic CO Line Ringing Modes to properly follow a automatic swit
67. Backs prior to receiving Call Back Alert ringing 1 Press Conditions a Ifyou press i 4 during the Call Back Alert ringing the Call Back will be cancelled and the display will read P7290 IMM 3 38 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Your extension will return to an idle status b To invoke a Call Back at an extension that is in the Voice Announce mode you must first Force Tone Ringing _ c Ifthe Call Back is not answered during the reply alert ringing the resoonse message will be displayed until you press either peri or ei d The Call Back process begins when both your extension and the called party s extension are in an idle on hook mode Call Duration Timer This feature is enabled in the Database Programming on a per extension basis When enabled any outgoing CO line will be automatically timed and then dropped after the system Warning Tone time is exceeded This feature is normally used to control outgoing call traffic Related Features SMDR Warning Tone Warning Time Related Programming Call Handling Call Duration Time Conditions The Call Timer begins after the Call Duration Time has expired Call Forward Extension There are many Extension Call Forward choices e ALT Forward all of your calls e Busy Forward your calls when your telephone is busy e Follow Me Forward calls at your extension to the extension where you are currently working
68. Busy Call Forward 1 Press pHs The display will read Input the directory number extension or Hunt Group where calls are to be forwarded Press E Display will show Select the type of calls to forward e co CO Line incoming or transferred calls e icm co both intercom and CO Line calls e Gm intercom calls only Confirmation tone is heard the extension returns to idle the Auxiliary Lamp is lit green and the display shows hii in the middle of the bottom row No Answer Call Forward 10 Press F x The display will read 11 Press 2 The display will read 12 Input the directory number extension or Hunt Group where calls are to be forwarded 13 Press E Display will show P7290 IMM 3 40 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 14 Select the type of calls to forward e co CO Line incoming or transferred calls e icm co both intercom and CO Line calls e Gm intercom calls only Confirmation tone is heard the extension returns to idle the Auxiliary Lamp is lit green and the display shows Hii in the middle of the bottom row External Call Forward 1 Press r The display will read 2 Press 11 The display will read 3 Input the telephone number cell phone other office etc where calls are to be forwarded 4 Press pavs Confirmation tone is heard the display briefly shows the telephone number where CO Line transfers will be routed The extension ret
69. DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask eet Brau En and ps are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the sesociatad operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 01 101 156 04 then press E e Press ehg until the Paging Group for the selected extension displays e Press ED to return to the previous menu level or press MUA to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming P7290 IMM 3 112 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used to highlight Extension Then press e Used tohighlight Category 1 Then press e Use tohighlight Paging Group for the extension e Press until the necessary Page Group number displays for this extension e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all changes are made pre
70. DND Extension User Password F97 Hotel Mode Caller ID Table review F6 Room Status F7 Ring Mode F63 Attendant Administration F 0 e Service Mode Change e Auto Attendant Message Record Review e Temporary Service Mode e System Speed Dial e Call Forward Auxiliary Lamp Related Programming System Resource Attendant Attendant Alternate User Password System Application Operator Code Operation 1 Any extension may dial O to reach the programmed system attendant extension 2 All unanswered transferred calls will route to the attendant extension 3 When multiple internal calls are waiting in queue for the attendant extension the display indicates the number of waiting calls in the display the illustration shows two calls waiting P7290 IMM 3 11 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Conditions a The extension User Password programmed for the Attendant extension is required for entry into Attendant Administration Caller ID Table and Ring Mode b Only the designated Attendant extension can manually change the system Ring Mode c Only the designated Attendant extension can manually change extension Room Status Hotel Mode d The Attendant extension receives all calls via any extension that invokes Forced Intercom Call Forward Default Setting Extension 101 is the system programmed Attendant Extension 101 User Password is 9999 Programming Abstract e Program the selected extension a
71. Digital Extensions at predetermined intervals during the day Eight 8 intervals are available for predetermined operation The Play Time is also predetermined and set in the system programming Play Time dictates how long the music source will be played over the digital extensions the time period is adjustable from 1 to 10 minutes The music source connected to the MC 1 music connector is used for the System Reminder unless the internal music source is selected by option strap on the CPM see Installation Related Features MC1 Music Source Related Programming System Application System Time PC DBA ALT T System Resource System Reminder Operation No user operation is required When the programmed time interval s are reached the internal music source or MC1 music source is heard over all digital extensions for the duration of the Play Time Conditions Di ASystem Reminder in progress is canceled at an extension when another function is invoked b The music source connected to the MC1 music input is used for the System Reminder c Extensions monitoring Background Music channel MC1 will not recognize the System Reminder d The music alarm will not play at an extension that is busy on a call handset or speakerphone or in Do Not Disturb DND mode Default Setting No System Reminder times are set for any system Tenant Group Alarm Play Time is set at one 1 minute Programming Abstract e Set
72. Digital Speakerphone will display ALL CO LINES BUSY c The database programming data fields Dial Wait Time and Dial Tone Detection directly affect the performance of LNR When these features are enabled the telephone will either wait until dial tone is detected on a CO line or wait for a preprogrammed period of time before digits are dialed from the LNR memory on the CO line d To LNR immediately depends on whether tone detection is allowed or pause timers apply If tone detection is allowed the system will Redial the last number after CO dial tone is detected Otherwise the system will Redial the last number only after the pause time for tone detection is exceeded e The LNR feature code may be programmed on a programmable feature button f LNR will repeat a hook flash in the same sequence as it was first dialed If a speed dial number was first dialed g LNR will dial the speed dial number and any subsequent manually dialed digits h Inthe event that all CO lines are busy you will hear busy tone and your telephone will display LCD amp Interactive Buttons ap ED GED The DX 80 Digital Speakerphone is equipped with a 2 row 16 column Liquid Crystal Display to enhance features operation The display indicates feature operation status and provides for input based on feature use The display also facilitates the standard Caller ID feature allowing all digital speakerphones to receive caller ID information as it is received from
73. Disc F7 Prn F8 Init F9 Mdm F10 RS232C Use the associated F Function keys on the PC keyboard to access the various operations The functions and their specific operation are detailed in the text below F1 Help Press F1 to view the keystroke help menu of PC DBA There are two help screens F2 A Save U Save This is a function of PC DBA Programming only and is described in Database Administration Via PC DBA F3 Receive This is a function of PC DBA Programming only and is described in Database Administration Via PC DBA F4 Send This is a function of PC DBA Programming only and is described in Database Administration Via PC DBA F5 Connect Connecting to the DX 80 processor Once a physical connection cable or modem has been made between the PC and the DX 80 system You must link the two devices using the F5 Connect function Press F5 If an adequate connection straight through serial cable or modem connection exists between the DX 80 system and the PC you will see the following Connect prompt P7290 IMM 4 8 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Input the Database Administration Password At default this passwordis 8 spaces Press the space bar eight times When the correct all eight password characters are input the connection process is will begin If unsuccessful wrong password or poor connection the following error screen will appear Pm i
74. E mes falala i Tye AE ES DE ol e en Celeer MN Se Peris ES Tuu ES we Miz III 5 Press Erti to send the message to the called extension Operation Sending a Voice Message voice mail system required 1 Place a call to an extension you get no answer or busy 2 Press lt When the optional DX 80 Voice Mail system is equipped the options in the display change to add this option 3 Press PE The connection is immediately diverted to the DX 80 Voice Mail system Operation Answering a Message 1 Your telephone display indicates the Message Waiting P7290 IMM 3 168 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 If a Text Message was sent If For displays it can be pressed to review other messages left at your extension Press 2 s to display Text Messages Press Er to callback the extension who left a Call Me message Operation Canceling a Text Message or Call Me Message that you sent iP Press 96 2 Input the extension number where the message was left Then press 27 3 The message is deleted 4 Press f3 Conditions a Dial Pad Key 1 is used to select special characters Refer to the Letter Scheme feature b Dial before any dial pad key to insert the numeral on the dial pad key instead of a letter in this character position c When is pressed after a letter has been selected for this character position the selected letter is forced to lower ca
75. Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming P7290 IMM 3 87 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Database Administration Via PC DBA The DX 80 system allows the installer technician to administer system database parameters via an IBM Compatible Personal Computer The use of a PC has distinct advantages over programming the system via the digital telephone including specific database archiving via save function remote programming outboard programming program the system template into the PC memory then send it to the DX 80 when ready The PC program that interfaces with the DX 80 system is PC DBA PC Database Administration PC DBA requires the following resources in the PC environment e PC running DOS PC DBA can be run in a DOS Window but performance can be impacted by other Windows modules We do not warranty or guarantee any level of performance in the Windows environment e 640k minimum RAM e 386 minimum microprocessor e 2 megabytes minimum space on the ha
76. Flas it stewie orice ta Single Line Telephone CO Line Flash GE Single Line Telephone Analog Device Support cccocccccocccoccnoconocococnnocnnocnnononnononcnoncnnncnnncnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnn nan nnnnnrnnnrnnninennss EEN T A ele Speed Dial Extensi n SySten EE Station Message Detail Recording SMDR EE System TIMEA RR A R RE Ua eh St ce e EE TOMTREStICHON GlasS Ol ENIC E n oe Tone Pulse Inter digit Duration Selection cecccesccssscessecsseesseeeseeesseessseesseeceseecaeecsaeessuecsaseceaeseaeeseeeeeaeessneesaeeeans TOUCH TOMER Oth E RA Transfer and Answer Call DH Re Ter UCD Hunt Groups 1 24 410 433 Linear Distributed All Ho UCD Agent Log Off LogOn TO UCDOveniOwW el P7290 IMM TOC 4 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 UCD Voice ANNOUNCE Group ssrin dionan adena eaaa raaa aaa a eaa aa eE AEEA aaa aa a AEA OA EEEN EEEa aa A iaaii 3 231 Voice Announce Hands free Reply OB 3 233 Voice Call Recorder via Voice Mail System DI 3 234 Voe UE Ee e Lei e EE 3 235 Voice Mail Digital Integration Optional ENEE 3 243 tellt ORTO E 3 246 Warning Tome e Ce qu Unit EE 3 247 4 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting ccscccceceeeeceeeeseeeneeeeesesnseseeenseeeneesensesonsaseesaeeeoneeensenons 4 1 BEE Ua Ca Tee 4 1 Technical Problem SONNI msr E dd 4 1 Maintenance EE 4 6 P7290 IMM TOC 5 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 P7290 IMM TOC 6 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANC
77. Forward Recorded Announcement Devices via Voice Mail Automated Attendant usually part of the voice mail system Related Programming Extension Port Type Extension Record Allow Predefined FWD CO Line Answering Position Predefined FWD Call handling VM Dialing Ratio VM Monitor Time VM Reserve Port DISA Extension Application Voice Mail Table Extension Application UCD Group Operation calling into your voice mailbox 1 While the telephone is idle press the Voice Mail button CR Or 64 2 The display indicates the call status When the voice mail connection is complete you will hear the prompt for your voice mailbox 3 Use the voice mail user guide and audio prompts to retrieve messages and invoke other mailbox operations Send messages update personal settings etc 4 Hang up to disconnect the call Your voice mailbox will be closed automatically by the DX 80 system assuming programming has been properly completed Operation transferring a call to any users voice mailbox 1 While connected to a call press the Voice Mail button Ca Soe and dial 4 3 3 Or press e 1 The display prompts you to enter the user s voice mailbox where this call should be routed Input the user s voice mailbox usually the same number as the extension Then hang up to complete the transfer 2 The call is routed to the mailbox entered in a record mode so that the caller can leave a mess
78. Ifa Release Key is programmed this key can be used to clear any active condition Extension Alarm Clock mode etc with one touch b Hotel Enable must be set to Y yes for these features to operate Default Settings Call Handling Hotel Enable is set to N no Range is Y N Programming Abstract To allow the Tenant Attendant to set Room Status and Alarm Clock Extension features at other system extensions set the Hotel Enable to Y Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brey pns and e are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to aciuate the SEIN operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press EP The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 03 20 then press save This advances to the Hotel Enable programming screen P7290 IMM 3 152 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press chg Each time that change is pressed the value of this database item is updated e Press HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press e d to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then p
79. In band for other VM Message Waiting 96 station number to turn VM button LED on 96 station number to turn VM button LED off VM Control codes Disconnect Digit s 8 digits max Subscriber Calling via Intercom 4 digits max Transfers to VM 4 digits max Busy Forward 4 digits max No Answer Forward 4 digits max Direct Call Forward 4 digits max CO Line Recall 4 digits max CO Line Ringing 4 digits max UCD Overflow 4 digits max Record Digits for Voice Recorder function 4 max Delete Digits 4 digits max Suffix for transferred calls 2 max CO Line Loop Current sensing Interrupt programmable from 50ms to 2500ms P7290 IMM 1 15 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 8 Internal Page Extension Groups 1 External Page Port 1 Internal All Call 1 System Internal External All Call Speed Dialing 1000 total bins dynamically allocated 200 bins at default allocated for system wide use 20 bins at default allocated for extension use extensions 101 148 only 50 possible per extension 16 digits maximum per bin amp Onbyabusystaion oS Statens Canpedontoasas PY Stations Camped on to a busy line Message Executive Notification 6 preprogrammed 1 personal per station Message Executive Preprogrammed 6 BER Jee 40 simultaneous maximum per system does not affect VM message indications Toll Restriction o Tables 100 Tables per tenant 10 digits per entry Day and Evening CO
80. Out and Clean modes dialing at the extension is restricted to intercom calls only Related Features Extension Password Attendant Alarm Clock Extension Related Programming System Resource Attendant Call Handling Hotel Enable Operation Wake Up Calls via Alarm Clock Extension 1 While idle at the Attendant extension press QO 2 The display shows P7290 IMM 3 151 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 5 Chose if this alarm time should be set as a one time occurrence or repeated everyday by pressing the associated LCD Interactive button one or always Confirmation tone is heard and the display prompts for the next extension to program 6 Input the next extension for which a Wakeup call is to be set Then press bio Or 7 Exit Extension Alarm Clock mode lift replace handset or press caba twice Operation Room Status 1 While idle at the Attendant extension press 7 he display shows 3 Input the extension for which the Room Status is to be set Then press Bn 4 Press the button corresponding to the status in which this extension is to be placed Confirmation tone is heard and the extension status is updated The display prompts for the next extension status for which Room Status changes are required 5 Input the next extension to be set Then press EPH J Or 6 Exit Extension Room Status mode lift replace handset or press ges twice Conditions a
81. PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Hold Reminder The system provides a programmable timer to remind you that a call has been left on System or Exclusive Hold When enabled you will hear one ring tone repeated each time the selected hold time expires Related Features Hold System Exclusive Related Programming Call Handling Hold Reminder Conditions a Hold Reminder applies to both intercom and CO line calls b Hold Reminder applies to CO line calls that are on System Hold or Exclusive Hold Default Settings Call Handling Hold Reminder is set at 60 seconds Range is 0 90 seconds 0 disables the reminder Function Programming Abstract Program the Hold Reminder Time Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask Pest Brey oh and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three Buttons below the LCD display to actuate the See operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 03 07 then press 2 This advances to Hold Reminder programming e Press Se until the appropriate Hold Reminder Time displays e Press
82. PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Program UCD Group and Members Use 8 to highlight Extension Application Then press Use 8 to highlight Uniform Call Distribution Then press Input the UCD Group to program as the VM Hunt Group usually 24 Then press Used 8 8 gt Y to highlight Members Then press Leed 8 gt Y to highlight the member to program Then press Input the digital channel directory number as this member of the VM UCD Group Then press Continue until all digital channels are programmed When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu P7290 IMM 3 24
83. Press 5323 Enter the account code using the digits 0 9 on the dial pad When the correct number of digits are entered according to the designated length press save This database item is then updated Press f The Class of Service for this account code displays Press Eil until the appropriate Class displays for this account code password Press Fei The item DISABLED displays This setting is used temporarily disable the use of a particular Account Code without removing its programming DISABLED means that this account code is active Press to select Y or N to disable this account code password Press Pet to continue programming other account codes Or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing The program title page displays Press any key at the program title page to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the Main Menu The PC DBA menu is then shown Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Used 8 to highlight RESTRICTION and then press Use 8 to highlight Account Code Table and then press The cursor is now positioned on the database item account code LENGTH Press to change this item Or move the cursor to another item Note Changing the account code length will delete all previously pro
84. Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Use tohighlight Feature Key Programming Then press Program Extension Feature Buttons Used 8 to highlight EXT s Feature Keys Then press Input the extension directory number then press Use 8 to highlight the Flexible Feature Button that you wish to program then press Choose DIR No or FTR Access Key You also chose NULL which means nothing to disable the key operation Then press Input the Feature Access Code or Directory number Then press Continue making other programming changes as required for this extension When all changes are made press the escape key to exit button programming for this extension This returns you to the previous menu level where you may enter another extension number for which changes are to be made Input the next extension number and press Press the escape key again You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged Press Y yes to continue with t
85. Seet operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays Program Day Mode Answering Positions 02 740 755 13 01 01 e Input 02 ccc 13 01 01 ccc is the CO Line directory number then press save The Day mode Member 1 Answering Position displays e Tochange this member press cha P7290 IMM 3 77 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Or To advance to the nest member press next Press chg to change the stored member ringing answering position Input the directory number for the ringing position extension 101 156 UCD 410 433 or Virtual number 700 730 Press Save to store this data Continue making other changes or exit programming Program Eve Mode Answering Position 02 740 755 13 02 Input 02 ccc 13 02 ccc is the CO Line directory number then press save The Eve mode Answering Position displays Press chg to change the stored answering position ringing answering position Input the directory number for the ringing position extension 101 156 UCD 410 433 or Virtual number 700 730 Press Save to store this data Continue making other changes or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at
86. Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu P7290 IMM 3 242 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Voice Mail Digital Integration optional The DX 80 system may be equipped with the optional DX 80 Voice voice mail system This voice processing solution is fully integrated with the DX 80 system Performance of the digitally integrated DX 80 Voice is notably superior to that of a regular analog integration When DX 80 Voice is added to the DX 80 system the digital interface has the advantage of adding up to eight ports of voice mail while maintaining a maximum system configuration of 16 CO Line ports 48 Digital Telephone ports and 8 Analog device ports With DX 80 Voice there is no port loss The DX 80 digital integration also eases installation effort by automating setup of the three primary functions users wish to deploy in a voice processing system Voice Messaging Automated Attendant and Menu Routing Just install the DX 80 Voi
87. You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Program Call Abandon Timers as required to match the CO operation e Ueed tohighlight Call Handling Then press P7290 IMM 3 66 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Used EB tohighlight Category 1 and then press Notice the display header Call Handling Category 1 1 2 The 1 2 indicates that this is the first of two pages for this programming category e Press or to select page 2 e Used 8 e tohighlight the database item requiring change Talk or Hold Abandon Time e Press tochange the data e Input the new data for this database item Accepted entries are 50 1000 in increments of 50 e Press to temporarily store this data e Used tohighlight the next database item to be changed e Continue programming other database items as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prom
88. above 6 Press firmly but not forcefully on the AAM to secure a good connection into the CPM AAM connectors 7 Replace KSU cover and secure with cover screws 8 Restore KSU power Adding a KSU2 Key Service Unit 2 second cabinet One KSU2 Key Service Unit 2 can be added to KSU1 The KSU2 adds 8 eight digital DX 80 extension ports 4 four CO Line ports 1 one Power Failure Transfer port Extension Expansion connectors for 2 addition DPM8 or 1 APM4 Ribbon cable for one APM4 Ribbon cable for one COM4 KSU2 is connected to KSU1 via a designated connector located on the CPM inside of KSU1 KSU2 Installation Procedure 1 Be sure that KSU power is turned off 2 Remove the KSU cover four screws at each corner on both KSU1 and KSU2 P7290 IMM 2 14 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 3 Connect grounded wrist strap to a suitable earth ground If a grounded wrist strap is not available bleed any static charge from your body before touching circuit modules by touching the gold painted surface of the inside of the KSU cabinet If the KSU is properly grounded this will momentarily discharge static electricity from your body NOTE A GROUNDED WRIST STRAP IS THE BEST METHOD OF ASSURING THAT STATIC ELECTRICITY DOES NOT DAMAGE CIRCUIT MODULES 4 Locate the long cable attached to the 408E of KSU2 and route it out of the KSU cabinet into the KSU1 cabinet for connection on the CPM 5 Locate the CPM at
89. appear in use at other extensions Related Features Hold Reminder Hold System Hold Common System Call Handling Hold Reminder Related Programming Call Handling Ex Hold Time Hold Recall Hold Reminder Operation While connected to a CO Line press and then press Conditions a When you place a CO line call on Exclusive Hold the green lamp for that line at your telephone will flash fast and the red lamp will light steady at other extensions for that CO line b A CO line call will be placed on System Hold after the Exclusive Hold time expires You will hear a tone alerting you that the timer has expired and the hold condition for that CO line changes to System Hold The green lamp at your telephone will flash slowly and the red lamp at other extensions will begin to flash slowly c Exclusive Hold is used only for CO line calls d The Exclusive Hold duration is programmable from 1 8 minutes in the Database Programming Default Settings Call Handling Hold Reminder is set at 60 seconds Range is 0 90 seconds 0 disables the reminder Function Call Handling Exclusive Hold Time is set at 3 minutes Range is 0 8 minutes 0 disables Exclusive Hold Recall Programming Abstract e Program the Hold Reminder Time See Hold Reminder e Program the Exclusive Hold Time Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pesi Bra he EEF and ps are LCD interactiv
90. appropriate value displays e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Feature Key Reset 1 58 This feature is used to reset all Flexible Feature buttons to default settings Reference the Flexible Feature Button map in the Overview Specifications section of this manual to review the layout of these feature keys Related Features Extension Password Flexible Feature Button Programming Operation 1 While the extension is idle no call activity press 5 8 The display prompts for the password P7290 IMM 3 127 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 2 Enter the extension password then press sh
91. at that extension f In screened transfer if the destination extension answers your intercom call by lifting the handset the transferred connection is connected to the destination extension immediately when the transfer operation is complete Default Settings Call Handling XFR_l Recall Transfer Idle Recall is set to 30 seconds Range is 16 30 60 90 120 seconds Call Handling XFR_B Recall Transfer Busy Recall is set to 60 seconds Range is 16 30 60 90 120 seconds P7290 IMM 3 221 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming Abstract Program the recall time for calls that are transferred to an Idle Extension and for calls that are transferred to a Busy Extension Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brey oh and 2 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to aciuate the associated operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press show The DB Item Select screen displays All database programming items are indexed for fast access Note Press the volume up or down bar to return to the DB Item Select screen at any time e Input 03 10 then press This advances to the Transfer Idle Recall programming screen e Press until the appropria
92. backboard 3 Pre drill two 2 screw holes and install the two pan head No 10 screws supplied into the backboard with a regular screwdriver The screw heads should protrude about 1 4 inch from the backboard plywood Surface 4 Lift the KSU over the two screws allowing the screws to extend into the KSU slotted mounting holes As the KSU is allowed to rest in place on the mounting screws it will slip over the screw shanks until the top of the slot is reached Properly installed the KSU power transformer where the KSU AC power cord is located is positioned in the upper left corner The power switch and Power Heartbeat LED are positioned at the left side of the KSU toward the bottom Note It is very important that the KSU be correctly mounted to allow proper power supply heat dissipation KSU1 and KSU2 are intended to be wall mounted only 5 Ground the KSU Extend the earth ground 10 wire into the KSU opening at the lower left corner of the KSU Terminate the grounding wire onto the ground lug provided there KSU Wiring Note System power should be OFF before plugging in the station cable or while servicing port connections at the punch down block 66M1 50 Although each port is over current protected unnecessary shorting should be avoided P7290 IMM 2 4 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 The 408M E APM4 Analog Port Module COM4 CO Line Module and DPM8 Digital Port Module are equipped with RJ 11
93. be Privacy Released while another is still marked for Privacy thereby ensuring uninterrupted private conversations on those CO Lines Related Features Privacy Related Programming CO Line Privacy Release Operation 1 While a CO Line conversation is in progress and you know which CO Line to join press that CO Line button 2 If Privacy Release is set to Y YES for that CO Line you are allowed to join in on the existing conversation Conditions a Three extensions maximum may join a CO line conversation in progress b Privacy Release utilizes the system Conference Circuitry therefore while up to three extensions can joina CO Line connection the maximum Privacy Release multi party conversations Is limited to 8 eight Eight four party conferences Default Settings CO Line Privacy Release is set to N no for all CO Lines Range is Y N Programming Abstract Program the CO Lines for Privacy Release P7290 IMM 3 187 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brea ore and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the Seet operation Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed Press EY The DB Item Select screen
94. be provided on hold as well If neither of the two music channels is connected to a music source or if the music sources are not intended for the music on hold function the Beep Tone can provide confirmation to callers on hold that their call is still holding The Tone is a one second tone repeated every 4 seconds Related Features Background Music Related Programming CO Line MOH Source System Application Numbering Plan Music Source Operation Whenever a CO Line is placed on hold the programmed music source is heard Conditions The music channel s must be connected to some music source if background music or music on hold is necessary Default Settings CO Line MOH Source set to MC1 Music Channel 1 for all CO Lines Programming Abstract Program the Music Channel 1 or 2 or Tone for each CO Line Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Bree ot ESF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to aciuate the assoclaled operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 02 740 755 06 then press Paul This advances to the MOH Source programming screen for the CO Line input CO Line 1 740 CO Line 16 755 e Press r until
95. button to exit this programming and return to the previous menu level or press the Volume Bar to return to the Database Item Select screen e Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory then press Enter e Press any key at the program title page as requested to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the Main Menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA Menu The Database Programming menu is now displayed e To program an extension for SMDR Output P7290 IMM 3 208 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Use the cursor positioning arrows to highlight Extension and then press Enter e Use the cursor arrows to highlight Category 2 and then press Enter e Use the cursor arrows to highlight the database item SMDR Output for the Extension to be changed Note You may need to use the Page Up Down keys to view the extension for which changes are required e Press Enter Each time that enter is pressed the value of this database item is updated e When all changes are made press the ESC escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting gt Press N to abort changes and leave all da
96. column for the total current draw Amps 117VAC for this site Extended Total Amps P7290 IMM 1 14 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 System criteria and capacity Time Slots PCM 32 time slots x 4 Highways 128 voice channels TDM 64 Time Slots data processing Customer Database memory protection 300 hours via on board lithium battery no charging required CO PBX Centrex Lines 16 Digital Stations 48 Standard Single Line Telephones 16 Note 32 total possible Digital extensions in this configuration DTMF Receivers One dedicated per single line telephone port DTMF Senders Unlimited DTMF signal generation is derived from the core system tone resource Tone combinations are available as needed Tone Detectors Used to monitor call 2 Shared for advanced call processing system progress tones Busy Tone Ring back Tone features DISA ECF ABR etc etc Contacts 1 LBC can be programmed as associated to a CO line or dialed by an extension to actuate the contact DISA circuits Any number of CO lines may be programmed for DISA operation AAM required for operation System Attendants 1Attendant 1 Alternate per Tenant Group UCD Hunt Groups Members per group 24 Group Types UCD or Voice Announcer Hunting Method Linear All Ring or Distributed Voice Mail Groups 1 per Tenant uses 1 UCD Group per VM system Members ports 24 Integration Method Digital ICD Voice and
97. database item that requires change Press until the appropriate value displays When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Direct Station Selection Console The Direct Station extension Selection Console is a self contained digital device that connects to an available DX 80 digital port The console provides one button access to system resources for the extension to which it is programmed to operate The console has 48 dual color LED buttons that can be programmed for system resources P7290 IMM 3 101 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 that require visual interaction to properly administer the assoc
98. details of that board l l Cabinet 2 l l R16UMO F21 P7290 IMM 4 21 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 i Cnt KSU Revision K16UMO F19 Date 01 02 14 Time 20 44 35 l Diagnostics CPM BOARD PASSED l RS232 1 PASSED Note RS232 2 PASSE Detail of CPM Board ROM CHECK PASSED RAM CHECK PASSED KD o e en Al oo oo o P7290 IMM 4 22 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 i Cnt KSU Revision K16UMO F19 Date 01 02 14 Time 20 45 23 l Diagnostics Cabinet 1 l BOARD TYPE l l BOARD 1 l Note BOARD 2 e Cabinet 1 selected i e Move the cursor to any BOARD 3 7 board and press to BOARD 4 get details of that board l l i BOARD 5 COM4 l f l i i l i l i l l i i l i l l R16UMO F21 RS232C P7290 IMM 4 23 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 408 Board Selected e Passed Loop Current e L EE Ze DX80 PC DBA EN as CO Lines EE e Failed No 9 Date In Incoming call e Ports 1 01 1 1 01 4 Si E Outgoing Directory l II US i Eailad I ann Fail numbers i 740 743 Diagnostics S 408 BOARD i COL POS DIR LOOP DISC l 1 01 1 740 PASSED PASSED l l 1 01 2 741 BUSY IN l e Digital Executive Telephone BU SY e No
99. directory number leading digit s see Flexible Numbering Plan for rules of Directory Numbers Then press 2 J e Press LD to return to the previous menu level or press MEUS to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used tohighlight System Application Then press P7290 IMM 3 122 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Used to highlight Numbering Plan 4 Then press e Used ES tohighlight Music Source Length if the length of this code is to be changed e Press until the appropriate length displays Or e Use tohighlight the directory number code that is to be changed Music Source Leading 1 2or 3 e Press e Input the new appropriate code and then press to temporarily store this data See Flexible Numbering Plan for rules of directory number application e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e P
100. display the extension number or extension name will be displayed as well as the active system service mode Day Eve At 1 Default Setting See Extension User Name See CO Line Name Programming Abstract No programming is required Answering Machine Emulation via DX 80 Voice Voice Mail System Answering Machine Emulation requires the DX 80 Voice VM System This feature Mimics the call screening feature of a simple analog answering machine Within a specified time after a call is answered by an extension user s Voice Mail Box that user can monitor screen callers as they leave a message The extension user will receive a warning tone that indicates when a caller has been answered by their voice mail box They then have the option to monitor the caller or ignore the alert and allow the caller to leave a message Once the user has selected to monitor the caller they then have the option to leave the caller undisturbed leaving a message or to retrieve the caller from the voice mail box and be connected to the caller for a live conversation Related Features Voice Mail Related Programming Extension Port Type Extension Predefined Forward Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Hunt Group 24 Extension Application Voice Mail Table Call handling Voice Mail Monitor Time Call handling Predefined Forward Time Operation 1 When a caller has been answered by an extension user s voice mailbox an alert
101. display will read Conditions This feature may be programmed F 3 under a flexible button on the Digital Speakerphone No LED s will be in use and the button can be depressed and toggled to allow deny this feature P7290 IMM 3 33 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Call Operator Attendant 0 The extension that is programmed as the Attendant may receive multiple internal calls via the programmed Operator Code The Operator Code is 0 at default Related Features Flexible Numbering Plan Tenant Group Related Programming System Application Operator Code System Resource Attendant Default Settings System Application Numbering Plan Operator Code Length is set to 1 one System Application Numbering Plan Operator Code Leading is set to O zero System Resource Attendant Tenant Group 1 is set to extension 101 System Resource Attendant Tenant Group 2 amp 3 is set to Null none System Resource Attendant Alternate Tenant Group 1 2 amp 3 is set to Null Conditions a The Operator Code is in addition to the default assigned three digit intercom number for the extension b The attendant three digit extension number can be assigned to any feature button Programming Abstract e Program the Operator Code Length if the necessary code should be longer than one digit e Program the Operator Code if the length i
102. displayed e g 2 If this forward is to be deleted press SLL Otherwise 3 Press for other active forward settings Conditions a Regardless of whether the extension where calls are being forwarded is a Digital Soeakerphone or single line telephone the user at the forwarded extension will hear special Intercom Reminder tone signifying that Call Forward is activated b The Auxiliary Lamp will not light green in call forward mode if that function has been disabled via the attendant in Attendant Administration c Ifa Flexible Feature Button has been programmed for Call Forward mode The LED associated tot hat button will light red indicating the telephone is in call forward mode d External Call Forward will forward only transferred CO Line calls e Extension invoked call forwarding overrides any applicable Predefined Call Forward database programming while in effect When the extension forward mode has been released the Predefined Call Forward programming is active again Default Settings Extension ECF Operation N Range is Y N Call Handling External CFW Service Always Range is Never Day Evening Always Call Handling External CFW Talk Time 5 Range is 1 2 3 5 10 15 minutes Programming Abstract e Program the appropriate extension for the use of External Call Forward e Program the appropriate changes if any to the Talk Time and Service modes of operation for ECF P7290 IMM 3 42
103. down to return to the DB Item Select screen e To program the SMDR Call Output Outgoing Call e Input 03 30 01 then press E This advances to the SMDR Output selection for Outgoing Calls e Press F to change this database item Each time that lt 2 is press the value is changed e Press bezilt advance to SMDR Call Output Incoming Call or press the Volume Bar to return to the DB Item Select screen e To program the SMDR Call Output Incoming Call e Input 03 30 02 then press E This advances to the SMDR Output selection for Incoming Calls e Press EF a to change this database item Each time that 2113 is press the value is changed e Press HOLD button to exit this programming and return to the previous menu level or press the Volume Bar to return to the Database Item Select screen e To program the SMDR Call Output Account Code e Input 03 30 03 then press baue This advances to the SMDR Output for Account Codes e Press EF ia to change this database item Each time that is press the value is changed e Press ED button to exit this programming and return to the previous menu level or press the Volume Bar to return to the Database Item Select screen e To program the CIL Call Information Log serial port baud rate CIL X_RATE e Input 04 16 then press This advances to the SMDR CIL port transmission rate setting e Press 2 until the appropriate value displays e Press HOLD
104. e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu e Use to highlight CALL HANDLING then press e Used to highlight Category 3 then press The cursor is now positioned on the database item Dial Delay Time e Used to highlight Extension Alarm Play Time then press until the appropriate play time is reached e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e Ifyou press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note changes made via PC DBA are NOT updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming Guide section of this manual to learn more about this procedure P7290 IMM 3 4 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Alarm Clock System System Reminder The DX 80 system may be set to alert all
105. extensions To meet this requirement the feature code I 6 5 canbe programmed on an available Flexible Feature Button for use b Intercom calls to telephones in Voice Announce Hands free or Voice Announce Private are logically answered by the system at the called extension Therefore these calls cannot be picked up by other extensions using Group Call Pickup c Auto Line Selection is set to ICM Intercom at default So intercom dial tone is heard automatically upon lifting the handset or when pressing the ES button d When you call an extension that is in Voice Announce mode you can change the mode to Tone Ringing by after the extension number Forced Tone Ringing e Ifa called extension does not answer you can invoke a callback to that extension by first using Forced Tone Ring Intercom Mode Selection 98 A Digital speakerphone has the benefit of receiving intercom calls in three ways e Voice Announce Hands free reply mode e Voice Announce Privacy mode e Tone Ringing mode The chosen mode is set at all digital soeakerphones for their own unique mode of operation Related Features Call Forward Flexible Feature Button Programming P7290 IMM 3 156 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Voice Announce Voice Announce Busy Extension Hands free Reply Forced Intercom Tone Ring Operation setup 1 While idle press I 9 8 Confirmation Tone is heard and the display indicates the new
106. feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays P7290 IMM 3 63 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Program extensions for CO Line Access Index 02 ccc 03 where ccc the CO Line Directory number 740 755 e Input 02 ccc 03 to program CO Line ccc Line Group e Press 4 This advances to CO Line Group for CO Line ccc e Press the WZ to select another CO Line to be programmed e gt Press pher e Press bei twice to advance to the CO Line Group programming for the CO Line selected e When finished programming CO Line Groups press E screen or exit programming up or down to return to the DB Item Select Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Use to highlight CO Line Then press e Used tohighlight Category 1 Then press Notice the display header CO Line Category 1 1 2 The 1 2 indicates that this is the first of two pages for this database programming Page 1 shows the
107. interactive LCD button operations Use the three Buttons below the LCD display to aciuate the aeeccinied operation Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password HHH HH F Note This eight character password can be changed Press EY The DB Item Select screen displays Input 01 101 156 20 101 156 extension to program Record Allow for the selected extension Press Pal The display will show the current setting for Record Allow for this extension Press Er l E to select Y N yes no Yes will set this extension as a Record Allow extension Press the MUST up or down to return the index entry to program another extension 01 101 156 20 OF Exit the programming mode Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing The program title page displays Press any key at the program title page to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the Main Menu The PC DBA menu is then shown Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Program the extension s for Record Allow Use d 8 to highlight Extension and then press Uset e tohighlight Category 3 and then press Use the gt Y Page Up Page Down buttons on the PC keyboard until the extension number you wish to program can be seen under the DIR column Use
108. invoking a copy b When using Group Copy all extensions to receive the copy must be programmed for the correct Pick Up Group to associate them with other extensions to receive this copy Programming Abstract Use Extension Programming Copy to copy the programmed settings of one extension to one other extension or to a group of extensions Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note psk Peet Brow Er EEEF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons Ge the LCD display to actuate the E teg operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays Individual Copy mode copy one source extension data to other extensions one at a time e Input 08 12 01 then press This advances to the MULLET DRL LE programming screen e Press Eb This advances to the L s PEL screen e Input the source extension directory number e Press 2 This advances to the ELi TLI screen e Input an extension directory number where this data is to be copied then press baue e The TE screen is immediately prompted again and the data may be copied again to other extensions Repeat the process for all extensions to be copied with this data e Press WEEE to exit Individual Copy programming and return to t
109. is damaged the Polly switch will temporarily open to protect the KSU Module circuitry Symptom s Diagnostic Cause s Action aid Digital telephone erratic Digital Cable distance is too If a digital telephone is not receiving clear 2B D operation Volt Ohm Meter long for gauge of signaling from the KSU test as follows wire cable used Erratic LED LCD 1 With station cable cross connect jumper operation wire removed and telephone unplugged place a short circuit across the inside wiring cable Faint data noise in the pair at the user end jack of the cable background during conversations 2 With a DVM measure the short circuit resistance one way The short circuited cable pair ohm reading should not exceed ohms Non standard Each digital telephone should operate on one telephone cable being dedicated unshielded twisted pair cable to used avoid data noise and interference between adjacent cable pairs Multiple digital extensions being fed from one common cable or on the same cable pair Symptom s Diagnostic aid Cause s Other party cannot hear Another digital Component Lift handset dial another digital extension Confirm you Handset telephone failure connection of audio Audio one way only Replace handset and repeat If problem persists Replace handset cord and repeat test If the problem persists Replace the telephone instrument P7290 IMM 4 3 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE
110. it belongs Related Features Extension Ring Type CO Line Ring Assignment Related Programming CO Line CO Line Ring Type Conditions a CO Line Ring Type overrides Extension Ring Type settings b When a CO Line Ring Type is set to 0 the Extension Ring Type is used Default Settings All CO Lines are assigned Ring Type 0 Range is 0 8 Programming Abstract Program CO Lines for the Ring Type Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Bra he foe SF and ps are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to actuate the FER reg operation P7290 IMM 3 75 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed Press EY The DB Item Select screen displays Input 02 740 755 11 740 755 the CO Line directory number Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Used 8 to highlight CO Line Then p
111. main menu P7290 IMM 3 47 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Program the appropriate extension for the Predetermined Call Forward modes required Use 8 to highlight Extension Then press Use to highlight Predetermined FWD Then press Use 8 e to highlight Wrong Dest Predef FWD Busy Dest or Predef FWD NoAns Dest for the appropriate extension extensions are listed along the left side of the screen under the column DIR Press select this database item for change Input the destination directory number extension or UCD Hunt Group then press Note frequently the destination for a predefined forward no answer condition will be to the VM UCD Hunt Group that directory number is 433 When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Program the Predefined Forward T
112. matches the default baud rate set for the DX 80 CPM PC DBA Port While using a modem connection it is best to set the COM port baud rate at 2400 bps since this is the speed of the DX 80 Optional Modem Setting this speed can expedite the modem negotiation process since compression link choices will not be attempted Maintenance Utilities Once the F5 Cnt operation is successfully completed and a link between the PC DBA and DX 80 processors is established the Maintenance Utilities can be used If this is not established refer to the text above and connect the two devices P7290 IMM 4 11 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 The PC DBA Maintenance screen appears as follows Notice successful connection to the DX 80 system processor CPM indicated by the Cnt in upper left corner ESC ExX1t ALT_T System Time DX80 PC DBA i cnt KSU Revision K16UMO F19 Date 01 02 14 i Time 20 26 16 i Configuration Diagnostics l Status i Sw HW Revision Event Logon Data i i Remote Control i RS232C Also for reference and diagnosis the current software version of the connected DX 80 system and PC DBA are displayed Notice KSU Revision K16UM0 F19 in the upper part of the screen and R16UMO F21 in the lower part of the screen KSU Revision is the DX 80 software and R16UMx xxx is the PC DBA version e Used toselect the appropriate Mainten
113. may be programmed on a programmable feature button A feature button programmed for the DND code will flash at a fast rate while DND One Time is active Qa 0 End To End Signaling This feature allows Digital Speakerphone extensions to generate in band DTMF tones while connected on ICM calls to an on site voice mail system and to ancillary devices connected to the External Page Port Related Features Voice Mail External Paging Related Programming Extension Port Type System Application Numbering Plan External Pager Call Handling VM Dialing Ratio Tone Time Call Handling VM Dialing Ratio Inter Digit Time P7290 IMM 3 108 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Operation When intercom calls are made to either an External Page Port or a Voice Mail System digits dialed on the dial pad are sent to the connected device as DI MF tones Conditions a DTMF digits are only generated to extension ports of Type VM b DTMF tone time and inter digit time follows the programming of VM Dialing Ratio Default Setting Call Handling VM Dialing Ratio Tone Time 120 Range is 60 150 Call Handling VM Dialing Ratio Inter Digit Time 120 Range is 60 150 Programming Abstract e Program Extension Port as required for VM operation reference Voice Mail Analog Integration e Program dialing ratios as required by the ancillary devices Programming via the DET Digital Extens
114. of a Pick Up Group you may retrieve calls ringing at another extension within the same pick up group Extension Pick Up Groups are assigned in the Database Programming Related Features Call Pick Up CO Line Receive Assignment CO Line Ring Assignment Transfer Related Programming Extension Pick Up Group System Application EXT Pickup Group Operation Refer to Call Pick Up Conditions a Extensions may be assigned to only one Extension Pick Up Group b Pick Up priority is CO line calls then intercom calls CO line call priority is Camped On Recalling Transferred then incoming Intercom call priority is Ringing then Voice Call Default Settings Extension Category 1 Pick Up Group is set to 1 Range is 0 8 Programming Abstract Program the Extension s for the Pick Up Groups P7290 IMM 3 115 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note ask pest Brau En and 2 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the soca d operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 01 101 156 03 then press Paul This advances to the Pickup Group programming screen for the selected extension e Press
115. of specific hook switch operations These are known as Hook switch Flash or just Flash commands P7290 IMM 3 198 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Whenever a system feature is to be invoked at a single line telephone the user must operate the hook switch in a fashion that is distinguishable from an on hook hang up request This becomes essential for proper handling of calls considering the single line telephone user may operate the hook switch quickly desiring to hang up and place a new call Yet this fast operation of the hook switch might be interpreted as a Hook switch Flash operation Considering these factors the DX 80 system provides for customization of the hook switch command monitoring in system software The database configuration may be adjusted to ignore hook switch operations that are considered too short to be any valid request and to limit the time allotted Related Features None Related Programming Call Handling SLT Hook Flash Operation 1 While connected to a call internal or external operate the SLT analog device hook flash 2 Dial the appropriate DX 80 system destination for this call Reference specific feature descriptions for correct operation of that feature Conditions a Ifthe analog device SLT does not have a Hook Flash operation button operation of the hook switch must be fall within the time periods Start and End in order to be processed as a valid hook flash o
116. of the CO Line for which changes are to be made e Press until the appropriate COS assignment displays e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Tone Pulse Inter digit Duration Selection Depending on the outside plant environment type of Central Office and customer s specialized dialing requirements the DTMF on time Tone and Pulse Dialing Pulse Time and Pulse Dialing Inter Digit Time for manually dialed or system automatically dialed digits may be modified Typically no modification is required however in some installation environme
117. of the system built in modem voice processor and 2 Cabinet KSU2 Since the CPM comes installed inside of KSU1 the CPM ribbon cable is already in place and connected to the KSU1 408M J5 socket Assuming the orientation of the KSU1 cabinet is installed on the wall the two horizontal connector sockets in the upper right corner of the CPM are for the MDM Modem Module The connector socket labeled 2nd Cabinet is for connection to the KSU2 408E if that expansion is required The remaining two connector sockets on the CPM one at the left side the other at the right side are for the voice processor solution The voice processor solution can be any of three possible choices AAM FL 4 or PC 8 The CPM also provides the following standard connectors Music Channel 1 On Hold Background Music Interface Music Channel 2 On Hold Background Music Interface Control Contact Loud Bell Door External Page Control External Paging Equipment Interface RMP Serial Port for on site PC DBA system database programming SMDR Serial Port for connection to ancillary SMDR Call Accounting equipment The CPM has two Option Strap jumpers one for database start up J11 and one for Music Channel One source internal external selection JP30 J11 Cold Start Normal J11 is used to force load database default factory settings This jumper will normally never require operation after the initial power up sequence is completed However should the need a
118. of time in UCD Group Queue When a caller is routed to the Reroute Destination they are removed from UCD Group Queue Although a RAN can be used to handle these calls the RAN is the final process That is when the RAN announcement is finished the caller is disconnected This is why Reroute is usually a designated extension that can further process the call Related Features Uniform Call Distribution Groups DX 80 Voice Processing Module PN7243 Related Programming Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Overflow 1 Timer Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Overflow 1 Destination Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Overflow 2 Timer Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Overflow 1 Destination Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Reroute Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Overflow Count DX 80 Voice Processing Module PN7243 see programming instructions Extension Port Type Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Attribute Conditions a Ina RAN application Overflow Destination 1 is usually recorded as All agents are busy assisting other callers Please continue to hold b Ina RAN application Overflow Destination 2 is usually recorded as All agents are still busy please continue to hold Calls will be handled in the order that they were received c Ina RAN application that uses the DX 80 VP
119. only YOU are responsible for using this feature appropriately considering all applicable laws Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brea oh and 4 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three bution below the LCD display to actuate the ae coclaled operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 01 101 156 07 then press bal This advances to the Monitor Class programming screen for the extension selected e Press 2 until the appropriate Monitor Class for this extension eek e Press MLS to return to the previous menu level or press Gass to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used to highlight Extension and then press e Used EB tohighlight Category 1 and then press The first of 5 Extension Category 1 screen displays e Use amp 2 to highlight the database i
120. operational conditions Details for each mode are listed below DAY EVE TIME ALT This is the ringing pattern for CO Line ringing assignments while the system is in DAY mode This is the ringing pattern for CO Line ringing assignments while the system is in EVE evening mode This is a scheduled time clock that automatically adjusts the mode of system operation from DAY mode to EVE mode based upon preprogrammed settings The Alternate mode is specific to use with the optional AAM Automated Attendant Module This mode re directs callers who have dialed 0 zero at the auto attendant prompt to a temporary alternate destination This is typically used for primary attendant break periods etc P7290 IMM 3 76 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Related Features Class of Service Extension Night Service Activate F63 Class of Service System Tenant Groups Automatic CO Line Ringing Modes Related Programming CO Line Answering Position Day Eve assignments System Application Time Switching Operation at the Attendant extension 1 While the attendant extension is idle press the Ringing Mode feature access code I 6 3 The system prompts for the Extension password 2 Input the password default 9999 The mode of operation is then advanced sequentially 3 Repeat the process to continue the advance of modes Operation at any digital extension using the Attendant password 1 While t
121. paging zones are released for new other page announcements The Digital Speakerphone operation enhances this high use feature by providing a one button access to the operation Any DX 80 digital extension may dial the single digit to answer a page announcement Related Features Flexible Feature Button Programming External Paging Paging Page Allow Deny Operation 1 While a page is currently in progress the telephone displays 2 Press or 5 9 The display shows Conditions a Apage may be answered at any telephone using the Meet Me Page code even if the page announcement is not heard over the telephone speaker b The page may be any zone page or all page c The Meet Me Page code may be programmed on any available flexible button P7290 IMM 3 163 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Memo Pad Memo Pad is a quick access notebook for jotting down a telephone number For instance if while speaking to someone on the telephone they convey to you a telephone number that you wish to take down the Memo Pad feature allows you to do this quickly without finding a piece of paper and pencil Related Features Flexible Feature Button Programming Automatic Redial Last Number Redial Saved Number Redial Operation taking the memo 1 While connected to a CO Line in a conversation either answered an incoming call or placed an outgoing call press 5 2 Using the dial pad input the number to be stored then
122. press Input the appropriate Operator Code See Flexible Numbering Plan for guidelines on how to assign directory numbers Press When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Use 8 to highlight System Resource Then press Use to highlight Attendant Then press Used 8 to highlight the Attendant or Alternate Attendant for the Tenant Group you wish to program Then press Input the directory number of the extension Press Continue making other programming changes as required When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted
123. programmable database items for CO Line ports 1 8 CO Lines 740 747 e Usethe and buttons on the PC keyboard to select the screen for the CO Line s to be programmed e Used ES to highlight the CO Group assignment for the appropriate CO Line CO Lines are listed along the left side of the display e Press tochange the data item value e Input the appropriate CO Line Group number 1 8 then press Enter to store the data e Continue programming other database items as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e lf you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure P7290 IMM 3 64 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 CO Line Loop Su
124. programmed BLF button LED for that extension lights red When that extension is in Do Not Disturb the LED will flash red This same button is used as a one button Direct Station Selection DSS call button for quick transfer of calls or intercom calling Related Features Direct Station Selection Console Do Not Dis turb Flexible Feature Button Programming One Touch Transfer Related Programming PC DBA Feature Key Programming Extension Feature Keys PC DBA Feature Key Programming DSS Console Feature Keys System Application Feature Key Copy Setup Note 1453 Se SF Es es and Eiir are interactive LCD button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD play to actuate the associated operation e Press O e Press the feature button that is to be programmed The current function displays e Press to change the function e Select 1 via the LCD interactive button e Input the directory number of the extension that is to be programmed on this feature button P7290 IMM 3 32 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press pave e Press ges twice to exit programming and return to idle condition Operation 1 Press the button programmed for the extension to be called 2 Lift the handset to talk privately 3 Hang up when the conversation is completed Conditions Di BLF DSS buttons may be assigned to any of the 30 User Programmable Feature Keys b Extensions in Do
125. programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Discriminating Ringing P7290 IMM 3 103 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Discriminating Ringing Discriminating Ringing is provided to denote ringing patterns specific to system resources Ringing at an extension for intercom calls is different than ringing for CO Line calls This difference is referred to as Discriminating Ringing There are 10 choices of ring schemes that can be selected Related Features Transfer Intercom Related Programming System Application Ring Scheme Default Settings System Application Ring Scheme 3 Range is 0 9 Default Settings Program the Ringing Scheme Programming via the D
126. provided for the virtue of ethical use only YOU are responsible for using this feature appropriately considering all applicable laws Related Features Intrusion Related Programming Extension Monitor Class Operation 1 Place a call to a busy extension or press a busy CO Line button 2 Press janiti The audio connection at the busy CO Line is connected to your extension Also at this time the MUTE function at your telephone is automatically activated making the monitor condition as un intrusive as possible The display indicates the internal extension that is being monitored P7290 IMM 9 172 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 3 You may press irt or MUTE to intrude on the conversation your voice part of the call Conditions a The highest level of priority in Monitor Class is 0 b 9 is the least priority level c Monitor will not be allowed if the called extension s Monitor COS matches the calling extension Monitor COS Default Settings Extension Monitor Class is set to 5 for all extensions Programming Abstract Change the Monitor Class for all those extensions that should have the ability to monitor other extensions LEGAL NOTICE This feature may violate privacy laws if used in a manner that is inconsistent with requirements of these laws Manufacturer assumes no responsibility with regard to the use of this feature It is provided for the virtue of ethical use
127. reserved for CO lines equipped on the system but not connected to telephone company network facilities The EMPTY type eliminates the CO Line from access by system features that automatically access CO Line resources CO DEV CO DEV type is provided to mark a CO Line circuit as being connected to special apparatus This type effectively removes the CO Line circuit from automatic access by system features while maintaining its direct accessibility for the specific purpose of its connection Typical use would include connection of ancillary analog intercom calling device PAGE PAGE type is provided to mark a CO Line circuit as being connected to special apparatus This type effectively removes the CO Line circuit from automatic access by system features while maintaining its direct accessibility for the specific purpose of its connection Typical use would include connection of ancillary paging equipment Related Features Class of Service Station External Paging Related Programming CO Line CO Line Type Extension Class of Service Restriction Toll Restriction Default Settings At default CO Line Type is set to CO for all CO Lines Programming Abstract Program CO Line Type for each CO Line circuit according to its use requirement P7290 IMM 3 80 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note ask pest Brau En and 2 are LCD interactive b
128. review then press pae 10 Continue programming other Flexible Feature Buttons or EE handset to exit this programming Conditions a Ifyou dial an invalid code you will hear error tone and the Digital Speakerphone display will show CODE UNAVAILABLE b In some cases a user may program a feature button for a specific CO line although access is restricted to that line via database programming In this situation the telephone is still governed by database programming and would still be unable to access the CO line if restricted c Valid feature codes must be in the form of either Fn or Fnn where F is the feature button and n is either a single digit or two digit code including asterisk and pound dialed from the dial pad d Any feature button programmed with a code previously assigned to a different feature button will cause the previously programmed feature button to become unassigned P7290 IMM 3 135 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programmable Feature Buttons cannot be programmed for CO Line Group operation when the system is configured for Key system operation Flexible Feature Buttons can be cleared of any feature code directory number by pressing before entering a code number Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing
129. start the event output Feature Key 3 Feature Key 19 through the SMDR serial port Feature Key 4 Feature Key 20 a de Ge 2 ate de Ge 3 Important data must be collected ina Feature Key 7 Feature Key 23 dedicated collection PC using a Feature Key 8 Feature Key 24 special Event Tracking software or a Feature Key 9 Feature Key 2 5 terminal emulation software that Feature Key 10 Feature Key 26 writes to a text file for later Feature Key 11 Feature Key 27 deciphering at customer service Feature Key 12 Feature Key 28 Feature Key 13 Feature Key 29 Feature Key 14 Feature Key 30 Feature Key 15 Redial Key i Feature Key 16 Mute Key i 4 31 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Logon Data Logon Data is used to view the date and time that the PC DBA session began Logon Data Date 02 14 Time 17 09 l User ID Remote Maintenance amp Programming Press Any Key To Continue i Remote Control Remote Control allows the PC DBA user to invoked system critical operations This operation allows the user to e Restart the system e Restart the system and re load default data Master Clear e View and alter system memory contents for the purposes of diagnostics e Block system resources for the purposes of m
130. the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the E eg operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays Program CO Lines for Customized names Index 04 06 ccc where ccc the CO Line Directory number 740 755 e Enter 04 06 ccc to program ccc CO Line name label for the display P7290 IMM 3 67 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Press Pal This advances to the selected CO Line Name Label database item and shows the current name label programmed Use the dial pad buttons and the table below to input the name label for the CO Line Important the button acts as an enter key It must be pressed after each character is input to temporarily store that character in the position is also used to enter a space Press 23 to save the new name label programming Press Fei to enter another CO Line directory number for programming When finished programming CO Line Name Labels press Select screen or exit programming up or down to return to the DB ltem Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu
131. the CO Line Group selected 1 8 e Press E3 e Input the PBX Code e g 81 and then press pavs e Press kl to return to the DB Item Select screen Program Hunt Method Search order for the selected CO Line Group e Input 07 01 01 08 02 then press E This advances to the Hunting method programming screen for the CO Line Group selected 1 8 e Press r until the appropriate order displays SEQL Sequential Last SEQF Sequential First RAN Random access e Press HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press bed to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Program PBX Code for PBX Trunk access e Used tohighlight CO Line Application and then press e Used tohighlight Category 1 Then press e Used tohighlight the database item PBX Code for the CO Group to be changed Then press e Input the required code to access a PBX trunk on CO line circuit in this group e Press to temporarily store this data Program Hunt Method Search order for the selected CO Line Group e Use the cursor
132. the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu e Used to highlight Extension Then press e Used tohighlight Category 1 Then press Program Extension COS as required e Used tohighlight Day Class or Eve Class e Press until the appropriate COS displays e Continue programming other database items as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure P7290 IMM 3 56 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 CO Line Alternate Route CO Line Alternate Route works with the DX 80 system CO Line Groups
133. the PC DBA utility The MDM d does not provide access to the DX 80 DX SO Voice Mail AA At default the MDM directory number is 199 To establish a connection to the MDM remotely call into the system where the MDM is installed from the remote site using PC DBA Ask to be transferred to extension 199 When modem tone is heard initiate any required keystrokes to link the modems Then proceed with usual PC DBA connection routines see Database Administration via PC DBA The MDM is installed onto designated connectors located on the CPM MDM Installation Procedure 1 Be sure that KSU 1 amp 2 power is turned off Remove the KSU cover four screws at each corner Connect grounded wrist strap to a suitable earth ground If a grounded wrist strap is not available bleed any static charge from your body before touching circuit modules by touching E the gold painted surface of the inside of the KSU cabinet If E the KSU is properly grounded this will momentarily discharge a mm static electricity from your body NOTE A GROUNDED 4 ee D A 3 WRIST STRAP IS THE ONLY METHOD OF ASSURING i y THAT STATIC ELECTRICITY DOES NOT DAMAGE il m CIRCUIT MODULES Locate the CPM at the right hand side of KSU1 above the 408M and COM4 if installed Position the MDM over the CPM MDM connectors as illustrated in the diagram above 6 Press firmly but not forcefully on the MDM to secure a good connection into the CPM MDM connecto
134. the servicing telephone company Caller ID requires a subscription from the servicing telephone company The DX 80 Digital Speakerphone incorporates three screen prompt interactive buttons that simplify feature operation The bottom row of the display is used to convey options during normal call processing that allows the user to select from the various choices These three LCD Interactive buttons take on many different functions facilitating everything from leaving a callback request to programming the system database Related Features Most features Loud Bell External Page Music Source Control There is often a requirement to control ancillary devices via the telephone system The DX 80 system provides one dry contact closure standard for interface of the various devices It is important to adhere to the electrical requirements of this contact The contact closure is rated at 24vdc 1Amp The Contact Closure can be assigned to operate in three different ways Loud Bell Control If the system is installed in high noise environments there is often a requirement to equip a loud high gain ringing device Using the contact in this way provides for control of an optional ancillary loud ringing device The device is connected to the contact as a trigger When ringing occurs on CO Lines in CO Line Groups designated as Loud Bell CO Line Groups the contact closure operates and controls the connected device P7290 IMM 3 161
135. the system to output DTMF tones for access to special services over the same Dial Pulse CO line The applications for this are limited but critical For example when you must dial in the Pulse mode because of equipment limitations in your area it is often also desirable to switch to Touch Tone mode DTMF when connected to automated services like bank by phone etc Related Features Speed Dial Extension System CO Line Signaling Related Programming CO Line Signaling Operation 1 Access a CO Line Signaling Type Pulse and dial any number 2 After the pulse dialing has ended and the connection is made press 3 All digits dialed after this code will be sent in tone dialing format Conditions a The dialing conversion can only be from pulse mode to tone DIT MF mode not from DTMF back to pulse mode b The Pulse to Tone code can be programmed in any speed dial bin c When making a call on a CO line with Pulse Rotary dialing the digits following will be sent in DTMF tone mode Default Setting All CO Lines are set to Tone Signaling mode Programming Abstract Program CO Lines as required for Pulse dialing mode see CO Line Signaling Recall Recall is a means of assuring proper call handling There are several types of recall that can be invoked in the DX 80 system Recall affects Holding calls and Transferred calls It is the intention of recall to assure that callers on hold or in transfer condit
136. this call as forwarded from this subscriber no answer Press Fans Press Pet to continue programming the various call handling digits Prefix Suffix Press BESSE to return to the previous menu level or press E SE to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming 06 02 1 3 02 02 VM Table Prefix Table Direct where 1 3 Tenant Group Press pnas Input the required digits to identify this call as immediately from this subscriber Press pave Press Pet to continue programming the various call handling digits Prefix Suffix Press MECO to return to the previous menu level or press ESOS to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming 06 02 1 3 02 02 VM Table Prefix Table CO Greeting where 1 3 Tenant Group Press pna Input the required digits to identify this call to a specific CO Line Press pave Press Pet to continue programming the various call handling digits Prefix Suffix Press EA to return to the previous menu level or press E SE to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming 06 02 1 3 02 02 VM Table Prefix Table CO Recall where 1 3 Tenant Group Press pna Input the required digits to identify this call as a specific CO Line recalling Press Fans Press Pet to continue programming the various call handling digits Prefix Suffix Press MECO to return to the previous menu level or press MES to return
137. to abort changes and leave all data unchanged gt Press Y yes to continue with the save operation To allocate speed numbers in the Individual List e Use the cursor arrows to highlight Individual List and then press e Use the cursor arrows to highlight the extension speed dial allocation under either the Increase or Decrease column Use the or buttons to select extensions not viewed on this screen e Press toincrement the selected Tenant Group speed number allocation Each time that enter is pressed allocation is incremented by 10 e When all changes are made press the ESC escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting gt Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged gt Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override gt Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged gt Press Y yes to continue with the save operation To program SPD Numbers Note Both System and Individual Speed numbers can be programmed via PC DBA Use 8 to highlight SPD No Programming then press To program System SPD Numbers P7290 IMM 3 205 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Used to highlight System SPD No then press e Used EB tohighlight the T
138. to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override P7290 IMM 3 140 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Make other directory number changes in the same manner for each system resource directory number to be changed e Exit PC DBA programming when finished Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Forced Intercom Call Forward 4 Tone ringing intercom calls can be immediately forwarded to the attendant by pressing the DND button Related Features Do Not Disturb Intercom Mode Selection Call Forward Operation 1 When your telephone is set to Tone Ring and another station is calling you The telephone will display 3 The ring is discontinued and the call is sent to the programmed attendant Your extension remains in Do Not Disturb until deactivated Conditions a The attendant assigned extension cannot invoke Forced Intercom Call Forward b When Forced Intercom Call Forward is activated the calling party connection is an intercom
139. to store this new data Continue making other changes as required Exit programming mode when changes are complete Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Used 8 to highlight CO Line Then press Use to highlight Answering Position Then press Used 8 to highlight Pre CFW NoAns Then press P7290 IMM 3 45 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press Enter to change the data item value e Input the appropriate No Answer destination for this CO Line Then press e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Dat
140. to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming 06 02 1 3 02 02 VM Table Prefix Table UCD Overflow where 1 3 Tenant Group P7290 IMM Press pna Input the required digits to identify this call as a UCD Overflow Announcement Press pave Press Pet to continue programming the various call handling digits Prefix Suffix 3 239 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming 06 02 1 3 03 VM Table Suffix Digit where 1 3 Tenant Group Press phe e Input the suffix digits if required to identify this call as the MB subscriber e Press pave e Press to continue programming the various call handling digits Prefix Suffix e Press WHEE to return to the previous menu level or press A to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming 06 02 1 3 03 VM Table Record Digit where 1 3 Tenant Group e Press phe e Press E kb Si e Input the digits required to active recording in this subscriber MB e Press pave e Press to continue programming the various call handling digits Prefix Suffix e Press CAE to return to the previous menu level or press LESS to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming 06 02 1 3 03 VM Table Delete Digit where 1 3 Tenant Group e Press Eb Press Eil e Input
141. tone is heard The feature button programmed for Voice Mail 64 will flash green at a fast rate 2 Press the flashing Voice Mail button The button LED will now flash green at a slower rate 3 The display will show 4 Press the left Display Interactive button to monitor call The LED of the voice mail button will light steady green At this time you are monitoring the caller and message in progress 5 Or press the right Display Interactive button to exit this mode and abandon monitoring 7 Press the left Display Interactive button nS to be connected to the caller and remove him from the voice mailbox The voice mail button LED will extinguish 8 Press the right Display Interactive button 3 to leave the caller in the voice mail box to record her message and return your DET to idle status P7290 IMM 3 7 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Conditions a To Monitor or Answer a call action must be taken before the Monitor Time expires Monitor Time starts at the time the caller is connected to the user s voice mail box b For Answering Machine Emulation to operate the extension must be forwarded to a DX 80 Voice Processing Module voice mail Predefined Call Forward or Extension Call Forward can be used for this purpose Default Setting VM Monitor Time is set at 10 seconds Range is 10 20 60 Feature Key Programming Button 12 is programmed as a Voice Mail button F6
142. until the appropriate value for this data item displays To continue programming Pickup Groups for other extensions e Press the HOLD button to exit programming for this extension and input a new extension e gt Press pher e Press bet until the database item Pickup Group displays for this extension OR Pulsed Si Up Down to return to the DB Item Select screen and input the extension number and the Pickup Se item number 03 e Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode e Press E to return to the previous menu level or press E to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used to highlight Extension Then press e Used EB tohighlight Category 1 Then press e Used 8 to highlight the database item Pickup Group for the Extension to be changed e Press Each time that enter is pressed the value of this database item is updated e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for
143. using the MDF installation method Dedicated AC Outlet Dedicated means that this AC outlet has no other equipment connected on this circuit breaker Station Cables from telephones Ge Paging Equipment ground other ancillary third party equipment 66M1 50 blocks ancillary equipment Paging music sources etc 66M1 50 blocks KSU terminations 66M1 50 blocks Station phone cable terminations 66M1 50 The 66M1 50 is split into a left half and right half for wiring terminations Each row is conductive between the left two columns and the right two columns This is the source of the term Split 50 Terminate cable pairs from the KSU and from telephone locations on outer column pins one lead only per pin NEVER terminate two wires on one pin This is referred to as double punching and causes poor connection of wires on the terminal Note when used with Bridging Clips the Split 50 block can be used to isolate trouble in wiring P7290 IMM 2 6 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 KSU Components KSU1 408M and KSU2 408E The 408M module is installed at the factory into KSU1 Although this module has the same port configuration as the 408E they are not interchangeable Each 408M and 408E is equipped with 4 CO Line Ports 1 Power Failure Port and 8 Digital Extension Ports See the fo
144. yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e Ifyou press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming P7290 IMM 3 116 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Extension Programming Copy This database feature is used to copy the various extension programming settings quickly from one extension to other extensions There are two methods to copy extension data to other extensions 1 individual is used to copy from the source extension to other extensions one at a time 2 group is used to copy from the source extension to other extensions using the Pick Up Group to identify the extensions that will receive the copy as a group Related Programming System Application Extension Copy Feature Key Copy CO Line Copy DSS Copy Conditions a The source extension must have all programming changes completed prior to
145. yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation P7290 IMM 3 248 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Program Warning Time Incoming Outgoing Use 8 to highlight Call Handling Then press Use 8 to highlight Call Handling Then press Use 8 to highlight Warning Time Outgoing Call or Warning Time Incoming Call Then press Input the time for calls of this type Press Continue making other programming changes as required When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND functio
146. you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation P7290 IMM 3 213 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Program CO Lines into the tenant group Use 8 to highlight CO Line and then press Use to highlight Category 1 and then press Used Ass to highlight Tenant Group for the appropriate CO Line to program Press until the appropriate tenant group number displays Used Y to highlight Tenant Group for the next CO Line to program and continue as above until all CO Lines are programmed in the tenant groups When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Program Tenant Group Calling Use 8 t
147. 12 To 1813450 will cause calls with this associated COS to be monitored for the first seven digits dialed or until the first digit inconsistent with this entry is dialed A call dialed as 1813410 is denied when the digit O is dialed A call dialed as 1813419 any digits is allowed Related Features Class of Service Extension Night Service Activate Class of Service CO Line DISA Speed Dial System Account Codes Forced Verified Related Programming Restriction Toll Restriction Digit Interval From Restriction Toll Restriction Digit Interval To Restriction Toll Restriction Digit Interval Extension COS Day Eve Restriction Toll Restriction Digit Interval CO Line COS Day Eve Restriction Account Code Table see Account Codes Extension Day Eve Class Of Service CO Line Day Eve Class Of Service Call Handling DISA Default Settings Restriction Toll Restriction Digit Interval 001 From 0 Range is any digits max 10 in length Restriction Toll Restriction Digit Interval 001 To Range is any digits max 10 in length Restriction Toll Restriction Digit Interval 002 100 From To NULL none Restriction Toll Restriction Digit Interval Extension CO Line Day Eve COS 0 Y Range is Y N Restriction Toll Restriction Digit Interval 002 100 Extension CO Line Day Eve COS 1 7
148. 15 7 408M 11407 3 Method 1 Use the figures above for each unit installed or to be installed and calculate the total for this system configuration Use the total from step 1 in place of the variable x in the formula at the right to calculate MTBF for this system configuration 1 x 10 MTBF hours P7290 IMM 1 20 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 2 Installation Proper installation of the Comdial DX 80 will assure optimum system operation and the best overall experience for the users of the DX 80 telephone system Since the DX 80 system provides communications functions for its users following these installation guidelines is required Doing so will streamline the process and reduce the potential of experiencing problems while bringing the DX 80 on line Installation Outline 1 Plan the installation including the Key Service Unit KSU1 or KSU1 KSU2 and main distribution frame MDF location station locations cable runs and optional equipment 2 Assemble the correct tools and supplies Telephony tools of the trade UTP telephony grade cable wiring Miscellaneous telephony hardware 66 blocks modular wall jacks etc 3 Run DX 80 extension cable wiring for soeakerphones DSS Consoles and analog devices FAX machines modems etc from the MDF to each location Wiring topology is referred to as star wiring configuration no cable should loop from one telephone location to ano
149. 156 then press save This advances to the Extension User Name programming screen for the extension selected 101 156 e Press chg P7290 IMM 3 120 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Input the new Extension User Name for this port using the Dial Pad and the following table 0123456 789 areused to input alphanumeric labels for extension ports e Press Mu to return to the previous menu level or press HUM to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used tohighlight System Resource Then press e Used tohighlight User Names Then press Enter e Use to highlight the User Name field for the extension to be changed e Press e Input the appropriate name for this extension any alphanumeric characters up to 7 characters e Press e Continue programming User Names as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Sett
150. 3 Single Line Telephone 3 198 Flexible Feature Button programming 3 134 reviewing programming 3 134 Flexible Feature Button Inquiry 3 134 Flexible Numbering Plan 3 137 Extension Swapping 3 118 Forced Intercom Call Forward 3 141 Forced Intercom Tone Ring 3 141 O gate control installation 2 16 H Hands free Reply Voice Announce 3 233 Headset Jack 3 142 Headset Mode 3 142 Hidden Codes 3 143 Hold common system 3 147 exclusive 3 144 l Hold Indication 3 147 Hold Abandon 3 145 Hold Reminder 3 149 Holding Call Answer 3 150 Hot Key Enable Disable 3 150 Hotel Mode 3 151 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Hotline 3 153 Hour Mode Selection 3 154 Hunt Groups 3 223 types 3 223 initializing the system 2 19 installation 2 1 AAM 2 14 add on modules 2 8 APM4 2 10 COM4 2 11 environmental conditions 2 2 external pager 2 16 gate control 2 16 KSU assembly 2 8 KSU components 2 3 2 7 KSU2 2 14 loud bell control 2 16 Main Distribution Frame 2 3 MDF wiring 2 4 MDM 2 13 mounting the KSU 2 4 music source 2 15 outline 2 1 replacing a 408M 2 7 site planning 2 2 tools and supplies 2 2 typical MDF installation 2 6 Intercom Calling 3 156 Intercom Mode Selection 3 156 Intrusion extension CO Line 3 157 l Use Indication 3 61 Key Service Unit 1 4 KSU configuration 1 4 KSU1 components 1 2 KSU2 installation 2 14 KSU2 compone
151. 33 134 135 136 113 114 115 116 137 138 139 140 J3 Extension Expansion 117 118 119 120 141 142 143 144 121 122 123 124 145 146 147 148 DPME8 Installation Procedure Be sure that KSU power is turned off Remove the KSU cover four screws at each corner Connect grounded wrist strap to a suitable earth ground If a grounded wrist strap is not available bleed any static charge from your body before touching circuit modules by touching the gold painted surface of the inside of the KSU cabinet If the KSU is properly grounded this will momentarily discharge static electricity from your body NOTE A GROUNDED WRIST STRAP IS THE ONLY METHOD OF ASSURING THAT STATIC ELECTRICITY DOES NOT DAMAGE CIRCUIT MODULES Remove the DPM8 module from the packaging and locate the four brass color standoffs packaged with the module Position the DPM8 over the left hand side of the 408M E and any other extension modules already installed When installing DPM8 modules it is recommended that they be installed closest to the 408M E That is if P7290 IMM 2 9 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 an APM4 module is installed move it outward toward cabinet cover and install the add on DPMB8 first then reinstall the APM4 Extension modules are always installed on the left hand side in the KSU 6 Use the four brass color standoffs supplied with the DPM8 to secure the DPME8 in position 7 Connect the DPM8 ribbon cable to the 408M Extension
152. 4 Voice Mail is set to UCD Group 24 directory number 433 Programming Abstract e Change Monitor Time if required e Program Predefined Call Forward for each extension if calls should always be directed to voice mail from that extension Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Bre oh and E42 are interactive LCD button operations Use the three Buttons below the LCD display to aciuate the Geer operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password HHH HH ZZ ZZ Note This eight character can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 03 34 e gt Press This advances to the VM Monitor_T screen e Press r change until the appropriate VM Monitor Time displays in seconds e Press 5 or pest for other programming Or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu e Use tohighlight CALL HANDLING and then press e Used EB tohighlight Category 3 then press The cursor is now positioned on the database item Dial Delay Time e Use
153. 4 16 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 The following display shows the 408 Board of Cabinet 1 pan oe on a oo a E DX80 PC DBA Cnt KSU Revision K16UMO F19 Date 01 02 14 Time 20 40 03 configuration Board Type 408 BOARD Cabinet 1 TRK POS TYPE STATUS 1 01 01 co CONNECT 1 01 02 CO FALL 1 01 03 CO FALL 1 01 04 CO FAIL 0 EXT POS TYPE STATUS 4 01 01 EXEC DISPLAY CONNECT 1 01 02 NO CONNECTION OPEN 1 01 03 NO CONNECTION OPEN 1 01 04 NO CONNECTION OPEN y 1 01 05 NO CONNECTION OPEN 1 01 06 NO CONNECTION OPEN 1 01 07 NO CONNECTION OPEN 1 01 08 NO CONNECTION OPEN Poo R1GUMO F21 EAN E E EN E EI INE EN E E ERE SS TE EN a Fl Help F2 U Save F3 RCV F4 SND F5 Cnt F6 Disc F7 Prn F8 Init F9 Mdm F10 RS232C P7290 IMM 4 17 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 The following display shows the COM4 Board of Cabinet 1 i cnt KSU Revision K16UMO F19 Date 01 02 14 Time 20 41 18 l Configuration l Board Type COM4 BOARD Cabinet 1 i TRK POS TYPE STATUS 1 05 01 CO OPEN 1 05 02 CO OPEN l 1 05 03 CO OPEN y 1 05 04 CO OPEN EE R16UMO F21 e Ae Ver NI ee Zeie slaty ett eh Ve se ele tml ss ee ee deen ees maa NA ee P7290 IMM 4 18 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 The following is a display of Cabinet 2 DX80 PC DBA i Cnt K
154. 5 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Program Voice Mail Hunt Group e Used tohighlight Extension Application Then press e UsegE tohighlight Voice Mail Table Then press e Used 8 to highlight the Tenant Group to program usually 1 Then press e Press until the selected UCD Group number displays usually 24 e Al other database items in this programming screen are ignored when the DX 80 Voice is used e When changes are complete press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Volume Control The DX 80 digital soeakerphone is equipped with a volume control that is used to adjust th
155. 5 System Technology 1 1 System Time and Date 3 210 P7290 IMM Index 4 EA Tenant Group Extension Pick Up Group 3 115 Tenant Groups 3 11 3 211 time and date system 3 210 Toll Restriction Class of Service 3 214 Tone Pulse Inter digit Duration Selection 3 218 Tones Reminder 3 194 Touch Tone Dial Pad Confirmation 3 98 Touch Tone On Off 3 219 Transfer 3 220 types 3 220 Transfer and Answer Call 3 220 y UCD Agent Log Off On 3 228 Hunt Groups 3 223 Overflow amp Reroute 3 229 Voice Announce Group 3 231 Uniform Call Distribution Hunt Groups 3 223 Unit component detail 1 17 UPS system battery 3 32 User maintenance 4 1 V Virtual Numbers 3 185 Voice Announce Hands free Reply 3 233 Voice Call Recorder 3 234 Voice Mail Analog Integration 3 235 Digital Integration 3 243 voice processing modules 1 2 Volume Control 3 246 W Warning Tone CO Line Call Limiter 3 247 Wiring data 1 18
156. 7290 IMM 3 123 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming Abstract Program the directory number for the External Pager Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note pask Peet Brow Fr EEEF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to actuate the EE eier operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays Program External Page Directory Number Length e Input 08 09 11 01 then press F e Press until the appropriate length displays e Press to program Leading 1 Program External Page Directory Number Leading 1 2 or 3 e Input 08 09 11 02 then press F272 e Press E3 e Input the new directory number leading digit s see Flexible Numbering Plan for rules of Directory Numbers Then press 2 J e Press HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press Gaede to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programmin
157. 9 Mdm F10 RS232C e Use the associated F Function keys on the PC keyboard to access the various operations The functions and their specific operation is detailed in the text below F1 Help e Press F1 to view the keystroke help menu of PC DBA There are two help screens F2 A Save U Save e Press F2 to select Auto Save or U Save You Save This selection determines how PC DBA will save data during the programming process The current mode of operation displays e f U Save is selected PC DBA prompts the user to confirm the save operations During the save process changed data is written over existing data files to store the changed data For this reason the user must be confident that previous data values are no longer required Once the new data is written the old data is lost See Database Save for instructions on how to save old data P7290 IMM 3 91 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e f A Save is selected PC DBA will automatically save data upon exit from the programming screen where work has been done This option saves time and keystrokes but leaves no margin for recovery since data is immediately written to data files when the screen is exited F3 Receive e Before data can be exchanged between the PC and the DX 80 system a connection must be made between the two devices This connection is a serial RS 232 COM Port or Modem link While on site the PC may be connected to the DX 80 via a s
158. 90 IMM TOC 1 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 AO te IMAZ eos de os 2 19 Dic TE 3 1 Account Code Voluntary Forced Verified Ze 3 1 EE E A a e ete e 3 3 Alarm Clock System System AN lei 3 5 Alphanumeric Display Super o 3 6 Answering Machine Emulation via DX 80 Voice Voice Mail Gvstem 3 7 Attendant Administration Admin TU 3 9 AA A ais 3 11 Attendant Extension DSS Console Button Programming LJ 3 13 Ailendant EXtension EE 3 15 Automated Attendant optional E 3 17 A tomaic CoO EinesRingitig Modes a a add 3 22 ele E A E 3 24 Automatic Record via DX 80 Voice Mail System 3 4c icieccscssssesseseesseessessessseestsseesseestssesamereieseen 3 25 Automate Redal D EE 3 27 Automatic Selection CO Intercom DA 3 29 Auxillary Lampa LED Status Bae cece caste wae a E NNE 3 30 Background Music BGM E TELL tt ito 3 31 Badge Va CHEE LIS OMA dada 3 31 Batten BacKUP MEMO A A A AA AA ase acess dan reer ti 3 31 tee UD EE 3 32 BUSY Lamo Field RE 3 32 Busy Ring Allow Deny EE 3 33 Call Operator Attendant Q BEEN 3 34 CallBack CO Emne FEE EE 3 37 Gall BACK Extension EE 3 38 CUMS AMO Uh TINE EE 3 39 Call Forward Extension TEE 3 39 Call Forward CO Line Predefined No Answer condton 3 44 Gall Forward Extension Predefined EE 3 46 SIN Cal Park Answer F oe EE 3 48 SI El EE 3 49 Caller IDo Analog Pons Ee ee ee 3 50 Caller ID Standard on all CO LINES oo ee eeeessesseessecssecssecseec
159. AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Call Park is very similar to Call Transfer except there is no ringing at the park destination The DX 80 Call Park method eliminates multiple call park codes using the same code followed by the user extension number Related Features Flexible Feature Button Programming Pick up Groups CO Line Transfer Idle Busy Related Programming Extension Tenant Group Paging Group Paging Allow Pick Up Groups Call Handling Hold Recall Hold Abandon Time Park Remind Operation Park Call ech While connected to a CO Line call press 7 3 orpress a button programmed for this Call Park code 2 Dial the extension number where this call is to be parked or press the DSS button of the extension where this call is to be parked 3 The CO Line call is parked at that extension 4 Goon hook or proceed with other system functions Operation Call Pickup 1 While idle press 7 3 orpress a button programmed for this Call Park code 2 Dial the extension number where this call is to be parked or press the DSS button of the extension where this call is to be parked 3 You are connected to the call Conditions a Each telephone extension has one personal extension number used to park one CO line call b From your telephone you can park a call at any assigned and installed extension number c The Call Park feature code may be programmed on any programmable feature button d Calls can be retrieved from a
160. Another digital telephone Symptom s Diagnostic aid Process of elimination Static and or noise can be heard during a conversation Industry standard technician testing tools lineman s test set etc P7290 IMM Cause s Connection component failure Cause s Another extension Station cabling MDF wiring Extension apparatus Telco problem 4 5 Action Press the ON OFF button and listen for dial tone over the loudspeaker Call a known good extension The called extension should use the handset for this test Verify two way connection If you cannot hear the called extension verify that MUTE is not enabled at the called extension Status Lamp flashing red Lift the handset and verify two way connection using handset If verified as a speakerphone problem replace the telephone While on intercom call is the static heard only when connected to one particular extension Examine that extension If static exists on all calls check station cabling wiring and all MDF connections correct any problems If noise persists change out swappable components handset handset cord If noise continues try a known good extension connected to this station cable If static noise is heard on CO lines only determine if other extensions also hear the noise static If so are several CO lines affected or only a few Disconnect CO line at interface point and connect Lineman s tes
161. BA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Automated Attendant optional The DX 80 Auto Attendant option can greatly enhance business office productivity by providing either a full duty automated attendant to handle all incoming system calls or part duty automated attendant to handle overflow traffic only when the primary attendant cannot handle calls or after hours when the position may not be staffed The optional Automated Attendant Module AAM may be added to the DX 80 System The AAM is installed inside of KSU1 and provides a maximum of 120 seconds of programmable voice announcements The AAM provides four ports to handle four 4 simultaneous callers These voice announcements include Day Evening Noon and Temporary greeting messages Waiting Invalid Busy No Answer Good Bye and Inquiry prompts instructions The maximum recording time for each greeting message and the actual recording for each voice announcement is setup via Attendant Administration Related Features Attendant Administration DISA Direct Inward System Access Related Programming Call Handling Auto Attendant Category 1 2 amp 3 System Application Time Switching Operation Setting up the Auto Attendant Greetings and Messages Proper setup of the automated attendant will require some planning prior to entering the set
162. C DBA remote access to Database Administration will not be possible b Ifthere is no automated attendant or Voice Processor equipped at the site to be remotely accessed the modem connection must be manually administered on site The attendant user must transfer the call to the modem directory number 199 at default Default Settings System Application PC DBA Connection Auto Log Off 20 minutes Range is 10 20 60 System Application PC DBA Connection Log On Again 30 minutes Range is 0 10 60 System Resource Built in Modem DIR No is set to 199 Range is any extension number System Resource Built in Modem Baud Rate is set to 2400 Range is 1200 2400 Programming Abstract e Set the Auto Log Off time to the length that a PC DBA connection should be allowed to remain inactive before it is automatically disconnected e Set the Log On Again time to the appropriate time to secure the system from invasion attempts e Set the built in modem directory number for the directory number e Set the built in modem baud rate for the necessary operation rate Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brey he and 2 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three butions below the LCD display to actuate the Seet operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password
163. CO Line is a programmed setting that will determine what flash timing will be presented to the telephone company central office when the user issues a Hook Flash command while connected to a CO Line This feature is a requirement when the DX 80 is installed behind Centrex or a PBX system In these two cases the Flash feature code should be programmed onto a Flexible Feature Button for easy access If Call Waiting service is provided you can use the Flash feature to answer a second incoming call while connected to another outside party Related Features Speed Dial System and Station Memo Pad Last Number Redial Automatic Redial Related Programming Call Handling CO Flash Time Operation While connected to a CO Line press 3 The programmed hook flash is invoked on the connected CO Line circuit P7290 IMM 3 131 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Conditions a The Flash code may be stored in any speed dial location b The Flash code may be stored in the Last Number Redial buffer When you activate redial a Digital Speakerphone display will show a to indicate the Flash code c The Flash time is programmable from 100ms to 1500ms in increments of 100ms 1 10th of a second d Ata Digital Speakerphone when the flash code is dialed CO Flash will be displayed temporarily e Single line extensions must generate a hook flash on the analog port then dial 3 to generate a hook flash ona CO L
164. Connect O T a a a Failure Press Any Key Connect i a ii mi ie ie ES Succeed i Press Any Key Press any key to return to the PC DBA Maintenance screens When a successful connection has been established between the DX 80 processor and the PC PC DBA software the following icon is displayed in the upper left corner of the PC DBA screen Cnt F6 Disconnect Disconnecting from the DX 80 processor When a link is established between the DX 80 and PC DBA this link must also be broken when Maintenance operations are complete This breakdown of the connection will occur automatically if the connection path cable or modem connection is interrupted or when PC DBA is exited while the link is active To force disconnect between the DX 80 processor and PC DBA press F6 Disconnect This procedure usually completes within a few seconds F7 Print At times a screen printout is desirable This utility allows printing of each PC DBA screen Printout requires that this screen be in use at the time F7 is pressed F7 Print also requires that a printer be connected to the PC Parallel port to operate Some other third party utility programs are available to capture the output of the PC LPT parallel port to a file These utilities can be very helpful for severe trouble shooting analysis P7290 IMM 4 9 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MAN
165. Connection no device attached i 1 01 3 742 i 1 01 74 743 AILED FAILED Extensions e Ports EXT POS DIR TYPE RESULT 1 01 1 1 01 8 e Directory 1 01 1 101 EXEC DISPLAY PASSED numbers l A 1 01 2 102 EXEC DISPLAY FA D 101 108 01 e Passed operation OK 1 01 3 103 NO CONNECTION OPEN leen ise l error to device 1 01 4 104 EXEC DISPLAY OPEN e Open either no connection ever registered or previous 1 01 5 105 NO CONNECTION OPEN registered device is no longer connected 1 01 6 106 NO CONNECTION OPEN l 1 01 7 107 NO CONNECTION OPEN 1 01 78 108 NO CONNECTION OPEN l R16UMO F21 e Ee Soe ge Eat o es e e es o mm reg i i ci Ce o cs fi Agen mm Ee ent COM4 Board 5 Selected fo DX80 PC DBA cnt KSU Revision KIGUMO F19 Date 01 02 14 l Time 20 46 53 l Diagnostics L COM4 BOARD l COL POS DIR LOOP DISC l y 1 05 1 744 OPEN OPEN 1 05 2 745 OPEN OPEN l P7290 IMM 4 24 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 1 05 73 746 OPEN OPEN l 1 05 4 747 OPEN OPEN Passed Loop OK In Incoming call Out Outgoing call Failed Loop Fail R16UMO F21 a is e a a e ec i a d st ert enzege ee Be Kee Press then Y T ATA A AE AN EFA ET gee Fe to exit this screen Ex1t This Feature Y N Self Test EE i Syst
166. Control Contact External Paging LBC Gate Control One External Page Equipment Interface Connection Socket connectors for KSU2 labeled 2 Cabinet MDM and VP modules AAM FL 4 and PC 8 The CPM is installed inside of KSU1 to the 408M ribbon cable J4 also labeled To CPM MW Standard 408M part of 7201 with 4 CO Line Ports 1 Power Failure Transfer Port for the first CO line circuit 8 Digital Ports Ribbon cable J1 also labeled COM4 for connection to the COM4 Module PN 7210 in KSU1 Ribbon cable sockets J2 and J3 also labeled To DPM8 APM4 for connection of DPM8 PN 7220 or APM4 PN 7230 modules M Standard APM4 part of 7201 with 4 Analog Device Ports installed on ribbon cable J5 also labeled APM4 KSU2 Components M Standard 408E part of 7202 with 4 CO Line Ports 1 Power Failure Transfer Port for the first CO line circuit 8 Digital Ports Ribbon cable J1 also labeled COM4 for connection to the COM4 Module PN 7210 Ribbon cable sockets J2 and J3 also labeled To DPM8 APM4 for connection of DPM8 PN 7220 or APM4 PN 7230 modules Shielded cable J4 for connection to CPM socket JP2 also labeled 2 Cabinet in KSU1 Voice Processing Modules The DX 80 provides for several voice processing options Voice processors are commonly referred to as Voice Mail systems However this term is too generic to accurately describe the options available and how they might
167. DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 07 02 01 then press This advances to the first Fax circuit Destination screen circuit 743 e Press E3 e Input the directory number of the analog port that is connected to the fax machine that will answer fax calls answered on this line e Press pave e Press to program the second fax circuit through to the fourth fax circuit Or e Press HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press Gabel E to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming P7290 IMM 3 125 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used tohighlight CO Line Application Then press e Used EB to highlight Fax Detection Then press e Use tohighlight the database item FAX Destination for the CO Line port that will receive Facsimile transmissions e Press e Input the Analog port directory number that is connected to the FAX machine then press e lf other CO Line ports wi
168. DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 External Page Control The contact may also be programmed to control External Paging apparatus When programmed in this manner the contact closure operates whenever the External Paging Port is activated Music Source Control The contact may also be programmed to control Message On Hold devices In this mode of operation the contact closes make whenever CO lines are placed on Hold This function can reduce wear on electromechanical devices that provide the message on hold function Related Features CO Line Ringing Music On Hold External Paging Related Programming System Resource Loud Bell CO Line CO Line Type CO Line Group Default Settings System Resource Loud Bell L B Loud Bell Range is L B MS1 MS2 EP System Resource Loud Bell CO Line Group 1 8 N Range is Y N Programming Abstract e Program the Loud Bell contacts for the device type control e f using the contact for control of a Loud Bell device program what CO Line Groups will activate the bell Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brey pns and 2 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three Eupen Gate the LCD display to actuate the aeeodicied operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be cha
169. Digital Soeakerphones selected for Voice Announce Hands free or Voice Announce Private are logically answered by the system at the called extension E button will flash c Ifa Flexible Feature Button has been programmed with the Intercom Mode Selection Code 9 8 the LED associated to that button will indicate the current mode selection as follows e Voice Announce Hands free LED will light steady green b During Tone Ring the red LED associated to the e Voice Announce Privacy LED will light steady red e Tone Ringing Mode LED will not light Default Setting All digital soeakerphones are set to Voice Announce Hands free Reply mode Intrusion Extension CO Line Intrusion allows the initiator to enter into an existing conversation when the initiator has been given the privilege to do so via Extension programming Intrusion Active Y This feature can be very effective for service observing and any time that forcedly entering into a conversation on a CO Line or at another extension may be required Intrusion can be invoked both on a busy CO Line and to a busy extension P7290 IMM 3 157 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Related Features Monitor Extension Via Monitor COS Related Programming Extension Intrusion Active Intrusion Accept Intrusion Tone Operation 1 Press the busy CO Line button or dial a busy extension number Call to a busy extension the display w
170. E E E PEP PPE EP AAA d A PI rem EH DAA APMA4 pot 408M J S 7 a il il ii il D D a K al mm em wm WS P7290 IMM 2 10 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Extension number matrix per installed location KSU Connector Extension numbers Extension Numbers used in KSU1 in KSU2 APM4 Connector 149 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 KSU1 analog ports are standard SLOT 4 J2 Extension 109 110 111 112 133 134 135 136 Expansion Since the profile of the APM4 SLOT 2 J3 Extension 117 118 119 120 141 142 143 144 Expansion connector can be Expansion used for APM4 modules module is higher than the other modules only one Extension SLOT 3 APM4 Installation Procedure 9 Be sure that KSU power is turned off Remove the KSU cover four screws at each corner Connect grounded wrist strap to a suitable earth ground If a grounded wrist strap is not available bleed any static charge from your body before touching circuit modules by touching the gold painted surface of the inside of the KSU cabinet If the KSU is properly grounded this will momentarily discharge static electricity from your body NOTE A GROUNDED WRIST STRAP IS THE ONLY METHOD OF ASSURING THAT STATIC ELECTRICITY DOES NOT DAMAGE CIRCUIT MODULES Remove the APM4 module from the packaging and locate the four nickel color standoffs packaged with the module Position the APM4 over the left hand side o
171. E MANUAL 03 01 1 Overview The Comdial DX 80 is a fully digital hybrid key telephone system The DX 80 utilizes Loop Start central office Telephone Company line interfaces and a mix of analog and digital extension ports to provide office communications and connectivity to the Public Switched Telephone Network The DX 80 delivers a vast array of office productivity features and telephone use enhancing features including Caller Identification required Telephone Company subscription in the standard package Unlike most systems that support Caller ID the DX 80 supports Caller ID to DX 80 proprietary digital extensions and to third party Caller ID capable analog devices cordless telephones etc Although most features are standard the DX 80 provides for several optional features to further enhance office communications Built in voice processing integration packages are Automated Attendant Cost Effective Flash Based Voice Mail Auto Attendant and Cost Effective fully featured Hard Drive based Voice Mail Auto Attendant The DX 80 platform allows the application of these voice processing platforms without loss of valuable system port resources The DX 80 is comprised of an application configured expandable Key Service Unit KSU platform There is one fully featured Digital Executive display Telephone that delivers access to all system functionality The system architecture provides an expandable interface for digital port growth and ana
172. ECT Voice Mail 1 IDLE l Voice Mail 2 IDLE e Idle Ready for a d call l Voice Mail 3 IDLE e Busy Port in use l i Voice Mail 4 IDLE l Voice Mail 5 IDLE Voice Mail 6 IDLE l l i Voice Mail 7 IDLE Voice Mail 8 IDLE l l l l l l l l l R16UMO F21 ci e D eg eg Jet Veit d s eg eet Jet a e Zeg ee a e ic Geet a ey d a a DX80 PC DBA Cnt KSU Revision K16UMO F19 Date 01 02 14 l Time 20 53 22 Status MDM BOARD BUILT IN MODEM IDLE e idle Ready fora call e Busv Port in tise P7290 IMM 4 28 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 R16UMO F21 ee ee a ee ee re E E Ee PAS ASS 408 BOARD OPEN OPEN APM4 BOARD COM4 BOARD i PS PR DX80 PC DBA cnt KSU Revision K16UMO F19 Date 01 02 14 Time 20 54 21 Status 408 BOARD i TRK POS DIR STATUS 1 01 1 740 IDLE 1 01 2 741 FAIL 1 0173 742 FAIL l 1 01 4743 FAIL Status can be e Idle equipped and ready e Fail equipped but errors present CO l EXT POS DIR TYPE no loop current Ext lost data l communications 1 01 1 101 EXEC DISPLAY e Open no hardware recognized i e Busy in use 1 01 2 102 NO CONNECTION 1 01 3 103 NO CONNECTION OPEN l 1 01 4 104 NO CONNECTION OPEN y 1 01 5 105
173. ELO to return to the previous menu level or press MECA to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used 8 tohighlight Call Handling Then press e Used tohighlight Category 1 Then press e Use tohighlight the database item Hold Reminder to change the interval of this tone reminder P7290 IMM 3 149 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press Each time that enter is pressed the value of this database item is updated e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press esca
174. ET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Braid he foe SF and ps are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the ascoclated operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 08 01 to program Ring Scheme e Press 2 until the appropriate value displays e Press HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press Choad E to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used e tohighlight System Application Then press e Used tohighlight Category 1 Then press e Used tohighlight Ring Scheme e Press until the appropriate Ring Scheme displays e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting
175. Expansion Module Connector closest to the DPM8 Press firmly but not forcefully on the connector to secure a good connection 8 Make connections to the 8 digital ports as required The FCC requires that wiring of CO Lines into a Key Service Unit be separated from the wiring of station apparatus into a Key Service Unit Therefore the installer must use a separate cable for wiring of stations and CO Lines 9 Replace the KSU cover and secure with cover screws 10 Restore KSU power Adding an APM4 Analog Port Module 4 port One APM4 Analog Port Module 4 port can be added to KSU1 and two APM4 s can be added to KSU2 These modules expand the DX 80 system extension capacity to a maximum of 8 analog ports in each KSU 16 total analog ports when used in both KSU 1 amp 2 When adding an APM4 to KSU1 it is installed by connection to the 408M via an available Extension Expansion module connector either J2 or J3 but not both These connectors have the logical system address of SLOT 2 and SLOT 3 in both Cabinet 1 KSU1 408M and Cabinet 2 KSU2 408E APM4 s are installed using four 4 2 5 cm nickel color standoffs When adding APM4 modules to KSU2 one may be installed on either of the Extension Expansion module connectors and one may be installed on the dedicated APM4 Module Connector This connector has the logical system address of SLOT 4 in both Cabinet 1 KSU1 408M and Cabinet 2 KSU2 408E CE
176. Extension Directory Numbers e Press save e Press pex This advances to the Built in Modem Baud Rate programming screen e Press 3 until the appropriate baud rate displays e Press HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press Geck to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Use to highlight System Resources and then press P7290 IMM 3 171 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Used tohighlight Modem A Serial Port and then press e Used tohighlight the database item Built in Modem DIR No if the number is to be changed e Press e Input the new directory number and then press enter to temporarily store this data e Use tohighlight the database item Built in Modem Baud Rate to change the operating speed of the modem e Press Each time that enter is pressed the value of this database item is updated e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen Y
177. F9 Mdm above Pm MODEM Connect Eed Input dial number l l l E E E E E E E 8 8 nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn nn n l Input the telephone number to dial at the site location Then press P7290 IMM 4 10 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 If modem connection at this site requires a human to transfer the modem call to the DX 80 modem Extension 199 you must have a standard telephone connected to the same circuit as the modem so that you may verbally request the answering person to transfer the call Dialing begins and then the modems negotiate connection A successful negotiation results in the following confirmation display MODEM Connect i E SA SO l Connect Succeed The connection is also noted with an icon that appears in the upper left corner of the display Mdm Once a modem connection has been accomplished F5 Connect is possible F5 Connect is required to link PC DBA to the DX 80 CPM processor F10 RS232C F10 RS232C is the utility to setup the PC COM port To successfully setup the PC COM port you must know how the PC hardware is configured In this utility you must select the COM Port number PC DBA supports COM 1 or 2 only and the baud rate that will be used for the connection At default PC DBA is setup to use COM Port 1 at 9600 bps 9600 bps
178. Groups as a means of handling high traffic into third party ancillary RAN devices Whenever the Overflow destinations of a UCD Group require the use of multiple ancillary devices to handle the call traffic of announcements while callers are in UCD queue these devices can be pooled in a group available UCD Group for access Doing so allows any of the available devices to handle waiting calls with the same announcement Related Features Uniform Call Distribution Groups Recorded Announcement Devices Related Programming Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Attribute Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Members Extension Port Type Conditions a All V A UCD Group Members must be assigned as Port Type V A b All ancillary RAN Devices must be recorded individually for the same announcement c This is not required when using the DX 80 VP system for UCD Overflow announcements Default Setting Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Attribute UCD Range is UCD V A Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Members NULL Extension Port Type EXT Range is EXT V A VM Programming Abstract e Select the UCD Group to be used as the V A Voice Announcer UCD Group e Program the analog ports connected to RAN Devices as Port Type V A e Program the analog RAN ports into the V A UCD Group e Program the V A UCD Group as the Overflow Destination
179. IS THE BEST METHOD OF ASSURING THAT STATIC ELECTRICITY DOES NOT DAMAGE CIRCUIT MODULES Locate the CPM and PAGE connector jack on the CPM eE 5 Adjust the voice volume level at the external paging amplifier When adjusting the volume level dial access to the External Pager port at any DX 80 telephone 777 Then adjust the volume control associated to the amplifier input selected for this purpose 4 Using an eighth inch mini plug connect the DX 80 Page port to the external amplifier input Adding Loud Bell Control or Gate Control One dry connection is provided at the CPM of the DX 80 system for use El with external ringing devices or door opening apparatus The DX 80 can be programmed to activate the dry contact whenever certain CO Lines ring or whenever the LBC code is dialed to actuate a door opener Loud Ringing Bell Installation Procedure 1 Remove the KSU cover four screws at each corner of KSU1 Ka 2 Connect grounded wrist strap to a suitable earth ground Ifa BELL control connector grounded wrist strap is not available bleed any static charge from your body before wires to bell and power touching circuit modules by touching the gold painted surface of the inside of the KSU supply cabinet If the KSU is properly grounded this will momentarily discharge static electricity from your body NOTE A GROUNDED WRIST STRAP IS THE BEST METHOD OF ASSURING THAT STATIC ELECTRICITY DOES NOT DAMAGE CIRCUIT MODU
180. KSU cabinet If the KSU is properly grounded this will momentarily discharge static electricity from your body NOTE A GROUNDED WRIST STRAP IS THE ONLY METHOD OF ASSURING THAT STATIC CHARGE DOES NOT DAMAGE CIRCUIT MODULES 4 Remove all circuit modules from the KSU cabinet All modules are fastened in place using standoff hardware Notice be sure that stand off placement is re constructed when the various modules are re P7290 IMM 2 7 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 installed APM4 modules must be installed using 2 5 cm stand offs These specific length standoffs are steel color for easy identification 5 Install the replacement 408M E using the brass 2 0cm standoffs removed from the original 6 Install all other remaining modules in the order that they were removed connecting them to the appropriate 408M E connector 7 Reconnect CO Line and Station cabling connections as required The FCC requires that wiring of CO Lines into a Key Service Unit be separated from wiring of station apparatus into a Key Service Unit Therefore the installer must use a separate cable for wiring of stations and CO Lines 8 Replace the KSU cover and secure with cover screws 9 Restore KSU power when all wiring is complete KSU Assembly Add on Modules Whenever the DX 80 system is expanded a module must be installed into one of the KSU cabinets Modules are connected to the various connectors on the 408M E Modules a
181. LES 3 Locate the CPM and BELL connector jack on the CPM P7290 IMM 2 16 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 4 Using an eighth inch mini plug wire the DX 80 BELL contact in series with an external 24vdc power supply and 24vdc bell or ringing device Important use only 24v or less voltage supply and Direct Current dc 5 Program LBC operation for CO Line ringing according to CO Line Group assignments See Loud Bell Control in the features description section of this manual 6 Tocontrol a gate or door 7 Remove the KSU cover four screws at each corner of KSU1 Connect grounded wrist strap to a suitable earth ground If a grounded wrist strap is not available bleed any static charge from your body before touching circuit modules by touching the gold painted surface of the inside of the KSU cabinet If the KSU is properly grounded this will momentarily discharge static electricity from your body NOTE A GROUNDED WRIST STRAP IS THE BEST METHOD OF ASSURING THAT STATIC ELECTRICITY DOES NOT DAMAGE CIRCUIT MODULES 9 Locate the CPM and BELL connector jack on the CPM 10 Using an eighth inch mini plug wire the DX 80 BELL contact in series with an external 24vdc power supply and 24vdc door opening device Important use only 24v or less voltage supply and Direct Current dc 11 Program LBC operation for External Page operation Door Gate operation is accomplished by dialing the External Page cod
182. M 3 20 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press The current ALT Alternate Mode Answer Position for the selected tenant group displays e Enter the appropriate DX 80 system directory number extension UCD group Virtual Number where callers should be routed when they cannot be routed automatically e Press pave e Press The current EVE Evening Mode Answer Position for the selected tenant group displays e Enter the appropriate DX 80 system directory number extension UCD group Virtual Number where callers should be routed when they cannot be routed automatically e Press pave e Presse The DX 80 system prompts for changes to another tenant group if necessary If so enter that group number and follow the previous steps to complete programming for the selected tenant group Otherwise press to return to the previous programming level Answer Position Press bet The next database item Auto Attendant Line displays Notice that the display prompts you for the CO line directory number 740 755 Enter the CO line directory number 740 755 to be programmed for use with the automated attendant Press EPs The next database item for Automated Attendant operation of this CO line Auto A Line displays Y N Y yes indicates that this CO line will be answered by the automated attendant N no indicates that it will not Press bet The next database item Service and the
183. MANUAL 03 01 Symptom s Diagnostic aid Cause s Cannot hear other Another digital Component Lift handset intercom dial tone should be heard connected party telephone failure over the handset If not Hang up put the handset in the cradle then press the ON OFF button If dial tone is heard over the loudspeaker Replace handset and repeat the first test If there is still no dial tone heard through the handset Replace the handset cord and retest Still no dial tone heard replace the telephone If dial tone is not heard over the loudspeaker ON OFF button test replace the telephone The above test requires that the feature Auto Select be set for intercom operation ICM Symptom s Diagnostic aid Cause s Action Other party can t hear you Another digital Connection Press the ON OFF button and listen for dial tone while using the telephone component over the loudspeaker speakerphone failure Call a known good extension The called extension should use the handset for this test Verify two way connection lf the called extension cannot hear your voice verify that MUTE is not enabled Status Lamp flashing red Lift the handset and verify two way connection using handset If verified as a speakerphone problem replace the telephone P7290 IMM 4 4 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Symptom s Diagnostic aid No sound heard over loudspeaker in speakerphone mode
184. N Extension Day Eve Class Of Service 0 Range is 0 7 CO Line Day Eve Class Of Service 0 Range is 0 7 Conditions a Digit Interval 001 is programmed as From 0 To This allows all digits to be dialed b There are one hundred 100 Interval Table entries available for programming c System Speed can be set to Override toll restriction Programming Abstract e Program Digit Intervals as required e Assign Digit Intervals to Extension CO Line COS for Day and Eve modes as required e Assign Extension COS as required to follow the appropriate Digit Interval e Assign CO Line COS as required to follow the appropriate Digit Interval Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brea pns and 4 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three bution below the LCD display to actuate the ascociated operation P7290 IMM 3 215 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press E The DB Item Select screen displays Program Digit Interval s and assign Extension CO Line COS to Digit Intervals e Input 05 01 1 3 001 100 where 1 3 is the Tenant Group and 001 100 is the Interval to program Then press h This advances to the FROM column of the tenant group and i
185. NCE MANUAL 03 01 Call Back Extension cesk This feature allows you to queue an extension which is busy in Do Not Disturb DND or idle When you send a Call Back to a busy extension the Call Back process will begin when the busy extension hangs up When you send a Call Back to an idle extension the Call Back process will begin once the user performs an operation at that extension and then hangs up When the Call Back process begins you will hear bursts of tone signaling you to pick up the handset or press the LCD soft key under reply Then the queued extension begins ringing Related Features Intercom Mode Selection Forced Intercom Tone Ring Direct Station Selection Interactive Soft Buttons Voice Announce Hands free Reply Delete all Call Back F Related Programming Call Handling Tenant Calling Operation 1 Dial the extension directory number of the busy extension If the extension you are calling is in Tone Ringing Mode the display will show If the extension you are calling is busy the display will show 2 Press FECE Confirmation tone is heard and Display will read Your extension will return to idle status To Answer a Call Back 1 When the Call Back begins called extension is now available your extension will ring a special Call Back alert ring for 30 seconds and the display will show 2 Lift the handset or press Or 3 Press EF 1 to activate the Call Back To cancel all active Call
186. NCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu e Used tohighlight Extension and then press e Used to highlight Intrusion Active for the Extension to be changed e Press until the appropriate value displays e Used 8 e tohighlight Intrusion Accept for the Extension to be changed e Press Each time that enter is pressed the value of this database item is updated e Used to Intrusion Tone for the Extension to be changed e Press until the appropriate value displays e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other pro
187. NSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Press the Woe A up or down to return the index entry to program another extension 01 101 156 20 OF Exit the programming mode Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing The program title page displays Press any key at the program title page to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the Main Menu The PC DBA menu is then shown Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Use d 8 to highlight Extension and then press Uset e tohighlight Category 3 and then press Use d amp to highlight Record Allow for the extension number Press to change the value of the database item Y N Continue making changes as required When all changes are made press escape to exit this programming You will be prompted to confirm exit request press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave System Reminder unchanged e Press Y to save changes You will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave System Reminder unchanged e Press Y to save changes Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming
188. Not Disturb mode will cause the LED associated to that extension to flash red c Extensions that are busy will cause the LED associated to that extension to light steady red d The DSS function can be used to transfer calls to other extensions e Each Digital Soeakerphone has a default feature button mapping refer to the Description and Installation sections for additional default mapping information Default Setting All extensions are programmed for BLF DSS buttons for extensions 101 112 Programming Abstract Refer to Flexible Feature Button Programming Busy Ring Allow Deny KL p2 This feature allows the extension user the ability to turn on or off muted ringing of incoming or transferred calls when the user is in a busy status When a CO line is ringing or transferred to a busy extension and Busy Ring is allowed the user will hear muted ringing When a CO line is ringing or transferred to a busy extension and Busy Ring is denied the user will hear a single burst of warning tone All programmed call forwarding and recall conditions apply in either Busy Ring condition Related Features Transfer Transfer Beep Enable F56 Related Programming CO Line Call Abandon Route and Answering Position Call Handling XFER_B Recall Operation Setup To deny Busy Ring Press 2 Confirmation tone will be heard and the display will read To allow Busy Ring Press Feature 2 Confirmation tone will be heard and the
189. PM J11 Move this strap to the COLD START position and allow it to remain in this position for 5 seconds Note New systems are shipped with this strap in the COLD START position therefore this step can be skipped Move the strap to the NORMAL position Turn ON the power supply to the system by moving the ON OFF switch to the ON position on KSU1 and KSU2 if two installed simultaneously A qualified telephony technician only should perform this procedure since hazardous voltages are present inside the KSU cabinet CA U TI O N DO NOT TOUCH exposed terminals or fuse connections at or around the power supply and fuse area while the system is powered and the KSU cabinet cover is removed Observe the LED on the CPM at the left side of the module The LED should begin to flash slowly The LED located at the ON OFF button of the KSU follows the operation of the LED on the 408M Both of these LED s indicate the operation of the peripheral processors on the 408M The LED on the APM4 will also begin to flash indicating that its peripheral processor is running Once this is detected default data is forced into operational memory Note This procedure overwrites all customized customer programming During this detection and force loading of data the CPM LED will flash at various fast rates then stabilize again at a consistent rhythmic rate Once this consistent rate is reached the system has begun operations and
190. Paging Groups e Program extensions for the ability to initiate a page announcement e Program the External Pager to be associated with the appropriate Tenant Group e Program the External Pager to be associated with the Page Groups as required e Program directory number access codes see Flexible Numbering Plan P7290 IMM 3 179 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brea ore and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the Seet operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays Program extensions into Paging Groups e input 01 101 156 04 Then press al This advances you to the Paging Group programming screen for the extension selected e Press 2 until the appropriate Paging Group number displays e Press A to return to the DB Item Select screen Program External Pager to a Tenant Group and Paging Groups e Input 04 12 1 01 Then press F2 This advances to the External Pager Tenant Group programming screen e Press r until the appropriate Tenant Group displays This is the tenant group that the external pager will be associated too e Press until the Paging Group to
191. Premises Message 6 On vacation Programming Abstract Change the content of preprogrammed messages as necessary Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brea oh and 2 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three burton below the LCD display to aciuate the ascocialed operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 04 07 02 01 then press E This advances to Preprogrammed Messages Premises Status Message 1 e Press if necessary to advance to the next preprogrammed message to change e Press to input a new message for the selected preprogrammed message e Use the chart and the dial pad keys to input the new message When finished press E s e Continue programming messages as required e Press HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press Gewerk to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then
192. Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure CO Line Type Assignment Each CO line can be assigned as PBX CO Line EMPTY CO DEV or PAGE These designations provide for the following possible CO Line circuit connections CO CO type CO Line circuits are standard interface CO Lines that require no special handling for advanced system features PBX PBX Line type invokes system automatic operations for handling of PBX ports When a programmed PBX Trunk access code is dialed the system is alerted that the user is accessing a telephone company facility to make a network call When this occurs the system monitors digits dialed after the PBX access code and compares them against the Allowed Digit Interval table in that station s Class of Service The programmed PBX Trunk access code also notifies the system that a pause should be inserted when re dialing telephone numbers dialed on that CO line beginning with the PBX access code This operation applies for Speed Dial Last Number Redial Saved Number Redial Memo Pad and Automatic Redial EMPTY Assignment
193. RAN device port is released Default Settings Extension Port Type EXT standard extension Programming Abstract When using ancillary third party RAN Recorded Announcement Devices connected to VA Type analog ports e Program the analog ports connected to the RAN Device s as Port Type VA e Program the VA Type analog port directory extension number as the Overflow 1 and or 2 for the UCD Group See UCD Group programming When high traffic is expected for the UCD Group RAN destination e Program the VA Type analog port directory numbers in a specific VA UCD group e Program the selected VA UCD Group as Attribute VA See UCD Group programming When using the built in DX 80 Voice system e Program each Overflow Destination for all necessary UCD Groups for directory number 433 default for the DX 80 Voice UCD VM Group See UCD Group programming e Program each Reroute Destinations for all necessary UCD Groups for directory number 433 default for the DX 80 Voice UCD VM Group See UCD Group programming e See the DX 80 Voice Installation amp Maintenance Manual for details of this application programming requirements Program messages into the UCD Overflow mailboxes as required Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brey pns and E E are LCD interactive button operations Use the three Buttons below the LCD display to actuate the astoci
194. Related Features Service Mode Speed Dial System Automated Attendant Auxiliary Lamp CFW Temporary Mode Tenant Attendant Programming Related Programming System Resource Attendant Tenant 1 3 Alternate Attendant System Number Assignment Speed Number Programming User Password CO Line Answering Position Day Evening System Application Time Switching Operation Note ask pest Eno En EEF and 22 are interactive LCD button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the SS operation Note Before Attendant Administration Admin can begin you must enter the User Password of the programmed Attendant extension for the Tenant Group to be administered At any digital extension enter the Admin Code l O Enter the Tenant Group number to be Administered Typically Tenant Group 1 Dress Enter the passwor for this Tenant Group Attendant default for the Tenant Group 1 Attendant is 9999 Press EP The first Admin item SVC MODE CHANGE displays ee Ee 6 Press to move to the next Admin item or press Ei to show the current service mode DAY ALT EVE TIME To change Service Mode 1 Press EP 2 Press Fr to toggle and set the service mode Options are Day Evening Alternate or Time Time mode follows programming of Time Switching 3 Press the WAA button to exit Service Mode Change and return to the previous menu 4 Press x The Admin it
195. S assignable per entry per CO Line and Extension CDB ESOS Tame Password 8 digits CO at default CS EE Electrical data Electrical Specifications Dedicated 117 230vac 15 47 63Hz single phase Power Supply fuse AC input 2A 250v DC output 1A 125v Idle Channel Noise 74 dB Cross Talk Attenuation 75 dB O 1kHz P7290 IMM 1 16 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Electrical Specifications Ringing Sensitivity 40v RMS 25 Hz CO Line Signaling DTMF amplitude 5 dB 7 dB 2 dB approx 2 Vpp Pulse Dialing ratio 60 40 10 PPS Music source Background Music 0 dBm at 600 ohm input impedance 1 8th inch phono jack Contact rating Option Module LBC 1A 30VDC 0 5A O 90VAC 30Hz 1 8th inch phono jack External Page Port 0 dBm at 600 ohms 1 8th inch phono jack Environmental data Environmental Specifications Operating Temperature 0 to 40 C 32 to 104 F Recommended Operating Temperature 70 to 78 F Storage Temperature 32 to 104 F Operating Relative Humidity 5 to 90 non condensing Unit Component detail Unit Specifications Part Description Dimensions Weight Number 7201 7202 KSU1 KSU2 CPM Central Processor Module 7248 408M Standard 4 CO Line x 8 Digital 210 mm 8 25 in 0 4Kg Extension Module 138mm AB in 18mm 3 4 in COM4 Central Office Module 4 Port 7220 DPMB8 Digital Port Module 8 Port 210 mm 8 25 in
196. SS Console required its own dedicated cable pair from the KSU 12 maximum DSS Consoles can be assigned in the DX 80 system 4maximum DSS Consoles can be assigned to any one digital soeakerphone extension attendant a o y Default Setting No Attendant Extension Consoles are assigned in default Each DSS is mapped with a default button arrangement Refer to Configuration in the Overview section of this manual to view the DSS button map P7290 IMM 3 15 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming Abstract e Assign a DSS Console to the designated digital port via directory number extension number assigned to that digital port e Assign the DSS Console to operate with the designated digital soeakerphone owner e Program buttons on DSS Console as required if default map is not adequate for your application Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note psk Peet Brow Fre EEEF and 22 are interactive LCD button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to actuate the Seet operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password HHH HH F Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 04 14 1 01 to program the Owner of DSS Console 1 e Press 24 The current programming of the DSS Console 1 Owner displays e Tochange the designate
197. STALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Each CO line circuit incorporates over voltage protection ring detector loop detector loop pulse dial relay current sink circuit coupling isolation transformer impedance 600 600 hybrid circuit CODEC amp filter polarity guard circuit and Radio Frequency noise filter The fourth CO Line port is equipped with CNG Fax Tone Detection circuitry When programmed as a FAX line this circuit will automatically engage the FAX Tone detector If FAX tone is detected the call is routed to the analog port designated as the destination for fax calls Figure 5 COM4 Central Office Module 4 Port MDM Modem Module The Modem Module is a self contained integrated modem unit that is installed at JP5 and JP6 in the upper right corner of the CPM The integrated Modem Module allows the servicing Telephone Company to access the telephone system programming and remote maintenance utilities from an off site location password verification required When the MDM is used the remote location programming is done via the proprietary DOS based PC program PC DBA This program can be obtained free of charge at the Comdial Web site www comdial com or from the Comdial Customer Services Department Diskette and shipping charges may apply When installed the servicing technician uses PC DBA and a modem in the PC to place a call to the site where the DX 80 is installed If one of the voice processing syste
198. SU Revision K16UMO F19 Date 01 02 14 l l i Time 20 42 16 l l i Configuration Board Status Cabinet 2 l l l l BOARD TYPE STATUS l l BOARD 1 OPEN OPEN l l BOARD 2 OPEN OPEN l l BOARD 3 OPEN OPEN l l i BOARD 4 OPEN OPEN l l BOARD 5 OPEN OPEN l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l i R16UMO F21 beten et Ven aa l j cy ms ily a my jm a ad Diagnostics The Diagnostics function can be invoked to force a diagnostic test operation The system performs this test automatically at the time it boots up initial installation and whenever programmed to do so See Database Administration via PC DBA System Application Category 1 Self Test Time At default factory settings the system Self Test Time is set to NULL never performed The Diagnostic Self Test can be invoked Automatically as above or Manually When the Diagnostic Self Test is invoked the DX 80 will perform a list of software and hardware checks to assure proper operation of the hardware installed P7290 IMM 4 19 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Diagnostic Test activity has the lowest priority in CPU processing tasks Therefore the time required to complete this testing operation could vary from one test to the next When an automatic test or manual test of the entire system is invoked the testing time will be approximately 30 minutes
199. SU2 Each CO line circuit incorporates over voltage protection ring detector loop detector loop pulse dial relay current sink circuit coupling isolation transformer impedance 600 600 hybrid circuit CODEC amp filter polarity guard circuit and Radio Frequency noise filter The fourth CO Line port is equipped with CNG Fax Tone Detection circuitry When programmed as a FAX line this circuit will automatically engage the FAX Tone detector If FAX tone is detected the call is routed to the analog port designated as the destination for fax calls P7290 IMM 1 7 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Each digital port connects to Digital Executive Telephones and DSS Consoles is comprised of a proprietary octal ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit transceiver There are three data channels in operation at each extension port via the octal transceiver One channel is used for call processing control of digital terminal functions operations and two channels are used for the digital voice channel requirements Each digital station interface is protected against circuit wiring shorts by an over current protection Polyswitch The digital station circuit requires only one cable pair to operate and is not polarity sensitive Physical connection of digital extension terminals power failure telephones and CO lines to the 408M module is made through convenient RJ 11 connectors along the bottom edge of the module APM4 A
200. TALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press pesi e 06 01 01 24 04 UCD Group select Hunting Method e Press r to select the Hunting Method for this UCD Group e Press pesi e 06 01 01 24 05 UCD Group input No Answer Time e Press E3 e Input appropriate No Answer Time e Press pre e Press bei e 06 01 01 24 06 UCD Group select Overflow 1 Timer e Press E53 e Input appropriate Overflow 1 Timer e Press pre e Press bei e 06 01 01 24 07 UCD Group input Overflow 1 Destination e Press E3 e Input appropriate Overflow 1 Destination e Press baal e Press pesi e 06 01 01 24 08 UCD Group select Overflow 2 Timer e Press E3 e Input appropriate Overflow 2 Timer e Press pre e Press pest e 06 01 01 24 09 UCD Group input Overflow 2 Destination e Press E3 e Input appropriate Overflow 2 Destination e Press baal e Press pesi e 06 01 01 24 10 UCD Group select Overflow Count e Press E3 e Input appropriate Overflow Count e Press baal e Press pesi e 06 01 01 24 11 UCD Group input Reroute Destination e Press E3 e Input appropriate Reroute Destination e Press pave P7290 IMM 3 226 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press et e Press ME to return to the previous menu level or press MUSEOS to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming uti
201. TION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Hold Common System I Hold Indication You may place any CO line on System Hold by pressing the ETS button When you place a line on System Hold the green lamp for that line will flash at the I Hold rate This system hold line will flash the red lamp at all other extensions l Hold Indication allows you to easily distinguish between a call you placed on hold at your telephone and calls placed on hold at other telephones When you place a call on System Hold the associated line lamp will flash at the System Hold rate using the green lamp to indicate that this is your holding line The same held CO line at other extensions will flash at the System Hold rate using the red lamp Related Features Call Transfer Hold Reminder Hold Abandon Related Programming Call Handling Hold Recall Hold Reminder Ex_Hold Time Operation 1 While on a line the green lamp for that line is Use flashing double wink rate 2 Press EED The green lamp now flashes at a slow rate and the call is placed on System Hold Conditions a Pressing Hold will place a conference on Exclusive Hold if you are the controlling party and you temporarily exit to add another party b When a conference call is pl
202. U cabinet If the KSU is properly grounded this will momentarily discharge static electricity from your body NOTE A GROUNDED WRIST STRAP IS THE BEST METHOD OF ASSURING THAT STATIC ELECTRICITY DOES NOT DAMAGE CIRCUIT MODULES Locate the CPM and PCDBA serial port on the CPM Connect the male end of the 9 pin serial cable into this PCDBA port PCDBA serial port connector straight through 9 pin male to female cable required Connect the other end female of the 9 pin serial cable to the PC serial port to be used with PC DBA P7290 IMM 2 17 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 6 Refer to the instructions for operating PC DBA in the features section of this manual Connecting a Serial Cable for SMDR SMDR Station Message Detail Recording can be output from the DX 80 system for use with serial printers of collection in call accounting devices Connection of the SMDR device to the DX 80 is accomplished through the serial data port on the CPM labeled SMDR Connection to serial printers may require customization of the serial cable used to make the connection Whenever a call accounting system third party device is deployed connection is often no more complicated than using a straight through 9 pin female to male serial cable Use Radio Shack model 26 117B for good results SMDP serial port connector straight Dedicated means that this AC outlet has no other equipment
203. UAL 03 01 F8 Initialize This is a function of PC DBA Programming only and is described in Database Administration Via PC DBA F9 Modem Remote connection to the DX 80 system is possible via modem The optional modem may be purchased allowing remote administration of the DX 80 system database and Maintenance operations The default directory number of the modem is 199 Some working Knowledge of modem operation and connection is useful To establish a modem connection Make sure that the attendant at the site location is aware that a modem connection will be taking place Use of the automated attendant can greatly assist the modem connection process by removing the human element at the site location Press F9 Mdm The following modem control screen is shown MODEM EE l i Connect i Disconnect Use 8 to select Connect then press The following modem control string is displayed l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Input MODEM control string EEN ere pon ade l If your modem requires some different control string input that string now Then press If nothing happens it is likely that the modem is not being addressed by PC DBA Use F10 RS232C to select the COM serial port that is connected to the PC modem Then repeat these steps from
204. When this feature is invoked users may be routed over CO Line groups that they did not necessarily access This feature is useful in high traffic environments when the use of secondary and tertiary CO Line selections may periodically be required When a user accesses a CO Line Group and all of the CO Lines in this group are in use the user is automatically ported over to the defined secondary and then to the defined tertiary CO Line group Special handling of calling is accommodated with Delete Digits and Insert Digits to actuate any CO Line specific call handling required on the secondary and tertiary CO Lines if used with the telephone number dialed Related Features CO Group CO Line Class of Service Related Programming CO Line CO Group CO Line Application Alternate CO Group Operation Dial access or press pre programmed Flexible Feature Button to the primary CO Line group for placing the call If this CO Line Group is unavailable another will be selected according to the Alternate Group programming Conditions a When CO Lines in all groups are busy busy tone will be heard and a busy message will be displayed in the LCD b A user may invoke callback to the first selected CO Line group by pressing the EEst button Default Settings All CO Line Groups are set as follows for Alternate assignments CO Line Application Alternate CO Line Group 1 is set to 0 no alternate CO Line Application Alternate CO Line Group 2
205. abase Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Call Forward Extension Predefined Extension Predefined Call Forwarding will forward calls directly to the associated directory number for the programmed condition Extension Predefined Call Forward affects ringing intercom calls and transferred calls The programmed Extension Predefined Forward is a single step only forward destination No secondary or tertiary steps can be assigned Two destinations may be assigned based on station status Busy and No Answer That is the first step destination may be different for busy calls and calls that go unanswered The condition Wrong Number Destination is provided for routing of calls to directory numbers that are unequipped That is the programmed destination is where calls will be routed when the associated directory number is dialed Related Features Call Forward Extension Extension Call Forwarding Call Forward CO Line Predefined Related Programming Call Handling CO Line Preset Call Forward Conditions a Calls that are forwarded to the DX 80 Voice Mail system via any extension call forward include special handling The extension directory number is sent to the VM s
206. aced on Exclusive Hold The need to press Hold is eliminated except if you want to place a call on System Hold Related Features CO Line Group Exclusive Hold Related Programming Call Handling Hold Reminder Hold Recall Operation Setup 1 Press 94 2 Confirmation tone is heard and the condition is set The display shows 3 The extension is returned to an idle state P7290 IMM 3 24 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Operation Auto Hold enabled 1 While connected to a call intercom or CO Line Press another CO Line button 2 The current connection is placed on hold and then next connection is established Operation Cancel 1 Press 94 2 Confirmation tone is heard and the condition is reset The display shows 3 The extension is returned to an idle state Conditions a The Feature Code 9 4 may be programmed under a flexible button on a Digital Speakerphone To enable disable the feature press the flexible button b Ifyou access an idle line and skip to another line before dialing the first line will not be automatically placed on Hold A line must be connected with an active call either you dialed a number or answered a ringing line c The Automatic Hold feature places a call on Exclusive Hold d If you have the Automatic Hold feature programmed on a feature button the feature button lamp will light when the feature is enabled Default Setting Auto Hold Disabled
207. aced on Hold the steady lamp indication at the other extension s remains steady follows Exclusive Hold functions c Any party who is placed on Hold will hear music only if available through the external music source connection d Calls placed on Exclusive private Hold which have exceeded the Exclusive Hold programmed time and calls recalling from a CO line transfer will be placed on System Hold automatically e There is a distinctive flash rate for a CO line that is on System Hold Default Settings Call Handling Hold Reminder is set at 60 seconds Range is 0 90 seconds 0 disables the Hold Reminder function Call Handling SLT Hold Recall is set at 0 5 minutes Range is 0 5 0 minutes Call Handling EKT Hold Recall is set at 0 5 minutes Range is 0 5 0 minutes Programming Abstract e Program the Hold Reminder Time e Program the Single Line Telephone Hold Recall Time e Program the Digital Extension Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brey pns and 2 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three Eupen below the LCD display to actuate the aeeodiciad operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed P7290 IMM 3 147 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press Ex The DB It
208. active Agent Log Off active or when calls to the member go unanswered UCD Group call handling is greatly enhanced by waiting call provisioning While a caller waits for a UCD Group Member to answer in queue several queued call operations are possible These are No Answer Member advancement Overflow 1 Destination programming Overflow 2 Destination programming Overflow Count programming Reroute Destination programming No Answer Member Advancement each UCD Group has a No Answer Timer This timer can be set to advance a call from one UCD Group Member to the next when the ringing member does not answer the call within the time allotted Overflow 1 Destination each UCD Group has an Overflow 1 Timer and Destination This timer can be set to determine how long the queued call will remain in queue before being routed to the Overflow 1 Destination The Destination can be an extension responsible for handling calls that remain in queue too long or a voice announcement device Recorded Announcement devices can be used to play recorded messages to callers waiting in queue Typically all agents are still busy please continue to hold Overflow 1 Destination can be played one time only For high traffic scenarios a recorded Voice Announcement UCD Group can be used to play the same message to multiple callers Overflow 2 Destination each UCD Group has an Overflow 2 Timer and Destination This timer can be set to determine how long the
209. age expansion The FL3HR is added to the FL 4 above to increase the total message storage time from 1 5 hours to 4 5 hours PC 8 PC based eight port VM with Automated Attendant The PC 8 provides eight channels for automated attendant and voice mail operation The PC 8 is equipped to support up to 100 voice mailboxes and 130 hours of message storage including the various greeting announcements All of the above Voice Processors are connected to the DX 80 Central Processor Module CPM via specific interface socket s See install details for the various devices AAM included in this manual FL 4 and PC 8 included with the unit P7290 IMM 1 3 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Configuration Table Equipment Installed Digital Analog Ports Ports one APM4 included standard adds to KSU1 configuration KSU2 does not come with an APMA4 Maximum configuration using 100 of digital port capacity Maximum configuration using 100 of analog port capacity Key Service Unit The DX 80 Key Service Unit KSU is a modular flat pack design Two KSU s KSU1 and KSU2 may be equipped to achieve the total system capacity of 16 CO lines 56 Extensions 48 digital and 8 analog and 8 Voice Processing Channels KSU1 is factory equipped with one 408M one APM4 and the CPM Central Processor Module KSU2 is factory equipped with one 408E Each KSU is a self contained cabinet with internal power supply The power su
210. age for the mailbox user Operation retrieving messages from your voice mailbox 1 When messages are waiting in your voice mailbox the display will indicate that messages are waiting and advise you of the number of new messages 2 Press the center LCD Interactive button Or dial the voice mail code DA A connection is established and your voice mailbox will prompt you 3 Use the voice mail user guide and audio prompts to retrieve messages and invoke other mailbox operations 4 Hang up to complete the call The DX 80 system will close your voice mailbox P7290 IMM 3 236 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Conditions a When transferring a call to voice mail you may choose to enter no mailbox number Doing so will route the caller to the voice mail main greeting e g Auto Attendant greeting b If no voice mail ports are available at the time you place your call into voice mail you will hear ring back tone until a port is available c Voice mail feature operation is limited only by the ancillary voice mail system d When voice mail ports are used heavily high call traffic messages indications will update notably slower than usual e When VM messages are waiting the Auxiliary Lamp will flash green H The voice mailcode 4 canbe programmed on any available Flexible Feature Button g When the voice mail code is programmed on a Feature Button the associated LED will flash red when VM mess
211. ages are waiting h The voice mail UCD Group directory number usually 433 can be programmed on any available Flexible Feature Button Programming Abstract e Program those analog ports extensions as Port Type VM e Program analog ports 1 8 connected to the ancillary voice mail system into one of the available UCD Groups Members positions UCD Group 24 is usually used for this purpose e Set the Voice Mail Table to reference the UCD Group to be used for the Voice Mail ports e Program the various Voice Mail call handling control digits into the voice mail table The DX 80 allows for specific control handling for various call types For example calls that recall to VM can be handled in a unique manner Note This programming must coincide with the programming of the ancillary voice mail device for the various functions to operate Ancillary voice mail programming is outside the scope of this manual e Setthe Voice Mail Dialing Ratio for suitable DTMF operation If required e To activate Automated Attendant set Answering Position to the UCD Group directory number coinciding with voice mail Usually 433 UCD Group 24 See CO Line Ring Assignment Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brey E and E22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three Buttons below the LCD display to aciuate the Se operation e Enter Database Administration using the fea
212. aintenance operations P7290 IMM 4 32 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Remote Control i EE Direct Memory Mapping Software warm Start Software Cold Start Block Control IO Memory Mapping i The Engineering Maintenance Tools should only be used by trained personnel Attempts to access these tools without knowledge of their use can cause call processing and system malfunctions or resets All risks are assumed by the user ESC to Exit or Any other key to continue DX80 PC DBA y cnt KSU Revision K16UMO F19 Date 01 02 14 i Time 21 03 37 l Engineering Maintenance Too Direct Memory Mapping SEG OFF 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC OD OE OF ASCII Value Input the memory address and offset to view then press Enter Address l Note Memory Address in hexadecimal format XXXX XXXX l P7290 IMM 4 33 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 i Cnt KSU Revision K16UMO F19 Date 01 02 14 Time 21 04 11 l Engineering Maintenance Too Direct Memory Mapping SEG OFF 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 OA OB OC OD OE OF ASCII Value AF34 0100 AO BO 00 B4 00 D1 EO D1 EU 8B FO ZE C4 1E 68 eee eee h AF34 0110 01 26 FF 70 04 FF 76 FC 9A 4D 13 F7 AB BO 00 50 amp p v M
213. aiting Forced Intercom Tone Ring Related Programming Call Handling XFR_l Recall XFR_B Recall Operation unsupervised 1 While connected to a call CO Line or intercom extension a Press us b Dial the destination directory number where this call is to be transferred extension UCD Group Virtual Number etc OR a Press the feature button programmed for the destination directory number 2 Hang up go on hook to complete the transfer Operation supervised 1 While connected to a call CO Line or intercom extension a Press ke b Dial the extension destination directory number where this call is to be transferred OR a Press the feature button programmed for the destination extension number 2 Wait for the called extension to answer the intercom call Announce the transfer 3 Hang up go on hook to complete the transfer Conditions a Transferred CO Line that recall are placed on system hold at the time the recall occurs b When a transferred CO line recalls the line number and extension number where the call was transferred will be displayed c The transferred connection party will hear ring back tone while the call is transfer ringing d CO Line calls and intercom calls may be transferred e Inscreened transfer if the destination extension answers your intercom call in Voice Announce Hands free mode and does not go off hook the transferred connection will transfer ring
214. amming System Application Hour Mode System Application System Time Conditions a When programming time related features 24 hour format is used for input b SMDR output is in 24 hour format regardless of the settings of Hour Mode c Thecorrect system time is entered in database programming along with the Hour Mode Selection from any Digital Soeakerphone extension using the database programming password d The AM and PM indications are not displayed Default Settings System Application Hour Mode is set at 12 seconds Range is 12 24 System Application System Time P7290 IMM 3 154 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming Abstract e Program the appropriate Hour Mode e Reference System Time amp Date for setting system time Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask Pest pho oh and 42 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three burton below the LCD display to aciuate the associated operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press f The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 08 03 then press save This advances to Hour Mode programming e Press chg until the appropriate hour format displays e Press HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press Cas t
215. amming mode P7290 IMM 3 100 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Use 8 to highlight Call Handling Then press Use 8 to highlight DISA Then press Program Ring Time to Answer and or Allowed Extension COS Use 8 to highlight DISA Category 1 Then press Used 8 to highlight the database item that requires change Press until the appropriate value displays When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Program DISA Line COS Service and or Talk Time Used 8 to highlight DISA Category 1 Then press Used 8 to highlight the
216. ance utility and then press Each utility is described below P7290 IMM 4 12 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Configuration When Configuration is selected the DX 80 processor sends the current hardware configuration to PC DBA for viewing For each Board viewed the Type is displayed so that the hardware can be readily identified The Option Board can show three Board Types Option Board Type Description Automated Attendant Module FL VM Flash Voice Mail with Automated Attendant PC 8 8 Port Hard Drive Voice Mail with Automated Attendant Board Status can be any of the following Board Status Description Fail Failed This board is reporting some failure as a result of the last diagnostic test Also this can indicate that CO lines are not connected to a CO port or that Loop Current is no longer present on the CO lines connected The board position is Open not occupied and likely never occupied This board is reporting connected installed and normal status This board has been installed and is now removed Block Unblocked This board port is Blocked Unblocked as part of a Maintenance service function P7290 IMM 4 13 Cnt DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 KSU Revision K16UMO F19 Date 01 02 14 l Time l i Configuration Board Status l l l BOARD TYPE STATUS l l COMMON CTRL BOARD CPM BOARD CONNECT l l OPTION BOARD 8 VOICE MAIL BOARD CONNECT l l
217. andling SLT Hook Flash Reference Single Line Telephone Flash Conditions a Any single line 2500 type telephone equipment can be connected to the system using one of the standard analog ports available on the Analog Port Module APM4 b Analog ports are dedicated to the Extension Directory Numbers system resource These directory numbers can be changed in Database Administration c The allocation of DTMF Receivers required resource to receive dialed digits from analog devices is one to one in the DX 80 system That is the system provides one 1 DTMF receiver per analog port for decoding DTMF signals dialed by analog devices SLT users Speakerphone Digital telephones of the DX 80 system are all equipped with a high quality half duplex speakerphone This feature makes it possible to place hands free conference room style calls from any digital DX 80 telephone Related Features CO Line calling Intercom calling Operation placing a call 1 Press an idle CO Line button or dial an intercom number see Condition c 2 The MES button LED immediately lights and the speakerphone is active 3 Press bied to hang up the call Or lift the handset to convert the call from a hands free speakerphone connection to a private handset connection Operation answering a call 1 While your digital phone is ringing press the ES button 2 The button LED immediately lights and the speakerphone is active
218. ant upon proper operation of that product s features Refer to the information provided with the connected equipment for more information P7290 IMM 3 200 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Single Line Telephone Analog Device Support The DX 80 system basic configuration has four 4 standard analog extension ports available As the system expands additional APM4 s Analog Port Module 4 port can be installed in place of Digital Port Module 8 s DPM8 Analog extension ports are provided for connection of standard two wire analog telephone equipment to the digital network of the DX 80 Common uses of the analog extension ports are facsimile machines modems wireless and wired single line analog telephones Each APM4 provides four dedicated DI MF receivers for decoding the dialed digits from the connected device Each analog port has a dedicated DI MF receiver To place calls the analog device must provide DTMF tone signaling which is decoded by the APM4 for call processing instructions Each analog port provides twenty five 25 cycle frequency ringing for the attached analog device Since each APM4 provides dedicated DTMF receivers and ringing generators and because the system has a non blocking digital ICM bus the Single Line Telephones Analog Devices are not traffic sensitive and do not require special traffic balancing Related Features Single Line Telephone CO Line Flash Related Programming Call H
219. approach to fault identification analysis and correction The DX 80 may generate symptoms of problems that actually occur outside of the office environment Problems such as system restarts from temporary AC power interruption fading from the long distance carrier or dropped calls caused by internal users randomly pressing holding CO Line buttons all are common situations that are not the result of a system component or software failure The System Trouble shooting Section attempts to provide the service technician with some quick and reliable tools to diagnose installation related or service related problem reports Symptom s Diagnostic aid Cause s Action No system operation CPU Heartbeat No AC input 1 Check commercial AC outlet LED Dark 2 Verify that both ends of AC cord are plugged in No LED or LCD operation Power Switch Switch the KSU AC power switch to the ON Digital Executive position Telephones AC Fuse Switch KSU power to the OFF position and remove cover four screws Locate the system power No dialtone at IST supply in the upper left corner of the KSU interior and inspect the AC fuse for continuity DVM required DC Fuse Switch KSU power to the OFF position and remove cover four screws Locate the system power supply in the upper left corner of the KSU interior and inspect the DC fuse for continuity DVM required P7290 IMM 4 1 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Sympt
220. ard destination 3 44 Priority Ringing Line Priority 3 198 Privacy 3 187 Privacy Release 3 187 Private Line 3 188 programming Flexible Feature Buttons 3 134 Pulse to DTMF Conversion 3 190 P RAN DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Recorded Announcement Device 3 191 Recall 3 190 Recorded Announcement Device 3 191 redial saved number 3 198 Regulatory data 1 18 Release Key 3 193 Reminder Tones 3 194 Remote connection to the DX 80 4 10 Remote Programming via PC DBA 3 194 resetting feature keys 3 127 Ringing Level muted ringing 3 197 Ringing Line Priority 3 198 ZS Saved Number Redial 3 198 serial cable installation procedure 2 17 2 18 Signaling Central Office PSTN data 1 18 Signaling internal data 1 19 Single Line Telephone Analog Device Support 3 201 Single Line Telephone CO Line Flash 3 200 Single Line Telephone Flash 3 198 SMDR 3 207 connecting serial cable for 2 18 Speakerphone 3 201 Specifications Current draw 1 14 Electrical data 1 16 Environmental data 1 17 MTBF Mean Time Between Failure data 1 20 Regulatory data 1 18 Signaling Central Office PSTN data 1 18 Signaling internal data 1 19 System criteria and capacity 1 15 Unit component detail 1 17 Wiring data 1 18 Speed Dial 3 202 Station Message Detail Recording 3 207 Super Twist LCD 3 6 System criteria and capacity 1 15 system initialization 2 19 System Reminder alarm clock 3
221. arty will hear a burst of conference tone when the Conference Tone is enabled h The Unsupervised Conference feature code 7 7 may be programmed on any available programmable feature button i Only the Controller of an Unsupervised Conference may rejoin an Unsupervised Conference j Conference can only be established at a Digital Speakerphone Default Settings Call Handling CO Line Conference 3 CO Lines Range is None 2 3 Call Handling Unsupervised Talk Time 0 unlimited Range is 0 120 in 10 minute increments Call Handling Conference Tone Y Range is Y N CO Line Call Abandon Y Range is Y N Programming Abstract e Program the maximum CO Lines that may be in a conference none 2 or 3 e Program the time allowed for Unsupervised Conferences CO Line to CO Line e Program the Conference Tone for Yes or No operation Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note psk Peet Brow Er EEEF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the SEET operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays Program the maximum number of CO Lines that may be in a conference 03 01 e Input 03 01 e Press E1 until the appropriate value displa
222. ase Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure CO Line Ring Assignment Answer Position Ring Assignments determine the extensions and other system resources that will be designated to ring on each CO Line Ringing assignments may be to UCD Groups Virtual Numbers or to Extensions Each CO Line has six assignments for ringing in the Day mode one assignment for ringing in the Evening mode and one assignment for No Answer Predefined Call Forward Related Features CO Line Signaling Call Forward Predefined Do Not Disturb Auxiliary Lamp Call Forward Station Related Programming System Application Time Switching Extension Receive Assignment CO Line Answering Position Call Handling Predefined Forward Time Conditions Ringing more than six extensions is accomplished by assigning ringing to a UCD Group then assigning the appropriate extensions into that UCD Group and setting the UCD Group Hunting Method at All Ring P7290 IMM 3 7 3 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Default Settings All CO Lines are assigned to ring at extension 101 default attendant position in the Day and Evening modes of operation No Predefined Call Forward destina
223. atabase item Inquiry Code displays option to hear a general announcement company hours directions to the office etc The code may be any dial pad single digit from 0 9 or Note The system will not allow any digit to be assigned to more than one function Therefore the Waiting Code and DISA Codes must be considered when changing the Inquiry Code e Enter the new Inquiry Code digit and press E to store e Press F The next database item DISA Code displays any DX 80 system resource e g extensions CO lines etc The code may be any dial pad single digit from 0 9 or Note The system will not allow any digit to be assigned to more than one function Therefore the Waiting Code and Inquiry Codes must be considered when changing the DISA Code e Enter the new DISA Code digit and press E to store e Press The next database item Answer Position displays e To change the Answer Position press Pio Since Answering Positions may be assigned as unique destinations per Tenant Group the system requires this input now e Enter the tenant group for which programming changes are to be made 1 3 usually 1 then press BF The current Day Mode Answer Position for the selected tenant group displays e Enter the appropriate DX 80 system directory number extension UCD group Virtual Number where callers should be routed when they cannot be routed automatically e Press pave P7290 IM
224. ated DX 80 cable can be used to aid in this requirement PN 724PR es E 12 Route ancillary device cabling through the appropriate KSU1 opening and terminate as required music source printer computer for SMDR external paging equipment etc 13 Cross connect the CO lines and extension ports to extension cables on the corresponding punch down terminal block 14 Install the terminal instruments and any optional terminal equipment such as headsets or single line telephones 15 Move the Cold Start Normal RAM memory battery backup strap from the Cold Start position to the Normal position This critical step is detailed in the Power Up Initialization topic at the end of this chapter 16 Plug the AC power cord into the dedicated AC outlet or UPS if system battery backup support is required and power up the DX 80 system by operating the AC power switch to the ON position 17 Observe the power peripheral processor heartbeat LED for flashing status after 10 20 seconds This indicates that the main peripheral board is active and that its processor is running During the first power up sequence Cold Start strap moved to Normal position default data is loaded which can take as long as 2 minutes The main processor LED located on the Central Processor Module may be monitored during the boot up stage to determine when the system is operational A series of flash rates occur during this process When default is successf
225. ated operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 01 101 156 21 then press al This advances to the Extension Port Type programming screen for the extension selected e Press EF until the appropriate Port Type displays e Press AD to go to the select another extension screen P7290 IMM 3 192 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Input the extension number to change then press Pro e Press until the Port Type screen displays e Press r until the appropriate Port Type displays Press al program to return to the DB Item Select screen and input 01 101 156 21 for the next extension to Repeat the above steps for all extensions to be programmed as Port Type V A Press MECO to return to the previous menu level or press MC to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Used 8 to highlight Extension and then pres
226. ating life of the equipment From UL 1459 a product safety specification governing telephone equipment Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm Never install telephone jacks in wet locations unless the jack is specifically designed for wet locations Never touch non insulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has been disconnected at the network s interface Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines Tools and Supplies Assemble the correct supplies and tools to install the Comdial DX 80 as it is intended Use UTP Unshielded Twisted Pair three or four pair recommended cable to run from the MDF Main Distribution Frame to all extension terminals speakerphones DSS Consoles and analog devices Digital terminals only need one twisted pair to operate Additional pairs are always recommended to allow for future potential uses P7290 IMM 2 2 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Six conductor modular jack assemblies for all station instruments recommended e Standard punch down terminal block s 66M1 50 type as required e Four or six conductor crimping modular plug assemblies for each port interface Or a better choice is to use DX 80 PN RJ11 4P cables to extend DX 80 ports to the MDF e AC voltage surge spike protector e Standard telephone hand tools and mounting hardware for the KSU s MDF backboard punch down terminal block s modular jack as
227. be applied The optional Voice Processors that can be added to the DX 80 are fixed system resources that do not require peripheral device ports analog or digital This significant advantage means that the DX 80 VP options can be added to any DX 80 configuration without port loss Most P7290 IMM 1 2 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 communications products interface voice processors of some sort but suffer the ill effects of reducing the overall capacity of the system when the voice processor is connected Because the DX 80 doesn t use conventional peripheral ports to interface the VPs we refer to the VP connectivity in terms of channels AAM Automated Attendant Module The AAM provides four channels for automated attendant operation only The AAM is then capable of handling four calls simultaneously Callers answered by the AAM are greeted by one of four 4 greetings associated to the DX 80 mode of operation Day Evening Alternate Temporary Various other announcements are also included for caller processing see Automated Attendant in the Features section of this manual for more details FL 4 Flash based four port VM with Automated Attendant The FL 4 provides four channels for automated attendant and voice mail operation The FL 4 is equipped to support up to 100 voice mailboxes and 1 5 hours of message storage including the various greeting announcements FL3HR Flash based three hour message stor
228. be erased if a Send All operation is performed using an outdated PC DBA database F5 Connect Connecting to the DX 80 processor e Once a physical connection cable or modem has been made between the PC and the DX 80 system You must link the two devices using the F5 Connect function e Press F5 If an adequate connection exists between the DX 80 system and the PC you will see the following Connect prompt P7290 IMM 3 93 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 1 Receive Data From KSU 2 Don t Receive Data From KSU Please Select l Note To select 1 will receive Numbering Plan Ext DIR No CO Group DIR No User Password from KSU automatically so these data you set previously on PC will be lost To select 2 the data about DIR No User Password on l PC may be inconsistent with KSU e Select 1 to receive the database items listed at the time of connection e Select 2 to connect to the system processor without an automatic data receive operation e Once you make your selection you will be prompted to input the Database Administration Password At default this password is 8 spaces Press the space bar eight times l Please Input KSU Password l e When all eight characters are input the connection process is begun If unsuccessful wrong password or poor connection the following error screen will appear EES l Connect l EE Failure l Pr
229. be programmed e Repeat the programming process for all CO Lines and destinations for the mode Day Evening e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure CO Line Ring Type Assignment The DX 80 system provides eight types of ringing for indication of specific CO Line ringing Any CO Line may be allocated one of the available Ring Types When this feature is used the specific ring type assigned to the CO Line is the ring type heard when that CO Line rings This feature is helpful when CO Lines are arranged into groups for specific call handling The Ring Type indication helps to identify the CO Line and the group to which
230. be programmed displays e Press 2 until the proper setting Y N displays for each of the Paging Groups This setting determines if the ternal Pager will be connected for page announcements whenever the selected Page Group is dialed 5 to return to the DB Item Selection e Press WEAN to return to the previous menu level or press screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Program extensions into Paging Groups e Used tohighlight Extension and then press e Used EB tohighlight Category 1 and then press e Use d 8 Y to highlight Paging Group for the extension e Press until the appropriate Paging Group displays for this extension e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will
231. be stored e Press The cursor moves to the next input position allowing entry of the next CO Line Directory Number The previous entry remains displayed e Continue inputting CO Line directory numbers for those CO Lines where the copy data should be stored pressing after each input directory number e When all CO Lines to be copied with the copy data have been input press the ESC escape At this time it is possible to input another Source CO Line directory number and continue the process for another CO Line s Copy CO Line s via Group many at a time programming method e Used 8 tohighlight Group Then press The cursor is immediately positioned on the Source CO Line Directory number input e Input the CO Line directory number of the CO Line that has been programmed for copying to other CO Lines e Press The cursor immediately moves to the Destination Directory number input area e Input the CO Line Group directory number 9 800 806 where the copy data should be stored e Press The cursor moves to the next input position allowing entry of the next CO Line Group directory number The previous entry remains displayed e Continue inputting CO Line Group directory numbers for those CO Lines where the copy data should be stored pressing after each input directory number P7290 IMM 3 70 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e When all CO Lines to be copied with the copy data have been in
232. be viewed The first screen in view is the Name screen which displays the name received for this call Press FSF to view the next screens Number screen Time and Date screen The screen sequences are shown below 6 Press to delete a logged call 7 Press 124 to dial a logged call Conditions a You can at any time exit the Caller ID Call Table mode b Any Digital Soeakerphone user can review the Caller ID Table if the Attendant Password is known but the table can be reviewed by only one telephone at a time c Ifno name is delivered from the telephone company the number only will be displayed d Proper programming of local area code s and long distance prefix are required to assure accurate redial of CID numbers from the Caller ID Table Default Settings Call Handling CID Programming Code International Prefix Null Range is any 4 digits Call Handling CID Programming Code Country Code Null Range is any four digits Call Handling CID Programming Code Long Distance Prefix Null Empty Call Handling CID Programming Code Local Area Code Area Code eight tables are set at Null Empty Call Handling CID Programming Code Local Area Code Area Prefix eight tables are set at Null Empty Programming Abstract e Program the International Prefix typically not required in the USA or Canada e Program the Country Code typically not required in th
233. between Name received and Number received An example follows 2 Press the Left Interactive button to view the telephone number 3 Press the Left Interactive button to return to the name display Conditions a CID data will only be displayed when it is received from the telephone company as part of the service subscription b The center interactive button can be used while active on a CO line call to momentarily view the idle extension display information time amp date etc Caller Identification Table Callback 6 Caller Identification information for one hundred 100 calls is stored in a Call Table While reviewing the calls you will have the option to dial the number obtain more information for the particular call and delete the call Related Features Caller ID Extension Password Attendant SMDR Call Output P7290 IMM 3 51 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Related Programming Call Handling CID Programming Code System Resource CID Name Table Assignment CID Name Table Programming Operation 1 While in an idle condition not involved in any calling press the CID Table code I 6 Youare prompted to enter a password Input the attendant extension password Press 2 s The display shows 4 Usethe up and down to go through the Caller ID Table Up reviews the list from the most recent Down reviews the list from the oldest recorded 5 Each logged call has three screens that may
234. by the customer service department to do so Event tracking can be started by a specified system operation and programmed to end output of processed data by a specific system operation or never to end until manually forced to discontinue To start event tracking use Event Invoking and select one of the available system operations that will cause event data output to begin Do not select Pseudo to begin event tracking This operation is a non occurring event intended for use with End Event when the event output should not end by a system operation P7290 IMM 4 30 P7290 IMM DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 i Event i y A eas Event Invoking Event Deleting i Maintenance EE a a et Pseudo Event Selection Extension EE l CO Line i Modem Status e Timing VAA A O A AA A to start event output Maintenance paros eS l EE Feature Key i Event Selection DSS Key EE Dial Key Pad i Special Key i Function Key Code EE Ring Status a ign amen sn las on a Timeout i A NE E es ee gg tage ne Feature Key selected to start event Feature Key 1 Feature Key 17 output Then a specific key is Feature Key 2 Feature Key 18 selected to
235. call to the attendant extension c You cannot activate Forced Intercom Call Forward if another Call Forward mode is already enabled Forced Intercom Tone Ring In certain conditions a Voice Announce call may not be heard at the receiving extension Usually background noise is high or the speaker volume setting has been minimized for a prior call Forced Intercom Tone Ringing allows the intercom call initiator to cause the called telephone to ring After a Voice Announce connection has been established to an extension you may change the alert signal at the called extension from Voice Announce to Tone Ring Related Features Intercom Mode Selection Intercom Non Blocking Operation 1 Establish an intercom call to an extension in Voice Announce mode Hands free or Private Your telephone will display P7290 IMM 3 141 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 2 Press to change the alert signal at the called extension from Voice Announce to Tone Ringing Your telephone will display 3 A Tone Ringing alert signal is sent and continues at the called extension until answered 4 If your call remains unanswered you may dial T again to return to Voice Call Announce mode Conditions a Itis not possible to force an extension from Tone Ring mode to Voice Announce mode if Tone Ring is the mode they have selected b Ifyou want to leave a Callback request at a called extension that doesn t answer the alert signal must be
236. ccessive depressions of the 1 dial pad key Use the following table to determine what letter scheme best suits this installation Related Features Extension User Names UCD Names CO Line Names Alphanumeric Display Pre Programmed Messages Related Programming System Resource CO Line Names System Resource User Name System Resource Preprogrammed Message Extension Application Uniformed Call Distribution Name Operation Refer to the specific Name Feature to be programmed Conditions Only one Letter Scheme can be active at one time Default Settings System Application Letter Type is set to 0 Range is 0 7 Programming Abstract Program the Letter Type for the special character set available via numeral 1 dial pad digit key for Name in Display Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note psk Peet Brow Er EEEF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to actuate the associated operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 08 02 then press Saul This advances to the LETTER TYPEprogramming screen e Press until the value for this data item displays e Press HOLD button to exit DISA programming and return to the previous
237. ce Hold are subject to the Hold Abandon feature b Certain Central Offices do not provide loop supervision these line should be marked Call Abandon N c At default Call abandon is enabled for all CO lines d Ifthe outside held party disconnects the system will automatically release the held CO line e The CO line must have the loop supervision interrupt signal from the local carrier for Hold Abandon to function P7290 IMM 3 145 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Default Settings Call Handling Category 1 Hold Abandon Time is set to 600 Range is 50 1000 milliseconds Programming Abstract Program the required Hold Abandon Time Program CO Lines for Call Abandon see CO Line Loop Supervision Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note peck pesi Brau fey foe and 42 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the associated operation Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed Press EY The DB Item Select screen displays Input 03 42 then press gt This advances to Hold Abandon programming Input the Hold Abandon Time to detect 50 1000ms and then press Saal The new time is stored Press AE to return to the previous menu level or press MM to return to the DB Item S
238. ce and when the power is turned back on the DX 80 system configures itself for the addition of the detected DX 80 Voice system Some of the capabilities that the DX 80 Voice adds are e Automated Attendant supported e Extension unique voice mailboxes 100 mailboxes in the basic package e Call Forward to extension voice mailboxes e All call handling conditions supported e Answering Machine Emulation supported e UCD Overflow Queue Announcements supported e Menu Routing supported e Voice Record supported e Automatic Voice Record supported e Specific CO Line Greetings on Automated Attendant supported e FAX Tone detect supported an all calls answered by the auto attendant Related Features CO Line Ringing Modes Voice Call Recorder Auto Record DISA Call Forward CO Line Predefined Messaging Voice Call Forward Extension Predefined Call Forward Recorded Announcement Devices via Voice Mail Universal Call Distribution Groups Automated Attendant usually part of the voice mail system Related Programming Extension Port Type Extension Record Allow Predefined FWD CO Line Answering Position Predefined FWD Call handling VM Dialing Ratio VM Monitor Time VM Reserve Port DISA Extension Application Voice Mail Table Extension Application UCD Group Operation calling into your voice mailbox 1 While the telephone is idle press the Voice Mail button Cir Or press 64
239. ching schedule The optional AAM must be installed for automated attendant to function Default Setting No CO Lines are set for automated attendant operation The Answer Position is set to Extension 101 for DAY ALT and EVE modes Ring Time to Answer is set at 0 seconds No Answer Time is set at 20 seconds Drop No digits Dialed is set to No XFR Mode set to RBT Ring Back Tone Waiting Code set to Inquiry Code set to DISA Code set to ER Programming Abstract Set the system time and date to the correct local time and date For Time mode operation Program the CO lines to be answered by the automated attendant and for the service modes that they should be answered Program the various timers and settings See default list Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note Ei EL and are interactive LCD button operations Use the back pest phowj pha pe three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the associated operation Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password HHH HH ZZ F Note This eight character password can be changed Press EY The DB Item Select screen displays Input 03 43 to program the Automated Attendant Press Fans Press EY The first Auto Attendant database item Ring Time To Answer displays P7290 IMM 3 19 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01
240. complete a call transfer rather than going back on hook It can also be used to force the telephone into an idle mode regardless of the condition of the hook switch Related Features Flexible Feature Button Programming P7290 IMM 3 193 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Operation Setup Program the feature button for Release Key operation 1 While the telephone is idle press 3 2 Press the Flexible Feature Button that is to be used as the Release Key 4 Press cl 5 Input the feature code prefaced withthe button 5 2 Then press pave 6 Exit the Flexible Feature Button programming mode Conditions a The Release Key must be programmed onto an available Feature Button to operate b The Release Key operation will disconnect calls in progress Default Setting No Release Key is programmed on the telephone Flexible Feature Buttons Reminder Tones A specific interruption in intercom dial tone is provided to remind a user that a call processing affecting feature has been invoked Whenever Do Not Disturb or Call Forward is enabled at your extension will hear this reminder tone when you access intercom dial tone The distinction of Reminder Tone is a fast repeated interruption of intercom dial tone This tone is frequently referred to as stutter dial tone When you lift the handset or press the LES button to active speakerphone or headset mode Stutter dial tone indicates that Call Forward or Do N
241. connected for 230vac applications Since the power supply is linear in design the output voltage varies between 21 6vdc and 32vdc depending on load and stability of the input voltage The output voltage is delivered to the 408M in KSU1 408E in KSU2 for voltage regulation All system operation and logic voltages are produced at the 408M E Two fuses are equipped on the power supply board one for ac input over voltage protection and one for DC output over current protection A main power switch is accessible when the KSU cover is in place In the event battery backup operation is desired the KSU power cord can be connected to a external ancillary UPS Un interruptible Power Supply It is the responsibility of the installer to match the battery requirements UPS requirement to the specific needs of the equipment owner To determine the battery requirement needs and UPS requirement use the chart in Specifications this section to find the current draw and necessary Amp Hour back up support that the battery UPS is to supply P7290 IMM 1 5 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 CPM Central Processor Module The CPM module is equipped standard in KSU1 This board contains all circuitry required to control the fully equipped DX 80 All digital voice switching and call processing data switching is accomplished via the CPM The CPM has one ribbon cable connector for connection to the KSU1 408M and five 5 connector sockets for connection
242. cords output from the SMDR port The two I records are one incoming call record received with caller ID 0 d S 3 4 5 6 7 12345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890 D EXT TRK DGT_ DIALED RING DATE TIME DURATION ACCOUNT XXX XXX XXXX XXXX MM SS XX XX HH MM SS HH MM SS XXXXXXXX o 101 741 3035551212 00 00 01 01 01 05 52 00 00 35 1 103 740 4802224545 00 13 01 01 01 07 51 00 00 39 I 103 740 JOHNSON LARRY 00 13 01 01 01 07 51 00 00 39 O 101 741 3035551212 00 00 01 01 01 13 52 00 00 15 12345678 Data Field D Call Direction I Incoming O Outgoing EXT Extension number Incoming DISA CO line number Incoming ECF CO line number TRK CO line number 2 digits with prefix 0 DGT_ DIALED Telephone number outgoing call only maximum 16 digits left aligned RING CO Line incoming ringing duration before answer Incoming call only MM minute SS second DATE Day Month DD MM TIME Start time of call connection MM minute HH hour SS second DURATION Conversation time MM minute HH hour SS second ACCOUNT Account code entered for billing purposes maximum 8 digits left aligned A carriage return CR is generated after each record output Default Settings Extension SMDR Output is set to Y yes Range is Y N Call Handling SMDR Call Output Outgoing Call is set to Y Range is Y N Call Handling SMDR Call Output Incoming Call is set to
243. creen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Touch Tone On Off I 1 Touch Tone On Off can be used to customize a users telephone tactile response of dial pad key operation At default factory setting Touch Tone is ON While ON anytime the dial pad button keys are pressed the telephone will emit a subtle beep tone as an assurance that this button operation was successful Since this confirmation may not always be necessary the tone can be turned off P7290 IMM 3 219 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Related Features All features accessed using the Dial Pad Operation setup 1 While the telephone is idle press 1 2 The current mode is toggle to the opposite setting 3
244. ction method can be used while off site Connecting to the DX 80 processor e Once a physical connection cable or modem has been made between the PC and the DX 80 system You must link the two devices using the F5 Connect function See the details below e When a successful connection has been established between the DX 80 processor and the PC PC DBA software the following icon displays in the upper left corner of the PC DBA screen Cnt Sending data e Since PC DBA programming edits the data files of the DX 80 in the PC working directory only it is necessary to send this information from the working directoryto the DX 80 system memory e Press F4 The options for what data to Send are displayed EE Send Request Spee See setae tare Send All Send Part Send Item EE e Used 8 to select from list which send technique you desire When Send All is selected the data exchange is started immediately When Send Part or Send Item is selected you must chose either the specific data item Item or data category Part you wish to send Used to select from the menus provided with these two functions Note We recommend that whenever database changes are made to a system that has been in operation for some extended period of time a Receive All operation should be performed prior to any database changes Since some database fields including Speed Dial and Service Mode are user adjustable these fields might
245. current setting displays Available options are ALWAYS NEVER DAY and EVE Press bet The system prompts for the next CO line to be programmed automated attendant answering You may continue programming other CO lines for automated attendant use or exit the programming mode Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing The program title page displays Press any key at the program title page to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the Main Menu The PC DBA menu is then shown Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Use 8 to highlight Call Handling and then press The cursor is now positioned on the database item Call Handling Category 1 Use 8 to highlight Automated Attendant then press The cursor is now positioned on the database item AAT Category 1 Press to select this Category or move the cursor to the appropriate data Category for changes to be made Press to select the specific data item to be changed The following data items have fixed values that are scrolled each time the button is pressed e Category 1 No Answer Time Drop No Dial XFR Mode e Category 2 Auto Attendant Line Service P7290 IMM 3 21 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e All other Automated Attendant database items require input from the keyboa
246. d to highlight VM Monitor Time and then press until the appropriate play time is reached e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu P7290 IMM 3 8 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Attendant Administration Admin I Q Attendant Administration Admin is used to set or modify the features Service Mode Day Alt Eve Time Auto Attendant Messages optional Auto Attendant Module required Temporary Mode System Speed Dial and FWD AUXI LAMP Attendant Administration Admin can be performed at any user extension but the assigned Attendant Extension user s password is required
247. d DSS Console Owner press E13 change e Enter the extension number to be assigned as the DSS Console Owner Note Only valid equipment installed extension directory numbers can be assigned as DSS Console Owners e Press baal e Press The current directory of the DSS Console is display NULL if empty e Press E3 to enter the new DSS Console directory number the extension number of the digital port to which the DSS Console is connected e Press pave e Press The display prompts you for the next DSS Console to program Valid entries are 1 12 e Enter the number of the next DSS Console to program or press the programming menu for other programming requirements Or press the programming mode EE button to return to the previous Seed button twice to exit Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing The program title page displays e Press any key at the program title page to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the Main Menu The PC DBA menu is then shown e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Program DSS Console Owner Port e Used EB tohighlight System Resource and then press e The cursor is now positioned on the database item Attendant e Used 8 tohighlight the database item DSS Allocation The cursor is positi
248. d No Answer e Input 01 101 156 29 for the extension number to program the appropriate extension Wrong Destination Or e Input 01 101 156 30 for the extension number to program the appropriate extension Busy Destination Or e Input 01 101 156 31 for the extension number to program the appropriate extension No Ans Destination e Press 2 This advances to the selected extension Predefined Forward database item e Press to change the value of this data item e Input the appropriate destination this may be an extension number or UCD Hunt Group number e Press 2 84 J e Press Mi up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen Or e Use EE or 1 to go to the appropriate database item for change Program the Predefined Forward Time as required e Press i D up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen e Input 03 39 to program the system Predefined No Answer Call Forward Time e Press This advances to the Predefined FWD Time database item e Press 2 until the appropriate value displays e Continue making other database changes or exit programming mode when changes are complete Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the
249. d and the system will reboot with default database programming 7 If this does not clear the trouble replace KSU1 and follow the Power Up and Initialization procedure Symptom s Diagnostic aid Cause s Action Telephone Terminal CPU Heartbeat Shorted station At the KSU power the system down and remove the apparatus dead LED flashing cabling power cord from the AC outlet Remove the KSU and cover four screws Disconnect all station wiring on 408M 408E DPM the affected 408M 408E or DPM8 and connect one 8 module known good DET directly to one of the interface Heartbeat ports Replace the KSU cover and retest with this flashing but one phone If this telephone works OK follow the above or more digital procedures to test each interface port If any port is telephones are found bad replace the module If no port is found not functioning bad replace the wiring cabling P7290 IMM 4 2 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Bad telephone If the above test yields all working ports and no cabling errors test each connected telephone one at a time until the bad telephone is discovered Replace the telephone Digital telephones use only one twisted cable pair for power data control and voice communications There are no fuses for station interface protection Instead a current sensing Polly switch limits excessive current going to each terminal connection Ifa station cable pair is shorted or a telephone s DC power supply
250. d on CO lines The assignment of COS Class Of Service may be used for a broader range of call control than simple Toll Restriction implies If a digit or range of digits dialed on a CO line is inconsistent with the dialing extension s COS or CO Line COS the call is denied This calling COS criteria can be applied to local calls long distance calls and specific numbers that are considered allowed in areas where other numbers may be restricted P7290 IMM 3 214 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 The DX 80 provides a Toll Restriction table of 100 entries Each entry may contain 10 digits in the From column and 10 digits in the To column The From and To columns exist to apply a range of digits in a truth table fashion known as digit Intervals Extension COS and CO Line COS is then designated per table entry as Y N E g does this table entry apply to this COS Yes or No Extension and CO Line COS assignments for each table entry are provided under the two conditions Day and Evening mode This allows each table entry to be assigned to each COS for CO Lines and extensions differently for these modes of system operation A table entry may be as simple as From 0 To 0 The result of this truth table is that calls associated to this COS are monitored for only the first digit dialed If that digit is O the call is allowed and no further restriction monitoring takes place A table entry of From 18134
251. d on hold b Ifthe person on Hold hangs up the system will automatically release the held CO line Hot Key Enable Disable Hot Key is the automatic operation of dial pad keys while the telephone is idle That is if while idle you press a dial padkey 1 2 3 45 6789 UI that button operation is processed as the first command of others that will follow like the remainder of and extension number Certain applications may prefer this automatic operation be eliminated Therefore Hot Key Dial Pad can be disabled P7290 IMM 3 150 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Related Features Intercom calling All dial access features Operation disable While the telephone is idle press 6 The display will momentarily show the feature status invoked Operation enable While the telephone is idle press 6 The display will momentarily show the feature status invoked Default Setting Hot Key is enabled Hotel Mode Alarm Clock Extension 9 2 Room Status 7 Hotel Mode can be enabled in the system programming This feature allows the system attendant to administer certain system extension features to emulate hotel operations The system attendant can Set extension wakeup calls via the Alarm Clock Extension feature Set extension status to Checked IN Checked OUT and Clean such that the associated LED of DSS BLF buttons for the extension indicate the current status In Checked
252. d then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays Program Pulse Dialing Break Time e Input 03 05 then press This advances to Dialing Ratio e Press EY This advances to Break Time e Press to select the appropriate break time ratio 60 67 e Press bezilt advance to pulse dialing Inter Digit Time e Press to select the Pulse Dialing Inter Digit Time e Press to advance to Tone Time e Press 2 to select the appropriate DTMF Tone Time this time is also used for DTMF inter digit timing e Press HOD to return to the previous menu level or press Cas to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used EB tohighlight Call Handling and then press e Used e tohighlight Category 2 and then press e Used 8 tohighlight Break Time Inter Digit or Tone Time e Press until the appropriate value displays e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming s
253. displays Input 02 740 755 12 then press baue This advances to the Privacy Release programming for the CO Line selected Press 3 until the appropriate setting displays Press MLS to return to the previous menu level or press EE to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Use 8 to highlight CO Line and then press Use 8 to highlight Category 2 and then press Used e to highlight Privacy Release for the CO Line to be changed Press until the appropriate setting displays Continue making other programming changes as required When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to contin
254. e Category 2 CO Ring Type is set to 0 for all CO Lines Range is 0 8 Programming Abstract Program the CO Line s for the CO Ring Type Type 0 indicates this CO Line has no distinctive ringing assignment and will follow the ringing Type of the Extension s that ring for this CO Line Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brau he and ps are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to actuate the See operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 02 740 755 11 then press E This advances to the CO RING TYPE programming screen for the CO Line selected CO Line 1 740 CO Line 16 755 e Press 2 until the appropriate value for this data item displays e Press LD to return to the previous menu level or press lt 5 to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing P7290 IMM 3 105 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA fro
255. e this code can be programmed onto an available Flexible Feature Button See Loud Bell Control in the features description section of this manual Connecting a Serial Cable for PC DBA PC DBA PC Database Administration can be connected the to DX 80 system for use to set all user database programable features and system operations See Database Administration via PC DBA This connection is rarely permanent and is typically performed only during routine systems database updates and changes by a qualified technician Connection of the PC to the DX 80 is accomplished through the serial data port on the CPM labeled PCDBA Connection is simplified by means of a straight through 9 pin female to male serial cable Use Radio Shack model 26 117B for good results Connection to the PC is made via an available 9 pin serial port connector that is designated as COM1 or COM2 in the PC configuration Once the cable is linked between the PC and the DX 80 CPM PCDBA port PC DBA can be used to program the DX 80 system and backup the user database Serial Cable Installation Procedure Follow these steps to connect a serial cable for PC DBA 1 Remove the KSU cover four screws at each corner of KSU1 2 Connect grounded wrist strap to a suitable earth ground If a grounded wrist strap is not available bleed any static charge from your body before touching circuit modules by touching the gold painted surface of the inside of the KS
256. e 1 is extension ports 1 14 Extensions 101 114 e Usethe and Y buttons on the PC keyboard to select the page for the extension s to be programmed e Used 8 tohighlight the CO Line Assignment for the Extension CO Lines are listed along the top of the display Extensions are listed along the left side of the display e Press until the appropriate value displays e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged P7290 IMM 3 60 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure CO Line Calling amp l Use Indication CO Line calling is the place
257. e DB Item Select screen or exit programming Program Warning Time e Input 03 09 01 for Warning Time Outgoing e Input 03 09 02 for Warning Time Incoming e Press 2 until the appropriate time displays e Press MLS to return to the previous menu level or press ais to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Program extensions for the appropriate Call Limiter e Used to highlight Extension Then press e Used tohighlight Category 2 Then press e Use amp to highlight Warning Tone or Drop Call Out or Drop Call In for the extension to be changed e Press until the appropriate value displays e Continue programming other extensions as required e When all changes are complete press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y
258. e DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Flexible Feature Button Inquiry KZ 3 You may review the programming for flexible feature buttons at an idle Digital Speakerphone In order to review the programming you must dial the Flexible Button Programming mode Related Features Flexible Feature Button Programming Feature Look up Related Programming PC DBA Extension Application Feature Key Copy DSS Copy Conditions a Buttons without feature programming will display AVAILABLE KEY b Refer to the digital soeakerphone button maps in the Overview Configuration section of this manual for default button assignments Operation 1 Press 3 Thedisplay will show 2 Press the Flexible Feature Button to view its contents code For example press button 1 lower left 3 Press show The name designation of the feature directory number displays 4 Continue checking other buttons for their programmed content or lift replace handset to exit Flexible Feature Button Inquiry Flexible Feature Button Programming I 3 Digital Soeakerphones have thirty 30 dual colored Flexible Programmable Feature Buttons All system feature codes 30 max may be stored on available Feature Buttons for one button operation Certain programmed feature P7290 IMM 3 134 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01
259. e DX 80 will not allow all UCD Group Members to Log Off simultaneously Related Features Uniform Call Distribution Flexible Feature Button Programming Operation 1 While idle the UCD Group Agent presses 9 1 2 The display will momentarily indicate the new Agent Status Log On or Log Off 3 Press 9 1 again to toggle the setting of this Agent mode P7290 IMM 3 228 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Conditions If a Flexible Feature Button is programmed as the Agent Log Off On button the LED associated to the button will light steady red to indicate the Log Off condition is set UCD Overflow amp Reroute UCD Overflow and UCD Reroute are directly related to Uniform Call Distribution The DX 80 system allows for flexible handling of callers waiting in UCD queue waiting to be answered by an UCD Group Agent UCD Overflow can be applied in two ways First it can be a simple UCD external destination where callers in queue are routed following some predetermined time The second more comprehensive application is to utilize Overflow Destinations in association with the optional built in voice mail module or ancillary third party recorded announcement device In the first simplest application callers waiting in queue are routed to another DX 80 extension In this mode of operation the caller is immediately removed from the UCD Agent Queue and delivered to the Overflow Destination for handling Other callers in UCD Qu
260. e Intrusion tone should not be heard at the intruded extension when another extension has intrusion joined the conversation in progress LEGAL NOTICE This feature may violate privacy laws if used in a manner that is inconsistent with requirements of these laws Manufacturer assumes no responsibility with regard to the use of this feature It is provided for the virtue of ethical use only YOU are responsible for using this feature appropriately considering all applicable laws Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brea pns and 2 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the associated operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 01 101 156 11 to program Intrusion Active where 101 156 the extension number to program e Press This advances to the Extension xxx Intrusion Active database item e Press r until the appropriate setting displays e Press the to select the next data item to be changed Intrusion Accept Intrusion Tone e Press r until the appropriate setting displays e Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode P7290 IMM 3 159 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENA
261. e ON OFF button twice Or lift and replace the handset in the hook switch cradle Change Database Administration Password Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Default password Note is the equivalent of entering a space so the default password is 8 characters Press EY The DB Item Select screen displays Notes 1 All database programming items are indexed for fast access 2 Use the MES up or down to return to the DB Item Select Input 04 01 Then press This advances to the System Resources DB PSWD screen The current password displays default is all spaces blanks Input the new eight character alohanumeric password using the table below as a guide to characters Press Fans Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode P7290 IMM 3 97 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Default Set 69 When an extension user has invoked several features on his or her extension it may be necessary to clear all settings and return the telephone set to the factory condition The Default Set code is used to perform this operation Operation 1 Press 69 The display shows the following screen to confirm the intention 2 Press to invoke the operation Confirmation tone is heard and the operation is complete Conditions The following extension parameters are reset to the value shown
262. e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged P7290 IMM 3 104 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Distinctive Ringing CO Line Distinctive Ringing CO Line provides a means for denoting one CO Line from another while ringing The distinction provided is a tone allocation used to denote one CO Line from another Eight 8 choices are available for CO Line ringing Related Features CO Line Answering Position Transfer Distinctive Ringing Extension Related Programming System Application Operator Code Default Settings CO Line Ring Type 0 Range is 0 9 Conditions a CO Line Distinctive Ringing overrides an extensions setting of Distinctive Ringing b ACO Line set as Ring Type 0 has no specific ring type and follows Distinctive Ringing Extension settings Default Settings CO Lin
263. e USA or Canada e Program the Long Distance Prefix usually 1 e Program the Local Area Codes and enter them as the prefix to dial if it is required for callback P7290 IMM 3 52 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note ask pest Brau En and 2 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the soca d operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays Program CID codes required for seamless CID callback operations in the DX 80 e Input 03 25 to program the International Prefix e Input 03 26 to program the Country Code e Input 03 27 to program the Long Distance Prefix e Input 03 28 to program the Local Area Code Tables e Press 284 This advances to the selected database item e Press EP to view the contents of this database item e Press 3 change the contents of this database item e Input the actual code required for the selected function For example 011 for international code e Press pave e Press Mu up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen Or use the back or pext button to skip to the appropriate database item Local Area Code programming e Local Area C
264. e Used 8 e to highlight Built in Modem Baud Rate e Press until the appropriate value displays e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e lf you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Ringing Level Muted Ringing Ringing Level Ringing volume can be adjusted at each digital soeakerphone There are four levels of ringing available Ringing Tone can be adjusted per the user s required setting using the Distinctive Ringing Extension feature Muted Ringing When an extension is busy on a call incoming intercom and CO line calls will automatically ring at the lowest ring volume setting regardless of the level set by the extension When the extensio
265. e actual dialed digits when this alternate route is used Then press e Continue programming other database items as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure CO Line Assignment CO Line Assignment is the DX 80 system utility used to assign CO Lines to extensions for out calling access The DX 80 system allows the assignment of CO Lines to extensions in a matrix fashion such that complete flexibility is possible Each CO Line may be assigned individually as accessible or not accessible by each extension Related Features Tenant Group CO Line Private Line To CO Line Group Related Programming Ext
266. e all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Conference Meet Me 390 39 7 Conference is used join telephone connections together Meet Me Conference simplifies the setup process by assigning designated system resources as conference destinations The result is eight separate conference locations that are joined by dialing the location number Callers can easily be transferred to these locations Users may simply dial the location number Outside parties can join the conference via the automated attendant simply by dialing the location number at the auto attendant greeting A programmable Conference Tone may be enabled or disabled so that entry into a conference is enunciated with an alter tone or entered into without an alert tone P7290 IMM 3 81 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Related Features Conference Supervised Unsupervised Related Programming CO Line
267. e and date Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brey oh and 4 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to aciuate the associated operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays All database programming items are indexed for fast access Note Press the volume up or down bar to return to the DB Item Select screen at any time e Input 08 03 then press save This advances to the Hour Mode programming screen e Press r to change to select 12 24 Hour Mode e Input 08 14 then press 4 This advances to the System Time programming screen e Press E the Year database item displays e Press F to change the year for the system clock Or e Press to advance to the next system clock item that requires changes e Press Eiland input data as required P7290 IMM 3 210 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Follow this convention for each of the database items for the system clock ba C ke ei e Press Ai button to exit System Time programming and return to the previous menu level e Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming
268. e button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to actuate the assolata operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code I and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 03 08 then press Sal This advances to EX_HOLD TIME programming e Press r until the appropriate Exclusive Hold Time displays e Press EED to return to the previous menu level or press MUSEOS to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility P7290 IMM 3 144 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Use 8 to highlight Call Handling Then press Used 8 to highlight Category 1 Then press Use 8 tohighlight Ex Hold Time Press until the appropriate Exclusive Hold Time displays Continue making other programming changes as required When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes
269. e previous menu level or press MECO to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used tohighlight Call Handling Then press P7290 IMM 3 133 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Used tohighlight Category 1 Then press e Used 8 to highlight PBX Flash e Press until the appropriate value displays e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to th
270. e various volume settings of the telephone The following functions can be adjusted e Background Music e Ringing e Handset e Speaker Includes speakerphone and page announcement volume e Headset Adjust for each function is made while that function is in use The digital speakerphone remembers the volume level selected for each function the next time that function is used The Ringer volume adjustment allows for 4 four volume levels All other modes allow for 8 eight volume levels Related Features Transfer Paging Background Music Headset Mode CO Line Ringing Assignment Speakerphone Operation Whenever the various mode is active press the MS UP or DOWN as necessary The volume for this mode function is now set Conditions a You may adjust the ringing volume while the Digital Soeakerphone is not in use or while it is ringing b When adjusting the ring volume the display will temporarily show the current setting c When attempting to adjust the ringing volume beyond the highest or lowest setting a single ring burst is heard to indicate that further adjustment is not possible P7290 IMM 3 246 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 d Volume settings affects receive loudness only The person to whom you are speaking will not detect an increase decrease in volume Default Setting At default the volume settings are as follows e Background Music 4 e Ringing 2 e Handset 3 e Speaker Includes speak
271. e with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Mute Mute is provided to allow for temporary canceling of transmission to the connected party Whenever a private conversation is required inside the office Mute can be invoked to prohibit the telephone connected party from listening in Press the Mute button during a conversation to cancel the microphone whenever necessary All Digital Speakerphones have a standard mute button Operation 1 2 While connected to any call press the 2 button The display momentarily shows Press Gp again to cancel The display momentarily shows Conditions When MUTE is active the red Auxiliary Lamp flashes slowly P7290 IMM 3 175 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Night Service Mode Activate 6 3 Business situations including after hours operation require ringing patterns to be different than they may be during normal business operations The system can be placed into Evening Mode as one of the available Service Modes This mode of operation allows CO line ringing dialing characteristics and various other features to be adjusted for special ha
272. ed Intercom Call Forward P7290 IMM 3 107 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Related Programming Extension Feature Button Disable Operation 1 While you are connected on a call CO Line or Intercom someone transfers a CO Line to your extension ringing is heard to cancel ringing for this call press 4 2 Do Not Disturb One is activated 3 DND will deactivate when the current call is disconnected Conditions a The DND feature code may be programmed on a programmable feature button b A feature button programmed for the DND code will flash at a fast rate while DND One Time is active Do Not Disturb Override DND Override allows you to override the DND condition at another extension This feature should be used with some discretion since the extension in DND has invoked the feature for that purpose Related Features Call Forward Forced Intercom Call Forward Intercom Feature Button Disable Related Programming Extension Feature Button Disable Operation Calling an extension in DND 1 Place intercom call to the extension in DND DND tone is heard and the display indicates the condition of the called extension 2 Press pverride 3 The called extension begins to ring Conditions a Anextension in DND that has been override will tone ring indicating the override o An extension in DND that has been override may invoked Forced Intercom Call Forward The DND feature code
273. ed to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming Guide section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Extension Swapping As part of the Flexible Numbering Plan in the DX 80 system extension directory numbers as defined in the database programming can be exchanged swapped from one port to another This feature can be used to simplify moves P7290 IMM 3 118 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 and changes of extensions at any specific location When extension directory numbers are swapped from one port to another the associated programming is moved with the extension number Related Programming Extension DIR number Swapping DSS Unit Conditions Extension directory numbers can only be swapped with valid numbering plan defined extension directory numbers Programming Abstract Use Extension Swapping Directory Number Swapping to exchange directory numbers of one extension port with another extension port Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note psk Peet Brow Fre EEEF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the sesociatad operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen di
274. een Continue making other changes as required When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure P7290 IMM 3 54 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Camp On Extension Lal Camp On is used to privately alert a busy extension for immediate consultation Camp On alert tone is heard at the busy extension when the initiator invokes the Camp On The party currently speaking with the busy extension does not hear the tone Related Features Music On Hold Operation 1 Call a busy extension The display shows 2 Press next The bottom line on the display changes to 3 Press camp Camp On alert tone is hea
275. een e Input the extension number to change e g 101 e Press 84 The Password for the extension entered displays e 6 Press Esk or f to return to the extension number input screen and repeat the above operations to view other extension passwords e Press HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press aii to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming e Extension Passwords are changed at the extension only via the Phone Lock feature e Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode To view Extension passwords from the DB Item Select screen e Input 04 04 02 101 156 e Press 2 34 The selected extension password displays e Press Esk or pest to input another extension number and repeat the above operations to view other extension passwords e Press MLS to return to the previous menu level or press MUS to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used EB tohighlight System Resource Then press e Used to highlight User Password Then press Program User Password L
276. eight 8 digital extension ports four 4 CO line ports and one power failure port CO line circuit 1 DPM8 PN 7220 Digital Port Module 8 circuit installs into KSU1 or KSU2 APM4 PN 7230 Analog Port Module 4 circuit installs into KSU1 or KSU2 COM4 PN 7210 CO line Module 4 circuit with one power failure port on first CO line circuit installs into KSU1 or KSU2 MDM PN 7249 Modem Module for use with off site programming installs into KSU1 only P7290 IMM 1 1 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 AAM PN 7240 Automated Attendant Module 4 port one menu for routing 10 announcements for various caller greetings installs into KSU1 only FL 4 PN 7241 Flash based 4 port Voice Mail with Auto Attendant 1 5 hours storage and 100 mailboxes FL3HR PN 7241E Flash based Voice Mail storage expansion module adds 3 hours storage to the FL 4 PC 8 PN 7243 Hard Drive based 8 port Voice Mail with Auto Attendant 130 hours storage and 100 mailboxes The maximum system configuration is 16 CO lines 56 extensions 48 digital and 8 analog and 8 voice processing channels Configuration The Comdial DX 80 platform is comprised of one full featured key telephone model and two modular KSUs Key Service Unit Several modules are available for enhanced system applications and configuration expandability KSU1 Components NW CPM Central Processor Module with Two Serial Ports Two Music Ports One
277. election screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Use to highlight Call Handling Then press Use 8 to highlight Category 1 Then press Use Y Page Up or Page Down to select Category 1 screen two 2 2 Use e to highlight Hold Abandon Time Press Input the new value in increments of 50ms then press Continue making other programming changes as required When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming P7290 IMM 3 146 DX 80 INSTALLA
278. em AUTO A MESSAGE displays To change Auto Attendant Messages 1 Press pP 2 Press ask or Fi to toggle the ten 10 programmable greetings and messages These are 1 DAY GREETING 2 ALT GREETING 3 EVE GREETING 4 WAITING MSG 5 INVALID MSG 6 BUSY MSG 7 NO_ANS MSG 8 BYE MSG 9 INQUIRY MSG 10 TEMP MSG P7290 IMM 3 9 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 3 Press ask or f 1 until the appropriate greeting message displays 4 Press E for selected greeting message to record a new greeting message play the current greeting message or change the maximum record time for that greeting message The current record time for the selected message displays 6 Dial 1 99 to set the maximum seconds allowed to record the specific greeting message Keep in mind that the maximum length of auto attendant greeting messages is 120 seconds 7 Press bal The new maximum record time for this greeting message Is now stored 8 Press Fi 1 to hear the current greeting message 9 Press the HOLD button to return to the previous Admin level 10 Press pecori to record this greeting message 11 Press 3 to end recording 12 Continue this process for each Automated Attendant greeting message 13 When finished recording greetings messages exit Admin by pressing the previous Admin level by pressing the MES button E button twice Or return to the 14 Press pest The Admin ite
279. em i Board Port Se a pat E A pat eg i oi eg eege im ug Geer Invoke another test by selecting from the list CPM BOARD 8 VOICE MAIL BOARD MDM BOARD l CABINET 1 CABINET 2 Port of CPM Board selected C CTRL BOARD P7290 IMM 4 25 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Do Not Wait selected Status Press then Y to exit this screen l l wait For Result Do Not wait i RESULT PASSED ROM Read Only Memory hard coded system memory test passed The Status function can be invoked to view specific DX 80 system resource status Move the cursor to the system resource to view and press P7290 IMM 4 26 Cnt DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 CPM BOARD CABINET 1 l l 8 VOICE MAIL BOARD l l MDM BOARD CABINET 2 KSU Revision K16UMO F19 l Date 01 02 14 Time 20 52 26 l Status CPM BOARD RS232 1 BUSY RS232 2 IDLE Select the appropriate system resource device S and press l l l l l l l l Press then Y to i exit this screen and l nother select anothe EE EEN R16UMO F21 ne A A a Ze Bee eeh K DX80 PC DBA Cnt P7290 IMM KSU Revision K16UMO F19 l Date 01 02 14 Time 20 52 57 l Status OPTION BOARD 4 27 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 8 VOICE MAIL BOARD CONN
280. em Select screen displays Program Hold Reminder e Input 03 04 then press This advances to Hold Reminder programming e Press 2 until the appropriate Hold Reminder Time displays e Press up or down to return to the DB Select screen Program SLT Hold Recall e Input 03 12 then press gt This advances to SLT Hold Recall programming e Press 2 until the appropriate SLT Hold Recall time displays e Press up or down to return to the DB Select screen Program Executive Display Speakerphone Hold Recall e Input03 13 then press This advances to EKT Hold Recall programming e Press E3 until the appropriate SLT Hold Recall time displays e Press WEEE to return to the previous menu level or press MESS to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Ueed tohighlight Call Handling Then press e Used tohighlight Category 1 Then press e Used 8 to highlight the database item Hold Reminder to change the interval of this tone reminder e Press Each time that enter is pressed the value
281. em capacity of digital ports DET Digital Executive Telephones and DSS Consoles Each digital port is comprised of a proprietary octal ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit transceiver There are three data channels in operation at each digital port via the octal transceiver One channel is used for call processing control of digital terminal functions operations and two P7290 IMM 1 8 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 channels are used for the digital voice channel requirements The DPM68 is controlled directly from the 408M E therefore there is no heartbeat LED located on the DPM8 Each digital station interface is protected against circuit wiring shorts by an over current protection Polyswitch The digital station circuit requires only one cable pair to operate and is not polarity sensitive Physical connection of digital port terminals DET and DSS to the DPM8 module is made through convenient RJ 11 connectors along the bottom edge of the module Depending on the site installation requirements the installer may choose to route terminal station wiring directly into the KSU cabinet and connect the individual terminal cables to the RJ 11 extension port desired via field crimped RJ 11 plugs This streamlined installation capability can eliminate the traditional cross connect field hence reduce costs of installation Be advised that we do not recommend this practice since it is inherently difficult to service When using f
282. enant Group for which changes are to be made then press e Used andthe buttons to select the System Speed Dial number to change e Press e Input the new telephone number with special characters as required Pause P Flash 7 forward slash button Speed Numbering Chaining next speed number 500 699 e Press e Used andthe buttons to select the System Speed Dial number to change e Use the conventions above to program other speed dial numbers e When all changes are made press the ESC escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation To program Individual SPD Numbers e Used tohighlight Individual SPD No then press e Input the extension directory number for which changes are to be made then press e Used andthe buttons to select the Speed Dial number to change e Press e Input the new telephone number with special characters as required e Pause P e Flash forward slash button e Speed Numbering Cha
283. ength P7290 IMM 3 114 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Used to highlight User Password Length then press e Input the User Name Password Length 4 8 then press Program Extension Password s e Used 8 tohighlight the extension password to be changed and press enter e Input the new numeric password then press e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Extension Pick Up Groups The system provides eight 8 Extension Pick Up Groups per Tenant Group for partitioning the system into separate departments for organized call answering within the department As an Extension
284. ension Line Assignment CO Line Tenant Group CO Line Group Private To Operation Press an available idle CO Line button or dial a CO Line Group access code 9 800 806 Conditions a Anextension that attempts access to a CO Line that is not assigned for access at that extension will hear error tone and the display will show CO LN UNAVAIL b Extensions that are not assigned access to a CO Line may receive that CO Line via Transfer However once the transferred call is disconnected that extension cannot re access the same CO Line for use c Tenant Group programming of extensions and CO Lines also dictates which CO Lines an extension can access See Tenant Group Default Settings All DX 80 extensions are allowed access to all equipped hardware installed CO Lines All CO Lines are assigned in Tenant Group 1 Range is 1 3 All CO Lines are assigned in CO Line Group 1 Range is 1 8 Programming Abstract Program the required extensions for Line CO Line Access per CO Line P7290 IMM 3 59 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note ask pest Brau En and 2 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the soca d operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed
285. enter is pressed the value of this database item is updated e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Meet Me Page 1 59 When trying to locate someone via paging the called person is away from the desk or has no specific office location Meet Me Page is a great way to easily establish a private connection Any page announcement internal or external may be answered by the Meet Me code Upon hearing a page announcement you can dial the Meet Me Page code from any telephone and be connected to the person paging During a Meet Me Page the internal and external
286. equipped with dual color red green LEDs and may be assigned any system Feature Code or Directory Number These buttons may be assigned for either system features operations or CO line access operations The DSS Console may be mounted in two positions Lower Profile Desk Position and Wall Mounted Position DSS Consoles are programmed to operate with an associated speakerphone Speakerphones P7290 IMM 1 12 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 may be assigned up to 4 DSS Consoles each if required The maximum DSS Consoles supported by the DX 80 is 12 Each equipped DSS Console requires one digital port therefore the total number system capacity of soeakerphones possible is reduced by one for each DSS console installed Figure 9 Direct Station Selection Console Not available at the time of printing P7290 IMM 1 13 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Specifications Current draw Use this chart to calculate the Amphour requirements of the DX 80 system based upon its configuration This information is typically used to apply UPS battery requirements Current Draw Component Amps Quantity 117 VAC CINCA KAREN Tae f em om f Toe om fe Tae me ff Tame me f Tae oe f Cee om f CO oe me fom f come me fom Station wire per DET DSS and 0 02A every 100 ft of o IST 24AWG Multiply the unit times the quantity installed in the subject application site and add the right
287. equired for seamless CID callback operations in the DX 80 Use the cursor positioning arrows to highlight Call Handling Then press Enter Used 8 to highlight CID Prog Code Then press Used 8 to highlight the code to be programmed Inter Prefix Code Prefix Code or Local Area Code Country Code Long Dist Press to change the data item value Input the required Telephone Company code then press Continue programming other database items as required Local Area Code programming Local Area Code Programming requires two entries The local area code The same code if it is required for dialing back calls from that area code For example for local calls from area code 480 that must be dialed with that area code whenever this number is called back 480 must be programmed as a Local Area code so that the callback operation will not preface the number with the long distance code typically 1 480 must be programmed as the Area Prefix for Local Area Code 480 so that the digits 480 are dialed whenever this local number is called back Use 8 to highlight Local Area Code then press The Local Area Code Table displays Used 8 e to highlight the appropriate Area Code Area Prefix to program Press to select this database item Input the required area code or prefix for the area code selected then press This data is now stored on this active scr
288. er a Busy Message or No Answer Message has been played INQUIRY MSG This is a special message that can provide callers with information without ever having to be handled by a live person E g directions to the office From SR101 take the Via deVentura exit West 2 blocks to Hayden North to 14645 N Hayden Road TEMP MSG This is a message that can be used to announce periodic planned or planned events E g Our offices are closed in observance of the holiday Setup e Enter Attendant Administration from any digital speakerphone e Press 0 e Enter the Tenant Group 1 2 or 3 for which settings will be made e Press pave e Enter the Attendant Password for the selected Tenant Group e Press EY The display shows SVC MODE CHANGE e Press 21 The display shows AUTO_A MESSAGE e Press EnS The display shows 1 DAY GREETING This is the greeting that callers will hear when they are answered by the DX 80 Automated Attendant and the system is in the DAY mode of operation Notice that the button LED is lit during the Automated Attendant setup session This indicates that the speakerphone microphone will be active during the record portions of setup Alternatively the handset may be used for recording e Torecord this greeting press Ef The display will show RECORD TIME xx where xx is the current time allotted to this message P7290 IMM 3 18 DX 80 INSTALLATION
289. er are displayed e Used ES tohighlight the appropriate CO Line Group under the column DIR Swapping Then press e Input the CO Line Group Directory Number for this CO Line Group e Press The database item is temporarily stored e Used ES tohighlight the next CO Line Group Directory Number to be changed e Repeat the programming process for all CO Line Groups necessary P7290 IMM 3 62 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure CO Line Group The system provides eight 8 CO Line Groups for assignment of specific CO lines The CO Line Group assig
290. erformed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure FAX Detection with Automatic Transfer The DX 80 system has a standard FAX Tone Detection capability on the fourth 4th port of each CO Line board That is CO Line ports 4 8 12 and 16 have the circuitry required to detect CNG FAX tone When the system is programmed to receive a facsimile transmission on one of these CO line circuits it automatically answers the ringing line and waits for FAX tone If the FAX CNG tone is detected the call is connected to the specified programmed facsimile extension Related Features Single Line Telephone Analog Device Support CO Line Assignment Related Programming Call Handling Fax Ring Time CO Line Application Fax Detection Default Settings CO Line Application Fax Detection Fax Destination set to None for CO Line directory numbers 743 747 751 and 755 Range Is any analog extension port directory number Programming Abstract Program the analog extension port connected to the facsimile machine as the Fax Destination for the CO Line port s that will detect Fax tone Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note psk Peet Brow Fre EEEF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the associated operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the
291. ernal PC DBA calling modem to the internal DX 80 modem P7290 IMM 3 194 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Auto Log Off is set to determine how long a PC DBA to DX 80 connection will stay connected before automatically being terminated Log On Again is set determine how long the DX 80 system will wait before accepting a valid password for PC DBA programming whenever the wrong password has been entered three times That is if an attempt to access the DX 80 database via PC DBA is unsuccessful because the entered password Is incorrect and this failure occurs three times The system will reject any attempt for access even if the entered password is correct The Log On Again time can be set to lengthen or shorten the time interval that determines when the system will begin to accept valid password connection attempts Related Features Database Administration Via PC DBA Related Programming System Application PC DBA Connection Auto Log Off System Application PC DBA Connection Log On Again System Resource Built in Modem DIR No System Resource Built in Modem Baud Rate Operation Refer to Database Administration Via PC DBA F9 Modem for operation instructions to connect to the DX 80 system remotely Conditions a Database Administration can be entered into by one programming facility simultaneously Therefore if someone is programming the system via the Key Telephone and via on site P
292. erphone and page announcement volume 3 e Headset 3 Warning Tone CO Line Call Limiter An extension can be limited to calls that are within a specific programmed time The DX 80 can be set to warn an extension that the time has expired thereby advising the user to disconnect In this mode a system Warning Tone is heard repeatedly when the timer has expired This feature is useful in a lobby or retail environment where lengthy calls are to be discouraged The Call Limiter can also be deployed with greater call control In this mode moments after the warning tone is heard the call is disconnected automatically by the system The CO Line Call Limiter can be set for extensions on a per extension basis and according to call type outgoing or incoming or both Related Features CO Line calling Auto Redial Speed Dial Memo Pad Last Number Redial Saved Number Redial Related Programming Extension Warning Tone Extension Drop Call In Extension Drop Call Out Call Handling Warning Time Outgoing Call Call Handling Warning Time Incoming Call Conditions a This feature is not recommended as a Toll Saver option and should be used only for specific applications b Additional calls can be made at the extension following the expiration of the Warning Tone Drop Call operation Default Settings Extension Warning Tone N Range is Y N Extension Drop Call In N Range is Y N for each extensi
293. ervice or External CFW Talk Time Then press until the appropriate value displays for the data item e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Call Forward CO Line Predefined No Answer condition Incoming CO Lines can be designated to forward via a system timed setting to a predefined system resource The predefined forward destination can be an extension UCD Group includes Voice Mail and Hunt Groups or Virtual Number One predefined location is available per CO Line regardless of status of ringing mode Day Evening Alternate or Timed The line will forward to the predefined destination after
294. es and leave System Reminder unchanged e Press Y to save changes e You will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave System Reminder unchanged e Press Y to save changes e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Automatic Selection CO Intercom 6 2 This feature allows you to access a specific outside line or intercom ICM automatically when you lift the handset or press the On Off speakerphone button on a Digital Extension A line will not be accessed automatically when your telephone is receiving an incoming call outside or intercom or a line is recalling at your telephone However you may override this incoming call priority operation by pre selecting an Outgoing line before lifting the handset Related Features Private Line CO Line Group Ringing Line Priority Related Programming Extension Line Assignment CO Line Tenant Group CO Line Group System Application Numbering Plan 1 CO Group Numbering Plan 4 CO Line Directory No Operation Note 22 Ee Eo SF Back pest Brow Ee Gs F and 222 are interactive LCD button operations Use the three buttons Zen the LCD display to actuate the associated operatio
295. es are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes P7290 IMM 3 109 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Enhanced Lettering Scheme Extension User Names CO Line Names Pre Programmed Messages and UCD Names programmed into the customer database may be enhanced for special requirements using the choices available in the Letter Schemes The end user may select from eight different lettering schemes that can be programmed for use at any one installation While these names are being entered in database programming and while the user is editing an Outgoing Message the chosen Letter Scheme characters will be accessible with su
296. ess Any Key EE EE Connect sn Succeed Press Any Key EE e When a successful connection has been established between the DX 80 processor and the PC PC DBA software the following icon displays in the upper left corner of the PC DBA screen Cnt e Press any key to return to the PC DBA programming screens At this time F4 Send and F3 Receive operations can be performed F6 Disconnect Disconnecting from the DX 80 processor e When alink is established between the DX 80 and PC DBA this link must also be broken when Send and Receive operations are complete This breakdown of the connection will occur automatically if the connection path cable or modem connection is interrupted or when PC DBA is exited while the link is active e To force a disconnect between the DX 80 processor and PC DBA press F6 Disconnect This procedure is usually successful within only a few seconds P7290 IMM 3 94 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 F7 Print e Attimes a database printout is desirable This utility allows printing of each PC DBA screen Printout requires that this screen be in use at the time F7 is pressed Note It is often more convenient to use Database Save and view a database configuration through PC DBA rather than reviewing the database via hard copy e F7 Printalso requires that a printer be connected to the PC Parallel port to operate F8 Initialize In the programming process it is o
297. eue move up in their respective UCD queue position to reduce the time to answer for their call The second most comprehensive application allows for a more sophisticated handling of callers in UCD Queue The use of RAN Recorded Announcement devices provides a means to deliver information to the caller in queue without removing the caller from their respective position in queue The most effective implementation of RAN use is to deploy the DX 80 built in voice processing module Overflow in a RAN environment can utilize two announcements as part of the UCD Group queue announcements To accomplish this there are two Overflow Destinations Each has an associated timer that designate time in queue prior to the announcement Overflow Destination 1 can be played one time only The Overflow Destination 2 can be repeated at the time in queue interval lt is possible to repeat the Overflow Destination 2 announcement 1 128 times Careful consideration should be taken when invoking this function since the caller bares the burden of these decisions The final step in handling of callers in UCD Queue is the Reroute Destination This is provided as an exit from the UCD Queue Reroute is the least preferred final point of action for a caller in queue Most callers would prefer to speak with one of the UCD Group Agents Reroute is usually an UCD external extension designated to handle callers who have waited for a longer than anticipated period
298. exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Flexible Numbering Plan The DX 80 system Numbering Plan refers to the structure of dialed access to the various resources that are part of the system A primary example is the extension numbers of the system When one extension calls another the numbering plan is the mechanism that facilitates this call For this reason the Numbering Plan is often referred too as the system Directory Numbers The DX 80 allows for a very flexible configuration of numbering for the various system resources Resources are defined primarily as port oriented components of the system A numbering structure specific to the application can be accommodated The system resources listed under Related Features can be assigned directory numbers that are customized for the installation Although the directory number structure flexibility is provided primarily for system port resources some feature access also can be customized E g Account Code Paging Groups and Speed Dial Flexibility in numbering includes Length of codes to access the associated resource and Leading Digit Digits assigned to each resource As codes are assigned the system checks for conflicts and protects against improper programming of resource Direct
299. f Voice Mail Digital Integration UCD Overflow Recorded Announcement Devices Related Programming CO Line Answering Position Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution System Application Numbering Plan Ext Hunt Group Operation e Calls can be transferred to a UCD Group e Intercom calls can be made to a UCD Group e Use the instructions for Intercom calling and Transfer to invoke these operations e UCD Group Directory numbers are 410 433 By default These numbers may be dialed as though they are extension numbers Conditions a CO Lines may be assigned to ring directly into UCD Groups see CO Line Ring Assignment b Overflow Destinations and Reroute Destinations may be programmed for use with the integrated voice mail system When doing so program UCD Group 433 as the Destination for each of these entries This routes the associated queued caller to the DX 80 VM system where recorded announcements can be stored replayed to UCD callers waiting in UCD Queue See DX 80 Voice Mail Integration for details Not part of this manual c When the DX 80 Voice Mail system is installed it uses UCD Group 24 Therefore this UCD Group is not available for any other purpose when the ICD Voice Mail system is equipped Default Setting CO Line Answering Position no UCD Groups are assigned for CO Line ringing System Application Numbering Plan Ext Hunt Group Extension Application UCD Attribute UCD Range i
300. f extensions to a maximum of 4 parties members One inside key telephone station is the controller of the conference and constitutes one conference member Before a conference can be established with a maximum of 4 members a 3 member conference must first be established Supervised Unsupervised A supervised Conference is a conference in which at least one member is an extension of the DX 80 system The DX 80 extension that establishes a conference is the conference controller and may add and or delete members of the conference at any time The conference controller also has the privilege of establishing an Unsupervised Conference An Unsupervised Conference is a conference in which only CO lines are members All members are therefore outside of the premises and connected together using the DX 80 conference resource An unsupervised conference may be re joined by the initiating DX 80 extension however since that extension maintains control of the conference even though it is unsupervised Related Features Hold Private Talk F57 Conference Room Forced Release F74 CO Line Loop Supervision Related Programming Call Handling CO Line Conference Unsupervised Talk Time Conference Tone CO Line Call Abandon Operation establish a three party conference 1 Answer or place the first call connection internal or external that will become part of the conference 2 Press BASSE 3 Place the second call internal or external Pres
301. f the 408M E and any other extension modules already installed Extension modules are always installed on the left hand side in the KSU Use the four nickel color standoffs supplied with the APM4 to secure the APM4 in position Connect the APM4 ribbon cable to the 408M E Extension Expansion Module Connector closest to the APM4 Or in KSU2 connect the dedicated APM4 ribbon cable from the 408E to the APM4 module and discard the packaged ribbon cable Press firmly but not forcefully on the connector to secure a good connection Make cable wiring connections to the 4 analog ports as required The FCC requires that wiring of CO Lines into a Key Service Unit be separated from wiring of station apparatus into a Key Service Unit Therefore the installer must use a separate cable for wiring of stations and CO Lines Replace the KSU cover and secure with cover screws 10 Restore KSU power Adding a COM4 CO Line Module 4 port One COM4 CO Line Module 4 port can be added to KSU1 and one COM4 can be added to KSU2 These modules expand the DX 80 system CO Line interface capacity to a maximum of 8 CO Line ports in each KSU 16 total CO Line ports when used in KSU 1 amp 2 When adding a COM4 to either KSU it is installed by connection to the 408M E via the COM4 module ribbon cable This ribbon cable has the logical system address of SLOT 5 in both Cabinet 1 KSU1 408M and Cabinet 2 KSU2 408E COM4 modules are installed using
302. f the DX 80 system requires that the system be initialized at the time of start up The installation of the DX 80 is complete only when this critical operation is performed Occasionally it may be required to perform this initialization process after the original installation but this is rare Initialization causes the operational customer database to be established and organized for system operation and future updating At the time this procedure is complete the default database contents are loaded into operational memory The system is ready to run on this database configuration Customized changes may be made to this database according to the allowable program settings for the various features Initialization Procedure 1 2 3 10 As the main CPU comes on line it will detect the Cold Start status of a specially blocked memory address System power must be OFF Remove the KSU cover four screws at each corner of KSU1 Connect grounded wrist strap to a suitable earth ground If a grounded wrist strap is not available bleed any static charge from your body before touching circuit modules by touching the gold painted surface of the inside of the KSU cabinet If the KSU is properly grounded this will momentarily discharge static electricity from your body NOTE A GROUNDED WRIST STRAP IS THE BEST METHOD OF ASSURING THAT STATIC ELECTRICITY DOES NOT DAMAGE CIRCUIT MODULES Locate the CPM and NORMAL COLD START option strap on the C
303. fer a call to the Phantom Line will receive error tone and see the message OUT OF SERVICE in the display Default Settings See Flexible Numbering Plan P7290 IMM 3 185 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Phone Lock Unlock 9 7 Use this feature to prevent unauthorized CO Line calling from your extension This feature code is also used to program your private four digit extension password Related Features Extension Password Related Programming Extension User Password Operation Lock your phone 1 Press 9 7 2 Input the current password then press Pro 4 No CO Line calls can be made at this extension Operation Unlock your phone 1 Press 9 7 2 Input the current password then press Pro 4 CO Line calls can now be made at this extension Conditions a When your extension is locked you can only make intercom calls You may still answer calls and retrieve calls on hold while your extension is locked b If you accidentally forget your password it may be retrieved via the system database administration c The Attendant designated extension s Private Password is used to enter Attendant Administration d Ifyou try to make a CO line call from a locked telephone you will hear error tone and the display will show PHONE LOCKED e The Phone Lock feature code may be programmed on a Flexible Feature Button Default Setting All phones are unlocked at default P7290 IMM 3 186
304. fer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Pause Pause Insertion Pause Insertion is used to generate an intentional delay in dialing on outgoing CO line calls A pause ora combination of pauses may be stored in the Speed Dial bins to allow timed access to special services while allowing you to monitor the progress of the call A pause will appear as P on a Digital Soeakerphone display The system also supports Automatic Pause Insertion This function monitors digits dialed on PBX Type CO Lines for PBX Codes entered When a PBX Code is recognized the system automatically inserts a pause between that digit and the remaining digits for Last Number Redial system features Related Features Automatic Busy Redial Saved Number Redial Last Number Redial Speed Dial Extension System Memo Pad PBX Compatibility Related Programming CO Line CO Line Type Call Handling Pause Time PBX Auto Pause System Resource Speed Number Programming Operation When storing numbers in speed dial use the feature code 7 0 toinserta pause Conditions A pause occupies one digit position when stored in speed dial P7290 IMM 3 181 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Default Settings Call Handling PBX Auto Pause is set to 1 0 seconds Range is 0 5 7 0 Call Handling Pause Time is set to 2 0 seconds Range is 0 5 7 0 Programming Abstract e Progra
305. first Call Pick Up Priority List P7290 IMM 3 49 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Camped On CO Line Calls Recalling CO Line Calls Transferred CO Line Calls Incoming CO Line Calls Tone Ringing Intercom Calls Related Features Call Park Intercom Tone Ringing Transfer Tenant Group Related Programming System Application Extension DIR Number CO Line DIR Number Virtual Number System Application Extension Pickup Group Extension Hunt Groups Extension Tenant Group Pickup Group Operation When you hear another extension in your pickup group ringing press A Or When you hear an extension in another pickup group ringing dial that Pick Up Group number 440 447 Conditions a Ifthe call at the dialed extension has stopped ringing you will hear error tone and the display on a Digital Speakerphone will show PICKUP FAILURE b A extension that doesn t have the outside line appearing on a button or doesn t have CO Line Receive programmed may still answer the ringing line by the Call Pick Up procedure c The Call Pick Up feature code may be programmed on any programmable feature button d If several calls of the same priority are ringing at the extension the calls are answered in the order they are received Default Settings System Application Numbering Plan Ext Pickup Group Length is set to 3 Range is 1 4 System Application Numbering Plan Ext Pickup Group
306. for extensions 101 148 Auto Dial System Speed Dial 500 507 All Page Page Zones 1 amp 2 External Page Music Channels 1 amp 2 and Pick Up Groups 1 amp 2 Programming Abstract e The DSS buttons cannot be programmed from Database Administration via the digital soeakerphone e Via PC DBA the DSS buttons may be programmed for directory numbers Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu e Used 8 tohighlight Feature Key Programming and then press e The cursor is now positioned on the database item EXT s Feature Key e Used tohighlight DSS Set database item e Press The DSS Console number 1 12 must now be input If this information is not known use the Attendant Extension DSS Console programming to determine the DSS Unit e Press toselect this DSS unit feature button programming The cursor is now positioned on the first button upper left corner of the DSS unit e Used tohighlight the appropriate button for programming e Press The cursor is now positioned on NULL e Press to select NULL This effectively deactivates this button Or e Used to highlight DIR No
307. for the UCD Group Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brea oh and 2 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to aciuate the assoolaled operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays Program analog extension port as Type V A e Input 01 nnn 21 then press E Where nnn is the extension number of the analog port connected to an ancillary RAN Device This advances to the selected extension Port Type database item e Press E3 until the appropriate port type displays e Press EED to return to the previous menu level or press ES Selection screen or exit programming e Continue programming analog extensions as port type V A as required e Press EE to return to the previous menu level or press MUI to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming P7290 IMM 3 231 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Program the Voice Announcer UCD Group e Input 06 01 01 24 02 then press E This advances to the selected UCD Group 01 24 Attribute database item e Presse This advances to the Member database item for this UCD Group e Press EY This advances to the first of twenty four Member of t
308. four 4 2 0 cm brass color standoffs The COM4 module should always be installed beneath the CPM module in KSU1 by first removing that module installing the COM4 then reinstalling the CPM This is required whenever the PC 8 Voice Processor is installed P7290 IMM 2 11 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 js E 4 A SS D y NE y PRE a SAE EA WW SR 408M CO Line directory number matrix per installed location 408M in KSU1 COM4 in KSU1 408E in KSU2 COM4 in KSU2 SLOT 1 SLOT 5 SLOT 1 SLOT 5 740 741 742 743 744 745 746 747 48 749 750 791 192 53 54 55 COM4 Installation Procedure 1 Be sure that KSU power is turned off Remove the KSU cover four screws at each corner Connect grounded wrist strap to a suitable earth ground If a grounded wrist strap is not available bleed any static charge from your body before touching circuit modules by touching the gold painted surface of the inside of the KSU cabinet If the KSU is properly grounded this will momentarily discharge static electricity from your body NOTE A GROUNDED WRIST STRAP IS THE ONLY METHOD OF ASSURING THAT STATIC ELECTRICITY DOES NOT DAMAGE CIRCUIT MODULES 4 Werecommend installing the COM4 closest to the 408M E This means that the CPM must be temporarily removed then repositioned above the COM4 once it is installed in KSU1 For KSU2 installation skip step 5 and proceed with step 6
309. from the menus provided with these two functions Notes 1 Always use Database Save prior to performing a Receive operation if you wish to preserve the current contents of the working directory See Database Save 2 Itis recommended that whenever database changes are made to a system that has been in operation for some extended period of time a Receive All operation should be performed prior to any database changes Since some database fields including Speed Dial and Service Mode are user adjustable these fields might be erased if a Send All operation is performed using an outdated PC DBA database F4 Send e Before data can be exchanged between the PC and the DX 80 system a connection must be made between the two devices This connection is a serial RS 232 COM Port or Modem link While on site the PC may be connected to the DX 80 via a standard RS 232C straight through cable When accessing the system remotely this connection can be made via a modem P7290 IMM 3 92 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Cable e Connection to the DX 80 system on site is accomplished via the PC serial port COM Port Use a straight through 9 pin to 9 pin cable to from the PC serial port to the DX 80 CPM PC DBA Port Once this connection is made it is possible to connect to the DX 80 system processor and download receive DX 80 database memory to the PC DBA working directory Modem e See F9 Modem below This conne
310. ften desirable to revert to factory defaults F8 Initialize provides this utility While in the various database programming menus press F8 Init to Initialize the current category of programming Keep in mind that when F8 Init is used the data is only saved when the programming screen is exited and only sent to the DX 80 CPM when the F4 Send operation is invoked Special Notes 1 Initializing all PC DBA parameters can be accomplished when a new system has been installed hardware Cold Start performed by F4 Connecting to the DX 80 processor and then performing F3 Receive All 2 Initializing all PC DBA parameters can be accomplished at the DOS prompt in the working directory by copying all DEF extension files to all DAT extension files The following DOS command is used COPY DEF DAT F9 Modem e Remote connection to the DX 80 system is possible via modem The optional modem may be purchased allowing remote administration of the DX 80 system database The default directory number of the modem is 199 Some working knowledge of modem operation and connection is useful To establish a modem connection e Make sure that the attendant at the site location is aware that a modem connection will be taking place Use of the automated attendant can greatly assist the modem connection process by removing the human element at the site location e Press F9 Mdm The following modem control screen displays Ee EE MODEM
311. g assignment 02 ccc 13 02 e Input 02 ccc 13 02 where ccc the CO Line directory number to be programmed The first of six possible Members destinations displays e Press to change the Evening assignment e Input the directory number where Evening mode ringing for this CO line is necessary Extensions 101 156 Hunt Groups 410 433 Virtual Numbers 700 729 e Press 4 The data is stored e Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press P7290 IMM 3 74 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Used to highlight CO Line Then press e Used tohighlight Answering Position Then press e Used tohighlight the Day Member or Evening ringing destination for the CO Line CO Line numbers are listed vertically along the left side of the screen Then press e Input the CO Line Hunt Group or Virtual Number directory number where ringing for this CO Line is to be assigned e Press The database item is temporarily stored e Used 8 tohighlight the next ringing destination to
312. g from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used EB tohighlight System Application Then press e Used to highlight Numbering Plan 4 Then press e Used 8 tohighlight the database item External Pager Length if the length of this code is to be changed e Press until the appropriate length displays e Used ES e tohighlight the directory number code that is to be changed External Pager Leading 1 2 or 3 e Press e Input the new code and then press to temporarily store this data See Flexible Numbering Plan for rules of directory number application e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged P7290 IMM 3 124 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been p
313. grammed account codes Move the cursor as required to the database item to be changed Press to select database items for input Database items that toggle will indicate the new settings each time is pressed When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged P7290 IMM 3 2 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note changes made via PC DBA are NOT updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming Guide section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Alarm Clock Extension 6 You may activate your own private alarm on your telephone to remind you of special appointments events etc When the alarm activates you will hear tone ringing for a programmable period from 10 600 seconds After the programmable period the alarm is auto
314. gramming 06 02 1 3 02 01 VM Table Prefix Table ICM VM where 1 3 Tenant Group Press pna Input the required digits to identify this call as originated at the subscriber phone Press pave Press Pet to continue programming the various call handling digits Prefix Suffix Press ul to return to the previous menu level or press ES to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming 06 02 1 3 02 02 VM Table Prefix Table Transfer where 1 3 Tenant Group Press pna Input the required digits to identify this call as transferred to this subscriber MB Press pave Press f to continue programming the various call handling digits Prefix Suffix Press MECO to return to the previous menu level or press ES to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming 06 02 1 3 02 02 VM Table Prefix Table Busy FWD where 1 3 Tenant Group Press pnas Input the required digits to identify this call as forwarded from this busy subscriber Press pave Press Pet to continue programming the various call handling digits Prefix Suffix Press MEDIO to return to the previous menu level or press E io return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming 06 02 1 3 02 02 VM Table Prefix Table No Answer where 1 3 Tenant Group P7290 IMM Press pna 3 238 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Input the required digits to identify
315. gramming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Last Number Redial I 8 The Last Number Redial LNR feature automatically dials the last number dialed from your telephone The LNR retains sixteen 16 digits for each extension Related Features Automatic Busy Redial Memo Pad Related Programming Call Handling Dial Wait Time Dial Delay Time Dial Tone Detect Operation 1 You may either choose a specific CO line for use with LNR by first pressing that CO line button or you may allow the line to be selected automatically by the LNR feature 2 Allow the system to select a CO Line and automatically dial Press 8 The previously dialed number is dialed on the CO Line selected by the system 3 Choose a CO Line first Press the appropriate CO Line button P7290 IMM 3 160 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Press 8 The previously dialed number is dialed on the CO line selected 4 Hang up to end the call Conditions a Last Number Redial cannot be applied to intercom calls b When you activate LNR the system will first select the previously used CO line to dial If that CO line is busy any idle CO line in the same CO line group will be selected If all CO lines are busy you will hear busy tone and an
316. group displayed e Press r to select N if calling to this tenant group is to be denied e Press to skip to the tenant group to program e Press Tawh to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming AEA to return to the previous menu level or press Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Program extensions into the tenant group e Used tohighlight Extension and then press e Used 8 tohighlight Category 1 and then press e Used 8 amp to highlight Tenant Group for the appropriate extension to program e Press until the appropriate tenant group number displays e Use Es tohighlight Tenant Group for the next extension to program and continue as above until all extensions are programmed in the tenant groups e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f
317. hanges and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure UCD Agent Log Off Log On tr 91 UCD Agent Log Off Log On is a subset of Uniform Call Distribution That is it applies only to extensions that are programmed Members or Agents of predefined programmed UCD Groups An extension that is a member of an UCD Group may temporarily invoke Agent Log Off to discontinue his extension relationship to the UCD Group When Agent Log off is invoked UCD Group Queuing skips this extension for calls that are in the associated UCD Group Queue Agent Log Off On can be invoked to remove an extension from participation in the UCD Group while at the same time allowing uninterrupted use of all other extension features Non UCD Group ringing is unaffected by the Agent Log Off On function Agent Log Off On is usually invoked at a UCD Group extension when that extension user is on break or not manned employee shift cycles etc UCD Group Agent Log Off is possible at any number of UCD Group extensions however one Agent Member must be Logged On at all times Th
318. he console has 60 programmable buttons that can be used for easy access to the DX 80 systems many CO lines extensions and features The first forty eight buttons have dual colored LED s that allow status monitoring of system resources such as CO Lines and Extensions The remaining twelve buttons on the Attendant Extension Console may be used for any system feature or resource but are not equipped with LED s Although usually considered to be an attendant feature benefit the DSS Console can be assigned to any DX 80 digital soeakerphone A maximum of twelve 12 sixty button Attendant Extension Consoles may be added to the system Each requires its own dedicated digital port and therefore reduces the number of digital soeakerphones that can be connected to the system on a one to one basis Any digital extension may be assigned four Attendant Extension DSS Consoles maximum Related Features Direct Station Selection DSS Busy Lamp Field BLF Speed Dial System amp Extension Attendant Extension DSS Console Button Programming CO Line Assignment Related Programming System Resource Attendant DSS Allocation Operation The operation of each feature directory number button will correspond with the associated feature The DSS Console adds 60 direct feature resource access buttons to the 30 buttons provided on the digital speakerphone Conditions Di Each DSS Console has 48 dual color LED buttons and 12 buttons without LEDs Each D
319. he extension is idle press the Attendant Administration code O he system prompts for the Tenant Group to enter 2 Input the Tenant Group typically 1 and then press 4 The system then prompts for the Attendant Extension password 3 Ge me came default for Tenant 1 is 9999 then press show The system shows in the display 4 Press Dec The current mode of operation displays 5 Press chg until the appropriate mode displays 6 Lift and replace the handset or press the ON OFF button twice to exit Attendant Administration Conditions a This function can only be operated at the attendant extension b The feature access code can be assigned to an available Flexible Feature Button at the attendant extension with the Attendant Extension Password to allow one button operation 63 0000 Hi i above the center LCD Interactive button indicate these active modes The DAY mode is indicated by the absence of the other indicators Default Settings CO Line Answering Position Day amp Eve 101 Range is 101 156 410 433 700 729 System Application Time Switching See Automatic CO Line Ringing Modes Programming Abstract Program each CO Line for the ringing position s Answering Positions required Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Eno En EEF and ps are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the
320. he previous menu level e Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode Group Copy mode copy one source extension data to many other extensions via Pickup Group association e Input 08 12 02 then press E This advances to the LAA Lue programming screen e Press Eb This advances to the L s PEL screen e Input the source extension directory number P7290 IMM 3 117 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Press 2 This advances to they TU screen Input a Pickup Group directory number associated to the extensions where this data is to be copied then press pans The LE TEE screen is immediately prompted again and the data may be copied again to another group of extensions via another Pickup Group directory number Repeat the process for all extension Pickup Groups to be copied with this data Press BEST button to exit Individual Copy programming and return to the previous menu level Continue making other programming changes Press MECO to return to the previous menu level or press MS to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programm
321. he save operation Program DSS Console Feature Buttons Use 8 to highlight DSS Set Then press Input the DSS Console number 1 12 Then press Or P7290 IMM Use 8 to highlight the Flexible Feature Button that you wish to program then press Choose the DIR No or NULL to disable the key operation It is not possible to program Feature Access Codes on the DSS Console Then press Input the Directory number Then press Continue making other programming changes as required for this extension When all changes are made press the escape key to exit button programming for this extension This returns you to the previous menu level where you may enter another DSS Console for which changes are to be made Input the next DSS number and press 3 136 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press the escape key again You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting gt Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged gt Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override gt Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged gt Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or
322. he standard SMDR RS232 serial port located on the CPM Central Processor Module An external serial printer or call accounting device may be connected for permanent record keeping or call cost accounting Each data record is output within the standard 80 character frame Data communications is one direction only through the SMDR port and is programmable for data rate baud rate in database programming SMDR information includes CO line used extension number time and date the call was placed number dialed duration of the call Ring Time to Answer an account code if entered and a comment for special call handling record The system will also provide ring in duration and call processing information relative to the call as it was handled by the system In the case of incoming calls that are received with Caller ID although this feature is a standard feature of the DX 80 a telephone company subscription is required two records are output The first output record lists the telephone number of the calling party as it is received from the telephone company Calls from CID blocked numbers will not have a CID number associated with that record The second output record will show the callers name OUT OF AREA or PRIVATE may appear in this field if the calling party number is unavailable due to one of these reasons In the SMDR example below all data fields are defined with the associated field width Following the definitions are sample re
323. hen press e Used tohighlight Uniform Call Distribution Then press e Input the UCD Group to program as the VM Hunt Group usually 24 Then press e Use amp to highlight Members Then press e Use 8 gt Y tohighlight the member to program Then press e Input the extension number of the analog port to program as this member of the VM UCD Group Then press P7290 IMM 3 241 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Continue until all analog extensions connected to VM are programmed When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Program Voice Mail Hunt Group and Call Handling digits Use 8 to highlight Extension Application Then press Use to highlight Voice Mail Table Then press Use to highlight the Tenant Group to program usually 1 Then press Press until the selected UCD G
324. his UCD Group e Use 5 and next to select the UCD Group Member for programming e Input the extension directory number of the analog extension to assign as this V A UCD Group Member e Press pae e Repeat from essi Pack for additional Members e Press ED when finished entering members e Press HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press de to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Program analog extensions as port type V A Use 8 to highlight Extension Then press Use 8 to highlight Category 2 Then press Used 8 ss to highlight Port Type for the analog extension to program Press until the appropriate Port Type V A displays Continue programming port type for other analog extensions as required When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Pre
325. ialed later The same feature code is used to save a number dialed Save Dialed Number and to dial the saved number Saved Number Redial Once stored the saved number will be recalled when you dial the SNR code regardless of what feature operations or numbers have been dialed at your telephone since you stored the number Related Features Automatic Redial Memo Pad Last Number Redial PBX Compatibility Related Programming Call Handling Dial Wait Time Dial Delay Time Operation SDN 1 After a CO Line call has been placed and this number is to be stored press 5 1 2 The dialed number is stored in the Saved Number memory Operation SNR 1 When the telephone is idle press 5 1 2 The stored number is dialed Conditions Di SDN can store up to a maximum of sixteen 16 digits When SNR is attempted and the SDN buffer is empty the display will show NO SAVED NUMBER If all CO lines are busy when the redial is attempted the display will show ALL CO LINES BUSY The Save Dialed Number Saved Number Redial feature code may be stored on any Flexible Feature Button for one button storing and dialing operation a o y Single Line Telephone Flash Single Line Telephones and similar analog devices connected to analog ports of the DX 80 system must use unsophisticated signaling to administer call processing operations like transfer and hold This fundamental call control is handled in the form
326. iated resource There are also 12 buttons with no LED for fast access to system resources that require no visual interaction The DSS Console occupies one DX 80 system digital port and therefore reduces the maximum system digital extension capacity on a one to one basis for each DSS Console installed The DX 80 system supports 12 maximum DSS Consoles Related Features Attendant Extension DSS Console Button Programming Busy Lamp Field All system resources accessed via Directory Numbers Transfer Related Programming System Resource DSS Allocation DIR System Resource DSS Allocation DSS Owner Feature Key Programming DSS Set Operation When a DSS Console has been assigned to operate with your extension use the feature buttons of the console in the same way that the 30 programmable buttons of the telephone are used Refer to each feature description for specific operations Conditions a 12maximum DSS Consoles can be assigned in the DX 80 system b DSS Consoles can be programmed with numbering plan directory numbers only no Feature access codes can be programmed on DSS Console buttons Default Settings System Resource DSS Allocation No ports assigned as DSS Consoles no ports assigned as DSS Console Owner extensions Range any valid extension port Directory Number Feature Key Programming reference the Specifications section of this manual to review the default map of DSS Console buttons Program
327. ibbon cables located at the upper center and oriented in a vertical position J4 is used to interface the DX 80 CPM J5 connects to the standard APM4 installed in KSU1 Each CO line circuit incorporates over voltage protection ring detector loop detector loop pulse dial relay current sink circuit coupling isolation transformer impedance 600 600 hybrid circuit CODEC amp filter polarity guard circuit and Radio Frequency noise filter P7290 IMM 1 6 APM4 ribbon cable Eight digital ports 408E DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 COM4 ribbon cable CPM ribbon cable Four Loop Start CO Line ports Power Failure port Figure 2 KSU1 shown with cover CPM and APM4 removed 408M exposed The fourth CO Line port is equipped with CNG Fax Tone Detection circuitry When programmed as a FAX line this circuit will automatically engage the FAX Tone detector If FAX tone is detected the call is routed to the analog port designated as the destination for fax calls Each digital port connects to Digital Executive Telephones and DSS Consoles is comprised of a proprietary octal ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit transceiver There are three data channels in operation at each digital port via the octal transceiver One channel is used for call processing control of digital terminal functions operations and two channels are used for the digital voice channel requirements Each digital station in
328. ic programming of the toll tables Programming Abstract Program the Extension to follow the toll table programming Allow Digit Interval by assigning the associated Day operation COS and Evening operation COS P7290 IMM 3 55 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note ask pest Brau En and 2 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the soca d operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays Program Extension COS per Extension and system operating mode Day Evening Index 01 101 156 where 101 156 the Extension directory number e Enter 01 101 05 to program Extension 101 Day COS COS can be 0 7 Or e Enter 02 101 06 to program Extension 101 Evening COS COS can be 0 7 e Enter 02 101 06 to program Extension 101 Evening COS COS can be 0 7 e Press 284 This advances to the selected database item e Press r until the appropriate OCS displays Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter
329. icable copyright laws and any other music source restrictions Related Features Background Music Music On Hold P7290 IMM 3 121 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 CO Line Group Related Programming CO Line MOH Source System Application Music Source Operation See Background Music Conditions An external music source must be connected to the KSU1 CPM MC1 or MC2 port for this feature to operate Default Settings System Application Numbering Plan 4 Music Source directory numbers are set at 771 for music channel 1 and 772 for music channel 2 Range is any available non conflicting directory number Programming Abstract Program the music directory numbers Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Eno En EEF and ps are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to actuate the ER te operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays Program Music Directory Number Length e Input 08 09 09 01 then press F372 e Press until the appropriate length displays e Press to program Leading 1 Program Music Directory Number Leading 1 2 or 3 e Input 08 09 09 02 then press ae e Press E3 e Input the new
330. ield crimping tools use quality tools Cheap tools yield cheap results E w St 31 51 e F d Ze SI UA A A E d Ke weii Aj d H GE i 7 a ip E E or P ria KP L foa JS mae rere TTT ue KE ot a WA kee EH a ah fa ET E a THEA 23 Figure 4 DPM8 Digital Port Module 8 Port COM4 Central Office Module 4 Circuits The COM4 module is installed in the dedicated position via J1 of the 408M E The COM4 interfaces 4 loop start CO Central Office Telephone Company lines Since one COM4 may be installed in KSU1 and one COM4 may be installed in KSU2 the DX 80 system CO line capacity may be expanded to interface 16 total CO lines The COM4 module is shipped with four 4 mounting stand offs used to install the board into the KSU1 or KSU2 Five RJ11 jacks are provided along the bottom edge of the COM4 module for connection of one power failure telephone and the four CO lines CO lines are terminated at the site by the Telephone Company RBOC or equivalent at a point of interface called the Demarcation Demarc When ordering CO lines for the site request termination on RJ11 type jacks Doing so allows CO line s to easily be extended to the COM4 RJ11 connector One CO line per jack and connector P7290 IMM 1 9 Power Failure Transfer port associated to CO Line port 1 CO Line ports 1 4 Circuit 4 equipped with CNG FAX Detect DX 80 IN
331. ields such as those generated by heavy motors copy machines and some kitchen appliances IMPORTANT The DX 80 system must be installed in a climate controlled environment When equipped with optional voice processing modules the system takes on the characteristics of a mechanically driven computing storage device A computer with a hard disk drive This equipment cannot function in environments above 95 degrees Fahrenheit ambient temperature The MDF should consist of a 3 4 inch plywood backboard large enough to mount all hardware and equipment allowing all components ample space for adequate ventilation and servicing Allow additional room for external apparatus if used For cooling purposes ample air space at least four inches on the top bottom left and right sides should be provided for the KSU SMDR SMDA output device s must be placed within 50 feet 15 meters of the KSU limited by RS 232C standard wiring practices The equipment should be located in a climate controlled room adhering to the Environmental Specifications listed in the Overview section of this manual Note When installing the KSU and station instruments allow a sufficient margin for error in case of air conditioning failure routine maintenance plant shutdown etc As a general rule if conditions are suitable for office personnel they are also suitable for KSU and terminal equipment operation A properly controlled environment will help to extend the oper
332. igits The Leading Digit may be input as a single digit or both digits See the table below for some examples Leading Resulting Code Comments Usual assignment Users dial 0 to reach the system attendant System assigns the second digit beginning with O since no digit was input for the second digit Users dial 00 to reach the system attendant All digits for the four digit long code are input Therefore the code is fixed to the input digits Users dial 0123 to reach the system attendant e Press pave e Press volume up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen Or use the E E or fei button to skip to the appropriate database item Program Operator Extension Index 04 02 e Press Mir Y Up or Down to return to the DB Item Select screen e Enter 04 02 1 01 then press E The Attendant for Tenant Group 1 displays e Input the appropriate extension number that will serve as the Attendant for this tenant group e Press pase e Press the DSS console s assigned to operate with the extension are displayed Note These are display information only and cannot be changed in this programming parameter e Continue to press until Alternate displays e Press bed E and input 04 02 1 06 E to advance to the Alternate Attendant database item for this tenant group e Input the appropriate extension number that will serve as the Alternate Attendant for this tenant group e
333. ill also be delivered this data in standard CID format In addition to displaying telephone company CID the DX 80 enhances analog port interface by providing call progress data to analog ports for system internal calling Calls to an analog port will be delivered to the analog port with CID format data identifying the internal extension and user name if programmed placing the call Related Features Caller ID SMDR Caller Identification Table Conditions a Caller ID will supersede internal calls That is when an extension transfers a call to an analog port the display at the analog device will indicate the CO Line caller ID data not the internal extension data b CID follows transferred calls Caller ID Standard on all CO Lines The Caller ID feature requires Incoming Caller Identification as facilitated by the local telephone company This telephone company feature requires a subscription to the telephone company service to operate The DX 80 system is equipped standard to receive Type 1Caller ID data from the telephone company on all CO Line interfaces This data when received by the telephone company will be displayed on all ringing digital soeakerphones Caller ID equipped wireless wired Single Line Telephones and Voice Mail ports Related Features SMDR Operation options at a digital speakerphone 1 When CO Lines with CID data have been answered the left LCD Interactive button can be used to toggle the displayed data
334. ill show Press pest P7290 IMM 3 158 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Access a busy CO Line the display will show 2 Press inti You are joined into the existing conversation 3 Hang up to end the connection Conditions a Your extension must have Intrusion Active set to Y yes for this feature to operate b An Intrusion Tone will be presented to all parties when Intrusion is invoked extensions and CO Lines c Intrusion Tone may be deactivated LEGAL NOTICE This feature may violate privacy laws if used in a manner that is inconsistent with requirements of these laws Manufacturer assumes no responsibility with regard to the use of this feature It is provided for the virtue of ethical use only YOU are responsible for using this feature appropriately considering all applicable laws d The busy extension must have Intrusion Accept set to Y yes for this feature to operate Default Settings Extension Intrusion Active is set to N Range is Y N Extension Intrusion Accept is set to Y Range is Y N Extension Intrusion Tone is set to Y Range is Y N Programming Abstract e Program the feature Intrusion Active to YES for those extensions that should have the ability to intrude on calls at other extensions e Program the feature Intrusion Accept to NO for those extensions that should never be intruded e Program the feature Intrusion Tone to NO if th
335. ime as required Use to highlight Call Handling Then press Use 8 to highlight Category 3 Then press Use 8 to highlight Predefined Forward Time Press until the desire time displays When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Call Park Call Park Answer 7 3 This feature allows you to Park a call at any extension It also is used to retrieve a parked call from any extension Calls are parked and retrieved by dialing the Call Park code Feature 73 followed by the extension number where the call is to be has been parked P7290 IMM 3 48 DX 80 INSTALLATION
336. in PC operation Loading PC DBA software When PC DBA is retrieved from the hosted Web site it is downloaded in an archived format to expedite the download process It is recommended that you take the following actions when deploying PC DBA 1 Create a directory on the PC where PC DBA can be loaded Typically DX80 This becomes known as the working directory P7290 IMM 4 6 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 2 Copy the archive file into that directory and then executive the un archive process Type the file name at the DOS prompt and watch all of the contained files copy into the working directory Whenever PC DBA is to be used start the computer and open the PC DBA directory To start PC DBA At the DOS prompt type DX80 excluding the brackets Then press Entering into PC DBA Maintenance Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory then pressing At this time the title page is displayed as below C Copyright 2000 All Rights Reserved Comdial Corporation Ver R16UMO F21 Press Any Key e Press any key as requested The Main screen is then displayed with the cursor positioned on PC DBA PC DBA Database Save Database Restore Exit to DOS e Enter into the Programming and Maintenance functions of PC DBA by pressing The PC DBA screen is now shown
337. ine Default Settings Call Handling Category 1 CO Flash Time is set to 0 8 seconds Range is 0 1 3 0 seconds Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note 262 pesi Brau fray foe and 44 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the associated operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 03 02 then press 2 This advances to CO FLASH programming HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press Ma de to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming e Press Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used tohighlight Call Handling Then press e Used tohighlight Category 1 Then press e Used ES to highlight CO Flash e Press until the appropriate CO Line hook flash timing displays e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database prog
338. ing e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure External Music Source Two Standard 771 772 The system provides two 2 dedicated 3 5 Millimeter phono jack type inputs to connect two external music sources These music sources can be monitored at Digital Soeakerphone extensions using the Background Music codes 771 772 The Background Music codes can be used to listen to either Background Music channel depending on Database Programming These music sources are programmable for Music On Hold on a per CO Line basis Any CO line party placed on Hold will hear the music source programmed for that CO Line See Music On Hold The external music source may be a radio tuner tape deck CD player Message on Hold or other source for the system Music On Hold and Background Music option Note It is the users responsibility to adhere to all appl
339. ing changes or exit the programming mode Program the Conference Tone Operation 03 23 e Press fe to return to the DB Item Select screen e Input 03 23 Then press 2244 e Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used tohighlight Call Handling Then press Program the Meet Me Conference Time e Used tohighlight Category 2 Then press The CO Line Category 2 screen displays e Used to highlight the database item Meet Me Conference Talk Time e Press Each time that enter is pressed the value of this database item is updated e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press
340. ing from the PC DBA menu Then press Use 8 to highlight System Application Then press Use 8 to highlight Extension Copy Then press Select the appropriate copy technique Individual to copy programming from one extension to other extensions one extension at a time Group to copy programming from one extension to a group of extensions one group at a time Press The cursor is positioned on the Source database item Input the Source extension directory number Press The cursor advances to the next database item input area Destination DIR No Input the directory number of the Extension if Individual or Extension Pickup Group if Group for which the source extension data is to be copied Press Note The copy is performed at this time There is no are you sure prompt given When the copy function is completed the cursor is positioned to accept another directory number for which to copy the data again Continue entering destination directory numbers Press the ESC escape key At this time you may enter a new source extension directory number and complete the process for another extension or group of extensions To exit this database programming screen press the ESC escape key again You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note changes made via PC DBA are NOT updat
341. ing that callers hear when they are answered while the system is in ALTernate mode of operation EVE GREETING This is the greeting that callers hear when they are answered while the system is in EVEning mode of operation For example Hello this is xyz company You have reached us after our regular business hours If you know your party s extension number dial it now To get recorded directions to our office dial Thank you for calling WAITING MSG This is the message that callers hear after their call has been processed E g Your call is being transferred INVALID MSG This is the message that callers hear when they have dialed a number that is not defined in the DX 80 system directory E g We re sorry that is not a valid extension on our system BUSY MSG This is the message that callers hear when they have dialed an extension number that is busy E g We re sorry that extension is currently busy To wait for this extension dial or dial another extension now NO_ANS MSG This is the message that callers hear when the extension they entered does not answer the call Another extension request may be made at this time E g Your party does not answer please enter another extension number or dial O for the system attendant BYE MSG This is the message that callers hear when the DX 80 system is about to disconnect them This occurs when the caller dials nothing aft
342. ining O next speed number 470 489 e Press e Use the cursor arrows and the buttons to select the System Speed Dial number to change e Use the conventions above to program other speed dial numbers e When all changes are made press the ESC escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting gt Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged gt Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override gt Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged gt Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure P7290 IMM 3 206 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR This feature allows the system administration to track all incoming and outgoing CO line traffic chronologically by extension number Account code data is output for each call record when entered to place a call SMDR is output from t
343. io Operation 1 After a CO line call has been made and the distance party is busy hang up 2 Press 7 8 The extension will access a CO Line or CO Line group and dial the last number dialed 3 The display will show the current attempt cycle and the total number of attempts for which the system has been programmed P7290 IMM 3 27 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Conditions a D The Feature Code 7 8 canbe programmed under a flexible feature button on the digital speakerphone to be used with the Auto Redial feature If a Flexible Feature button has been programmed for use with Automatic Redial the button may be used to invoke the feature While the feature is active the LED of that button will be lit steady red During dialing attempts the LED of that button will flash red The system will continue redial attempts until e Call rings through and caller picks up Or e The maximum number of attempts is reached Or Any other feature is used on the telephone The number of redial attempts and the timed interval between attempts are set in system programming and are not changeable at the extension level If all extension accessible CO Lines or the CO Line group are busy at the time of an Automatic Redial attempt that attempt will count as a valid attempt and reduce the remaining number of attempts Default Setting Attempts is set at 8 seconds Interval is set at 60 seconds Waiting Time is set a
344. ion Terminal Note psk Peet Brow Er EEEF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to actuate the E eg operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 03 33 01 then press E The Tone Time displays e Press F until the appropriate Tone Time displays e Press f The Inter Digit Time displays e Press until the appropriate Inter Digit Time displays e Press HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press Ge E to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used tohighlight Call Handling Then press e Used tohighlight Category 3 Then press e Use to highlight VM Dialing Ratio Tone Time or Inter Digit Time e Press until the appropriate time displays for the parameter e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all chang
345. ion do not go unattended When a CO Line has been transferred to an extension it will recall the originating extension if the transfer destination extension does not answer the within the recall time period programmed Similarly calls placed on hold recall to the extension placing them on hold if the associated hold timer expires P7290 IMM 3 190 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Related Features Hold Common System and Exclusive Call Forward Transfer Idle and Busy Related Programming Call Handling XFR_l Recall XFR_B Recall Operation 1 Operation of recall is associated to feature invoked transfer Hold etc 2 While a CO line recalls the initiator the initiator or any extension with normal access of that CO Line may answer the recall ringing line Conditions a Recalling CO Lines will follow Call Forward destination settings b Recalls are not directed to the programmed Alternate Attendant extension c When a holding or transferred call begins to recall the outside party will hear transfer ring back tone d During recall the CO line returns to System Hold allowing any extension with normal CO line receive privileges to retrieve the recalling line Default Settings Call Handling Hold Reminder See Hold Reminder Call Handling Ex_Hold Time See Hold Exclusive Call Handling XFR_I Recall See Transfer Call Handling XFR_B Recall See Transfer Call Handling Hold Recall
346. ion on specific programming details Barge In Intrusion See Intrusion Extension Battery Backup Memory The DX 80 system is equipped with a Lithium lon battery for maintaining volatile system database programming and extension programming during commercial AC power interruption The memory backup will maintain the database programming time and date displays personal speed dial numbers feature button programming etc for up to seven 120 days of continuous AC power loss When system AC power is restored the system will resume normal operation During AC power interruption the system will not operate unless System Battery Back Up viaa UPS is equipped When the Cold Start Normal option strap on the CPM Module is operated to the Cold Start position with the KSU AC power turned off the memory backup battery is removed from the volatile memory circuit This option strap condition is used only to initialize the system database and restore all programmable data to the factory configured default program P7290 IMM 3 31 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 New DX 80 systems are shipped with the Cold Start Normal option strap in the Cold Start position When a new DX 80 system is received this strap MUST be moved to the Normal position to allow system operation Note We recommend that the system power be restored in a timely manner since the Lithium lon battery is not recharged Continued d
347. ions 4 Hang up to complete the call The DX 80 system will close your voice mailbox Conditions a When transferring a call to voice mail you may choose to enter no mailbox number Doing so will route the caller to the voice mail main greeting e g Auto Attendant greeting b If no voice mail channels are available at the time you place your call into voice mail you will hear ring back tone until a port is available c Heavy voice channel use can impact message indication updates d When VM messages are waiting the Auxiliary Lamp will flash green e The voice mailcode D 4 canbe programmed on any available Flexible Feature Button f When the voice mail code is programmed on a Feature Button the associated LED will flash red when VM messages are waiting g The voice mail UCD Group directory number usually 433 can be programmed on any available Flexible Feature Button Programming Abstract e Change the UCD Group used as the voice mail Group if necessary e Change the Voice Mail Table reference of UCD Group if necessary e To activate Automated Attendant set Answering Position to the UCD Group directory number coinciding with voice mail Usually 433 UCD Group 24 See CO Line Ring Assignment Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask Pest Brea pns and 2 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to aciuate the Berg e operati
348. is set to 0 no alternate CO Line Application Alternate CO Line Group 1 amp 2 Delete Digits is set to 0 delete nothing CO Line Application Alternate CO Line Group 1 amp 2 Inserted Digits is set to Empty insert nothing Programming Abstract e Program the CO Group for an alternate route via another group if required e Program the Alternate Route for digit insertion deletion as required to place the dialed call over the selected alternate route Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brau he and ps are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to actuate the See operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays Program CO Line Groups for Alternate CO Line Groups Index 07 01 xx 03 where xx the CO Line Group for which Alternate Routing must be setup e Input 07 01 xx 03 to program Alternate Routing for CO Line Group xx e Press 244 This advances to Alternate CO Group P7290 IMM 3 57 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Press EHe The display shows HL TER CO GP iu Input the Alternate Route to program 1 for first alternate or 2 for second alternate for this CO Line Group Press Eb The display sb
349. isable testi dida 3 150 Hotel Mode Alarm Clock Extension DA 3 151 A o 3 151 Dette A A Ee EE A 3 153 P7290 IMM TOC 3 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Hour Mode Selection 12024 Intercom alling INOM BIOCKING KEE TE cero ails ele at Mame Me GE Intercom Mode Selection Q WE intrusi n EXdens ion COM Da a LND ER LCD 4 Interactive Buttons S Loud Bell External Page Music Source Control MeetMe Pagel 5 E ame eo MO OO CI A A ME O e Messaging Call Me Text or Voice OD Mod OPINA MON a M ntor Extension A ME A A A A AS Music On leie CI WO OQUICO stars a die isis O at PER toe AOR Se VP SPN S eae Re ON ROE YONI Night Service Mode Activate D Off Hook Voice Announce with Hands free Answerback ooocoocococococonococonnnonnoonnnonnnononononnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnns O o AA AP A A A o A O A SOP TES NDS EOE tn RR PR NOIRE OE OOP IR MOR eT Pause Pause ISO as FBAC OMPA hy eee em sec eer One PMU ee eo ee Phantom Lines Virtual Numbers 7 O OQ 7 A0 Phone Lock Unlock Q J de do PRIVACY EE Bake E Pavar INC A SEA A NAAA A awese Pulse to DTMF Conversion nes Se NEE Recorded Announcement Device nano conc n nao nuan nono rca rca n rra nana nnn rra rca narran Release Ke J ca Reminder TONES aim ib Remote Programming via PDC DA Ringmng Level Muted RE le Te le Le E Saved N mber Redial L 5 AA cetera eae ca ee antes id cat eens single Line Telephone
350. ischarging of the Lithium lon battery will render the battery inoperable for the intended purpose Considering normal system use and periodic loss of commercial AC power the Lithium lon battery life expectancy is 5 years When necessary replace with a like battery Battery Back Up System An external UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply Optional may be installed to connect between the KSU anda dedicated 110VAC outlet The approximate time in back up hours will be determined by size amp hour rating of UPS installed In the event of a commercial power outage the UPS will provide the necessary system voltage to allow full system operation until AC power is restored or the UPS battery voltage reaches minimum voltage thresholds and is automatically disconnected to avoid battery damage The UPS system battery operation time is dependent on several factors e Number of Digital key telephones installed e System traffic load e Age of external batteries e Equipment Room Temperature e UPS Amp hour rating e Recovery time since last AC power interruption For further information see Specifications and Installation sections for more details about how to calculate the power consumption of your DX 80 system application and apply this to the UPS requirement Busy Lamp Field DSS Depending on user requirements any Programmable Feature Button can be programmed as a BLF button to monitor an extension s status When an extension is off hook the
351. k feature code Feature 92 may be programmed under any programmable flexible feature button b The alarm clock will be automatically canceled after the programmed Alarm Play Time is reached P7290 IMM 3 3 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 c The display will be unchanged until 2 is pressed or when the telephone is used for another call Default Setting No Extension Alarm times are set Alarm Play Time is set at 30 seconds Programming Abstract e Set the system time and date to the correct local time and date e Set the Alarm Play Time for the time that the alert tone should be repeated when the set alarm time is reached Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brea pns and 42 are interactive LCD button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to aciuate the SEI operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password HHH HH HH Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 03 19 e Press baal e Press r change until the appropriate Alarm Play Time displays in seconds e Press ask or ext to continue programming Or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing
352. l Office Module 4 TI CG 1 9 MBM Modem Module EE 1 10 AAM Automated Attendant Module a a ad 1 11 DET Digital Executive Telephone 1 11 DSS Direct station Selection Termal ai id 1 12 IN nal sed 1 14 CUTE DM dadas 1 14 SISTEMA and CG aaa 1 15 Hei Sn A 1 16 ENVIO MAA A Iii 1 17 UIE Component Detalles aia 1 17 die te fl Bre A ol eo O CO E ee epee seein NE 1 18 Signaling Genttal OmMce PSTN Data E 1 18 Biet ale Dal WE 1 18 ri OT e AMS A DAA os 1 19 MTBF Mean Time Between Failure Data 1 20 2 INStala lO 2 1 Installation NN as coca id dc 2 1 A i eee me Rr a oN ee 2 2 MOIS and lee 2 2 Preparing tne Main DISTA Bn EE 2 3 A 2 4 MBE Mal Biel eidele Fran dt ele te decal aetna 2 5 No MDF sur ii 2 5 TypiCalMDF Installato ss ca dd 2 6 KS WiC ORD elen EE 2 7 AECA a406 M maken een acc 2 7 KSU ASSembly Ada on Modules in e a 2 8 Adding a DPM8 Digital Port Module 8 port 2 9 Adding an APM4 Analog Port Module 4 port 2 10 Adding a COM4 CO Line Module 4 pont 2 11 Adding an MDM Modem Module 2 13 Adding an AAM Automated Attendant Module 2 14 Adding a KSU2 Key Service Unit 2 second cabinet oocococonocicoccconcoanconononononnonononononononnnonnnonnnonnnn cnn ccoo nonnnonnnannnannnns 2 14 PAGING A MUSIC SOU COS EE 2 15 Adding an External Pager paging system 2 16 Adding Loud Bell Control or Gate Control 2 16 Commeciingia Serial ale tor PO DBA ii ida 2 17 Comectinga serial Cable tor SMDRA tii 2 18 P72
353. l to learn more about this procedure CO Line Programming Copy This is a programming aid feature Once one CO Line has been programmed for the configuration settings those setting can be copied to other CO Lines using this utility P7290 IMM 3 68 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Related Features None Related Programming System Application CO Line Copy Default Settings N A Programming Abstract Use the CO Line Programming Copy function to copy the programming of one CO Line to another or from one CO Line to many others Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note psk Peet Brow Er EEF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to actuate the associated operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays Copy CO Line s via Individual one at a time programming method 08 11 01 e Input 08 11 01 e Press 4 This advances to the Individual CO Line Copy screen e Press EP The system prompts for the CO Line that should be copied COPY FROM e Input the CO Line directory number of the CO Line that has been programmed for copying to other CO Lines e Press 2 The system prompts for the first CO Line directory number where the so
354. le Operation Set DND 1 While your telephone is idle no other call activity press 1 4 2 Do Not Disturb is activated and the display momentarily displays 3 When the display reverts back to idle condition the set condition is indicated in the bottom row of the display The idle extension in DND shows Operation Cancel DND 1 While your telephone is idle no other call activity press 14 2 Do Not Disturb is deactivated and the display momentarily displays 3 When the display reverts back to idle condition the DND is removed from the display Conditions a Do Not Disturb cannot be enabled if you have activated Call Forward b At any time while your digital soeakerphone is idle you may immediately divert an incoming tone ringing intercom call to the attendant by using the DND feature Forced Intercom Call Forward c Any DSS BLF button of your extension will flash when you activate DND d The DND feature code may be programmed on a programmable feature button e A feature button programmed for the DND code will light steady whenever DND is active Do Not Disturb One Time 4 DND One Time allows you to block CO Line ringing Transfer or direct while engage in the current call The advantage of DND One Time is that you don t have remember to deactivate DND it will automatically disable at the conclusion of the current call Related Features Call Forward Feature Button Disable Intercom Forc
355. le engaged in a conference the display shows 2 Press private 3 Press exit to abort the operation and return to the conference Dial the directory number CO Line number or Extension number to connect You may also simply press the CO Line button or DSS button of the CO Line extension to be connected That conference party is removed from the conference and connected to you 4 You may re establish the conference with all members by pressing e Hang up on the current connection and rejoin the remaining member s by pressing HOLD J Hang up to end the conference connection P7290 IMM 3 85 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Conditions a The extension that establishes a conference is called the controlling party b Only the conference controller can add a new conference connection party c Only the controlling party is allowed to invite or forcibly release any attending internal or external party or to setup a private talk with any one attending party d When adding new parties to a conference and while speaking privately to a particular conference member other members of the conference will be connected to Music On Hold e Each of the calls involved in a holding conference will be placed on Exclusive Hold f When the controlling party exits a conference the most recently invited internal party will be designated as the new controlling party g When a conference is established each p
356. link choices will not be attempted Database Administration Via Any Digital Extension The DX 80 system allows the user installer to administer system database parameters via any DX 80 digital telephone It is possible to program the DX 80 system while the telephone is in use however certain button operations are changed for the purposes of programming and cannot be used for telephone call processing Therefore we don t suggest using these features simultaneously unless you have been directed to do so by the servicing technician Default Settings Database Administration Password is setat eight Range is any combination of alphanumeric characters using the conventions of Extension CO Line Name Programming Abstract e Enter the Database Administration to change any programmable system setting e Change the default password if necessary Enter the Database Administration mode at any Digital Extension e Press the Feature button e Press Then system then prompts for the system Database Administration password e Input the password then press Bnew Sr 4 is a LCD Interactive button e When the correct password is successfully input Database Administration is entered LCD Interactive buttons The LCD Interactive buttons are essential to complete database programming tasks These buttons take on many functions while in the Database Administration mode Throughout the programming ins
357. lity e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used tohighlight Extension Application and then press e Used EB to highlight Uniform Call Distribution and then press e Input the UCD Group to program 1 24 Then press e Used 8 tohighlight Attribute e Press to select the appropriate attribute for this UCD Group e Used ES tohighlight Tenant Group e Press toselect the appropriate tenant group for this UCD Group e Used e tohighlight Name e Press e Input the name for this UCD Group Then press e Used tohighlight Member e Press e Use to highlight MemX the Member to program Then press e Input the extension number for this Member Then press e Repeat from used 8 to highlight MemX for all member to be programmed e When finished programming members press o e When prompted to Exit this Feature press Y yes e Used 8 tohighlight Hunting Method e Press toselectthe appropriate Hunting Method for this UCD Group e Used tohighlight No Answer Timer e Press e Input the appropriate No Answer Timer for this UCD Group Then press e Used EB tohighlight
358. ll also receive FAX transmissions input that data in the same manner e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Feature Button Disable This extension option will disable use of the feature button at that extension This option can be helpful when the telephone is located in an environment where it can easily be tampered with or where user changes are not desirable Related Features All features accessed using the button Related Programming Extension Feature Button Disable Default Settings Extension FTR BTN Disable is set to N Range is Y N Programming Abstract Program the extensio
359. ll attempt via one of the DX 80 system Messaging features At a Digital Soeakerphone the display will show messages waiting and provide prompts to assist the user in responding to the messages A message may be sent and received in several forms e A Call Me Message e A customized text message e A preprogrammed text message six total available e A Voice Mail Message Related Features Call Back LCD Interactive Buttons Auxiliary Lamp Related Programming System Resource Preprogrammed Message Outgoing Message Premise Message Operation Sending a Call Me Message Waiting 1 Place acall to an extension you get no answer or busy 2 Press fs 3 PressE ii mej Confirmation tone is heard and the message is left at the called extension Your extension returns to idle after briefly displaying Operation Sending a Text Message 1 Place acall to an extension you get no answer or busy 2 Press fs P7290 IMM 3 167 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 4 Select the text message to send To select from the preprogrammed list of text messages to send press best until the appropriate message displays Or Press F 2 to input a custom message Use the table and dial pad keys to input the message Then press prs ge o E SLES S 0222 Teea IIe EJA Number 1 lett PPE G 5 E ower Case letter vez e a Type a l G reen JEJ
360. llowing diagram to locate the various ports provided on the 408M E The 408M E is also the interface point for the various add on modules of the DX 80 system All peripheral modules connect to the DX 80 via the 408M E See Diagram X as a reference of the various interface connectors COM4 ribbon connector APM4 ribbon i nel ole a nl a connector J4 l rf 408M CPM ribbon cable 408E CPM connector cable approximately one meter long to extend out of KSU2 into KSU1 Voice Processor Power Connector GE A DDD K KE E Se um GEAR Extension Expansion module connectors DPM8 or APM4 Eight Digital Extension Ports Four CO Line circuits KSU1 101 108 KSU2 125 132 Power Failure Transfer Port KSU1 740 743 KSU1 740 KSU2 748 751 KSU2 748 J2 J3 EE LE RE REEERE L EE EE LE L Replacing a 408 M E Occasionally when instructed to do so by a Comdial technical support representative it may be necessary to remove a 408M or 408E and replace it in the field Do this by following the steps below 1 Be sure that KSU power is turned off 2 Remove the KSU cover four screws at each corner 3 Connect grounded wrist strap to a suitable earth ground If a grounded wrist strap is not available bleed any static charge from your body before touching circuit modules by touching the gold painted surface of the inside of the
361. location number 470 499 500 699 2 That speed dial number is dialed on any available CO Line Operation you select the CO Line to use 1 Press the appropriate CO Line button or dial the CO Line directory number 740 755 2 Dial the Speed Dial location number 470 499 500 699 3 That speed dial number is dialed on the selected CO Line Conditions a The DX 80 system has 1000 speed dial number memory locations that are dynamically allocated to the system use extensions individually via Extension Speed Dial Locations or all extensions system wide via System Speed Dial Locations b Only a Digital Soeakerphone can program System Speed Dial bins using Attendant Administration c Speed bins may be chained d Pauses and Flashes may be stored in Speed Dial e Chaining Pauses and Flashes each occupy one character position h N If you access an empty bin the display will show SPEED NO EMPTY Default Settings System Resource SPD No Assignment System List is set to 200 Range is 0 to 1000 System Resource SPD No Assignment Individual List is set to 20 for extensions 101 140 All others are set to 0 Range is 0 to 50 System Resource SPD No Programming System List all bins are empty NULL System Resource SPD No Programming Individual List all bins are empty NULL Note Individual Speed Dial Numbers can be programmed at the extension or via PC DBA The
362. log port growth The basic configuration supports both device types Analog ports might be used for plain old telephones fax machines modems etc The DX 80 is designed to meet the telecommunications needs of small to medium business offices System Technology The DX 80 incorporates state of the art digital technology for voice switching and call processing utilizing Pulse Code Modulation and Time Division Multiplexing PCM TDM The DX 80 is a non blocking switch with no loss or degradation of voice signals The system Is stored program control and utilizes a 16 bit 20 MHz main microprocessor and peripheral devices extensions and CO lines processors in a distributed processing configuration Memory consists of 640K bytes of ROM Read Only memory and 384K bytes of RAM Random Access Memory RAM is lithium battery protected The DX 80 is factory equipped as follows KSU1 PN 7201 with the following Eight 8 digital extension ports Four 4 analog device ports Four 4 CID ready CO Line ports Two music source inputs can be assigned as desired to CO lines for hold music messages One power failure port CO Line 1 One control contact LBC Gate External Page Control One external paging equipment interface Two serial ports PC DBA programming SMDR Station Message Detailed Recording Optional Equipment The optional equipment is listed below KSU2 PN 7202 used to expand the system capacity beyond KSU1 limits Includes
363. lower case letters and numbers and various special characters as provided by the Enhanced Lettering Scheme feature selection Related Features Enhanced Lettering Scheme Intercom Calls Related Programming System Resource User Name System Application Letter Type Conditions a The programmed Extension User Name will be displayed at called extensions whenever intercom calls are made for one extension to another b Whenever there is no Extension User Name programmed the characters EXT are displayed c Whena User Name is programmed for extensions the EXT normally displayed at that idle extension will be replaced with the programmed name d Names may be seven 7 or fewer characters Default Settings System Resource User Names all User Names for all extensions are set to Null nothing programmed Range is any alohanumeric character set up to 7 characters Programming Abstract Program the user names for the extensions as appropriate Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note psk Pete Brow Er EEEF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the asso laca operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 04 05 101
364. m Temporary Mode displays To change Temporary Mode Note Temporary Mode is available for special circumstances that may arise such as holidays and bad weather days so that callers can be informed of unusual business hours adjustments While active Temporary Mode Y plays the Temporary Greeting in place of the DAY ALT amp EVE Greeting 1 Press E3 Temporary Mode is toggled On Off each time gt 3 is pressed 2 Press The Admin item System Speed Number displays To change System Speed Numbers 1 Press EP 2 Dial a valid System Speed Dial directory number 500 699 3 Press E s to view the current System Speed Dial number Display will read EMPTY if no number is currently programmed 4 Press t to change the current number 5 Dial the telephone number to store in this speed dial directory number 6 Press baue 7 Press bei or 32 to return to additional System Speed Number programming 8 When finished making changes exit Admin by pressing the ES button twice Or return to the previous Admin level by pressing the WSW button 9 Press pest The Admin item Forward Auxiliary Lamp displays To enable disable the Call Forward indication of the Auxiliary Lamp for a particular extension Note Extensions that use Call Forward frequently may not wish to have their Auxiliary Lamp indicate the status of Call Forward Active Therefore the attendant has the abili
365. m the Pause Insertion Time to adequately apply a pause time based on the host PBX requirements for trunk calls The time interval to be considered is from the time the trunk access code is dialed to the time that trunk dial tone is heard When Last Number Redial is used at a DX 80 extension on a PBX Type CO Line circuit an automatically inserted pause of this duration will be inserted between the PBX Code dialed and the remaining digits to be re dialed e Program the Pause Time for the anticipated requirement of pause time for speed dial numbers Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brey pns and 2 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the associated operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays Program Auto Pause Insertion Time used with PBX Type CO Line ports e Input 03 15 then press This advances to the PBX Auto Pause programming screen e Press E3 until the appropriate PBX Auto Pause Time to displays Program Pause Time used with speed dial e Input 03 04 then press This advances to the Pause Time programming screen e Press E13 until the appropriate Pause Time to displays e Press HOLD to return to the p
366. m the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used to highlight CO Line Then press e Used tohighlight Category 2 Then press e Used ES tohighlight the database item CO Ring Type for the CO Line to be changed e Press Each time that enter is pressed the value of this database item is updated e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Distinctive Ringing Extension 7 Distinctive Ringing Extension provides a means for denoting one ringing extension from another There are eight 8 choices are available for an extension to choose
367. matically canceled You may program the alarm for one time or always When programmed for always the alarm will sound at the same time everyday Related Features Distinctive Ringing Related Programming Attendant System Mode Time Call Handling Alarm Play Time Operation Activate Note 22 x prej prej El 223 Eis i and lt are interactive LCD button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD teg to actuate the associated operation Press 6 ifan alarm alert time is programmed it will be shown NULL none 1 2 Press Fr to enter a new alarm alert time 3 Enter time for alarm alert HHMM where HH is hour MM is minute 24 hour clock 4 Press pns 5 Select for a one time alarm or 4 i for repeated operation at the selected time on a daily basis Confirmation tone is heard and soon the display returns to idle Operation Notification 1 When the alarm time is reached the alert tone is heard and the display will show 2 Press button to stop the alarm alert or the alert will end automatically when the database Alarm Play Time has expired 3 When the alarm alert has ended automatically the display will continue to show ALARM REACHED ach until the user invokes some other action or presses the 2 button Operation Deactivate 1 Press 6 if an alarm alert time is programmed it will be shown NULL none 2 Press isi Conditions a The Alarm Cloc
368. me Operation While connected to a PBX Line press 3 The programmed hook flash is invoked on the connected PBX circuit Conditions a The Flash code may be stored in any speed dial location b The Flash code may be stored in the Last Number Redial buffer When you activate redial a Digital Speakerphone display will show a to indicate the Flash code c The Flash time is programmable from 100ms to 1500ms in increments of 100ms 1 10th of a second d Ata Digital Speakerphone when the flash code is dialed PBX Flash will be displayed temporarily e Single line extensions must generate a hook flash on the analog port then dial 3 to generate a hook flash on a PBX Line Default Settings Call Handling PBX Flash Time is set at 0 6 Range is 0 1 3 0 seconds Programming Abstract Program the required PBX Flash Time applies to all CO Line of Type PBX Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note psk Peet Eno Fre EEF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the ascociiad operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password t Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 03 03 then press save This advances to PBX Flash programming e Press GHEE to return to th
369. me mode See Attendant Administration e Program the various CO lines to ring at the appropriate Answering Positions in either Day Mode Evening Mode or both See CO Line Ring Assignment e Record the Auto Attendant AAM only for Alternate Mode Message is required See Automated Attendant e Program Time Switching times as appropriate See below Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note psk Peet Brow Er EEEF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to actuate the assoclal d operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays e Enter 08 15 1 02 to program Auto CO Line Ringing Modes Time Switching for Tenant Group 1 08 15 2 02 for Tenant Group 2 08 15 3 02 for Tenant Group 3 e Press 2 44 The first day of the week Sunday displays e f changes are necessary for this day press E otherwise press Pot until the day of the week for which changes must be made displays Then press Br e The first time period for which the Service Mode may switch displays for the day selected ALT START Alternate Start Time e Press F to change this data e Or e Press to select the Service Mode for which a time schedule must be entered The data i
370. ment of a telephone call on the Public Switched Telephone Network CO Line calling includes dialing local telephone numbers dialing national long distance telephone numbers and dialing international long distance telephone numbers Placing a CO Line call can be done in several ways e CO Line Button e CO Line Group Access Code e CO Line Group Button e Speed Dial When you are using an intercom or CO line the associated lamp will light green and flash at a double wink rate at your telephone This lamping condition is referred to as Use Indication the indication that you are using this CO Line Lamps for the same CO Line that you are using will light steady red at all other DX 80 digital telephones Calls placed on CO Lines are checked against the extension COS Class Of Service The conditions that can be applied to the associated COS govern the call connection If the dialed number is denied in the COS check the call is disconnected If the Call passes the COS check the call connection is allowed Related Features CO Line Day Eve Class Of Service CO Line Assignment Extension Day Eve Class Of Service Operation 1 Access a CO Line 2 Press an idle CO Line button 3 Dial a CO Line Group Access Code 9 800 806 4 Press a CO Line Group Button 5 Dial a Speed Dial location that has a stored telephone number Conditions a Ifa CO Line is busy when the access attempt is made busy tone is heard and momentarily the telepho
371. menu level P7290 IMM 3 110 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press the VOLUME bar to return to the DB Item Select screen e Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used tohighlight System Application Then press e Used tohighlight Category 1 Then press e Used 8 tohighlight Letter Type e Press Each time that enter is pressed the value of this database item is updated Use the table to determine the specific Enhanced Letter Type for this application e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Pres
372. ming session is in progress It is often desirable to save the data in this directory for later retrieval since work on many various databases may be required Important Note Always use Database Save prior to Database Restore if you intend to preserve the current contents of the working directory Database Save e Goto the Main screen as seen below PC DBA l Database Save Database Restore Exitto DOS e Use tohighlight the Database Save then press The following window displays to confirm your intended save operation A i e Press Y The following user input is requested EE l l Do you want to backup data files Y N Backup to CADX 80 l e Input a new directory DOS file system directory where these files are to be stored It is also possible to specify the A drive if files are to be stored on a floppy disk Regardless of where the files are to be stored remember the location so that they can be retrieved at the appropriate time e When the drive directory name has been input press If it is a new directory the following alert displays Directory Not Exist Create it Y N e Press Y The files are copied to the location specified and the following message displays to confirm the procedure Backup Completed Press Any Key To Exit e Press any key The save function is complete P7290 IMM 3 90 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Database Restore
373. ming Abstract e Program the associated digital port as a DSS Allocations DSS Dir Number e Program the digital extension as the DSS Console Owner Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note psk Peet Brow Fre EEF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the Ee eg operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays Program DSS Owner 04 14 1 01 12 e Input 04 14 1 01 12 then press E This advances to the DSS Allocation programming screen for the DSS Console selected 1 12 e Press V This advances to the DSS Owner screen and displays the current contents e Press to change the DSS Owner the extension for which this DSS is to operate e Input the extension and then press ae e Press E1 to advance to the next data item DIR NUMBER P7290 IMM 3 102 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Input the directory number of the digital port where the DSS Console is connected then press paws Press Fans Press bet to enter more DSS Console data Input the next DSS Unit number 1 12 to program Press Eil Follow the convention above for all DSS Console programming Press HOLD button to exit DSS Allocation programming and return to the
374. ministration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays Program CO Lines for Call Abandon 02 ccc 09 where ccc the CO Line Directory number 740 755 e Input 02 ccc 09 to program ccc CO Line Call Abandon e Press bael This advances to the selected CO Line Call Abandon setting for CO Line ccc e Press EF GE until the appropriate value Y N displays for this CO Line e Press MEL D up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen and input another CO Line Or e Press the ED button to select another CO Line to be programmed e Input the CO Line number then press Eil e Press bezilt advance through database items until the Call Abandon database item displays e When finished programming CO Line Call Abandon press e up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen P7290 IMM 3 65 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Use EE or to skip to the appropriate database item Program Call Abandon Timers as required to match CO operation 03 41 amp 03 42 e Atthe DB Item Select screen input 03 41 for Talk Abandon Call Abandon during conversation talk mode Or e 03 42 for Hold Abandon Call Abandon during on hold mode e Input the value for this database item Accepted entries are 50 1000 in increments
375. mode set 2 Press 9 8 again to advance through each of the available modes Operation receiving a call in VA HF mode When your extension is idle an intercom call to your extension will alert you of the call with one tone burst The voice connection is then immediately established and you may respond to the calling extension without lifting the handset Operation receiving a call in VA Privacy mode 1 When your extension is idle an intercom call to your extension will alert you of the call with one tone burst The voice connection is then immediately established however the Mute function is automatically activated at your extension The calling extension voice announcement is heard over the speaker but the microphone in your telephone is disabled 2 Youcan a Lift the handset to speak confidentially with the calling extension b Press the uk button to deactivate the Mute feature and speak with the calling extension hands free Using speakerphone mode Operation receiving a call in Tone mode 1 When your extension is idle an intercom call to your extension will alert you of the call with a double burst tone which is repeated until you respond or until the call follows a Call Forward route 2 Youcan a Lift the handset to speak confidentially with the calling extension b Press the iis button to activate the speakerphone and speak with the calling extension hands free Conditions a Intercom calls to
376. modular jacks for each of the interfaced ports This connection scheme allows for two methods of installation The first method traditional MDF is recommended whenever possible to allow for maximum serviceability MDF Main Distribution Frame Whenever the various ports of the DX 80 are extended to the MDF modular ended cables must be extended from the KSU module port to the MDF connection block The installer has many choices when completing these connections and it is left to the installer s discretion to use the most suitable industry standard wiring practice for the particular installation Whenever field crimped modular connectors are used USE A QUALITY fo eam CRIMPING TOOL to fasten the modular connector to the cable pair Use a cheap tool expect cheap results Many third party vendor products are available to aid in this installation procedure The examples below are readily available at communications equipment accessories supply houses Although this example denotes product of The Siemon Company the installer is urged to investigate the various products available and make decisions for use based on his her own assessment Comdial is not responsible for the performance of any product provided by a third party outside vendor The examples in the following chart are 25 pair UTP USOC 24 AWG cables pre fitted with modular connectors on one end of the cable and a male or female AMP type connectors o
377. ms are installed routing to the modem extension is automated Otherwise the person who answered this data call must transfer the call to Extension 199 Once the modems have established the data connection PC DBA may be used to perform all servicing operations The MDM default extension number is 199 This number can be changed and therefore may be different for some DX 80 systems P7290 IMM 1 10 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 j Pear ro a Ze E Z Figure 6 MDM Modem Module AAM Automated Attendant Module The Automated Attendant Module is a self contained integrated module that adds automatic answering of selected CO lines and a single level menu for greeting callers and routing them to DX 80 system destinations The AAM is a wonderful low cost voice processing system that can handle all call traffic or act as a backup to the primary answering system attendant The AAM is installed at JP3 and JP4 of the CPM centered above the board The AAM provides 10 greetings for the various modes of system action operation They are Day Greeting Alt Greeting Night Greeting Waiting Message Invalid Message Busy Message No Answer Message Goodbye Message Inquiry Message and Temporary Message ig Line Y fe 4 i Si CH KX i CH Hi CH E qa g ng W SSES I Greg F Ha wI E P Ki eo a Si ZE su E Figure 7 AAM Automated Attendant Module DET Digital Executi
378. n Setup P7290 IMM 3 29 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 1 Press 9 5 The display will show the current selection ICM Intercom 2 Press to select Intercom dial tone as the appropriate operation when the handset is lifted 3 Press to select a specific CO Line number to access when the handset is lifted The system will prompt you for the CO line directory number to select 4 Input the valid CO line Directory Number e g 740 for CO Line 1 755 for CO line 16 5 Press aal 6 Press E F to select a specific CO line group number to access when the handset is lifted The system will prompt you for the CO Line Group directory number to select 7 Input the valid CO Line Group Directory Number e g 9 for CO Line Group 1 800 for CO Line Group 2 806 for CO Line Group 8 8 Press pavs 9 Confirmation tone is heard when the selection is made after gt is pressed Operation Lift the handset the selection is accessed Conditions a The system will not allow invalid directory numbers to be programmed during setup b When a CO Line or CO Line Group is programmed for Automatic Selection that CO line or group must be programmed as available for access by the extension in the system programming c The feature code 95 may be programmed under a flexible button on a Digital Soeakerphone Default Setting Default Setting ICM Programming Abstract e Program CO Line Group directo
379. n has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure P7290 IMM 3 249 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 P7290 IMM 3 250 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 4 Maintenance and Trouble Shooting User Maintenance Maintaining the Comdial DX 80 digital telephone system is a combination of customer database changes facilities and apparatus moves adds and changes These requirements are accomplished by practicing the techniques illustrations and step by step instructions listed in the previous sections of this manual When installed properly the Comdial DX 80 performs relatively maintenance free From time to time the digital telephone instruments may become dirty or dusty and require cleaning We suggest the use of a clean dry cotton or other soft absorbent cloth to wipe the instrument clean Use of chemicals to clean the telephone plastics is NOT recommended since some chemicals can cause permanent damage to the telephone finish If deep soiling conditions exist for the telephone to be cleaned use of specialized telephony cleaning solutions may give satisfactory results When trying any cleaner for the first time we suggest that it be applied to the telephone instrument underside in a small sample area to assure that the appropriate results are obtained before proceeding Technical Problem Solving The System trouble shooting procedures are a logical
380. n and the display will read 3 Press Fi to be connected to available CO Line and dial the appropriate number or 4 Press i to delete the CO Line callback if necessary Conditions a During call back alert tones lifting the handset will directly connect the extension user to the selected CO Line calling back b Every CO line can have Call Back requests by all extensions at the same time c Every extension may Call Back only one busy CO line at the same time d The Call Back Alerting Ring Time is 10 seconds If the call back goes unanswered during the 10 seconds ring time the call back is canceled e COlines that have Call Back requests will recall the Call Back initiator The Call Back CO line will become available to other extensions if the call back extension doesn t answer within 10 seconds f Call Back from an extension using a Pooled Group button for access of CO lines will set the call back to all the lines in the Pooled Group When any one of the lines in the Pooled Group becomes available the user must lift the handset or press the reply soft key to be connected to the available line from the Pooled Group g During the time that the Call Back is recalling the initiator a new incoming call will take precedence over Call Back and will be answered when the extension goes off hook h Todelete all active Call Back requests sent from your extension dial Feature F P7290 IMM 3 37 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENA
381. n block one way pages internal group and all page over the Digital telephone speaker by dialing the Page Deny code The Page Allow Deny feature does not affect enabled Background Music Related Features Paging Related Programming Extension Paging Group Operation setup 1 When the extension is idle press 9 2 Press 9 again to enable page announcements at your extension Conditions a The Page Allow Deny feature code may be stored on a feature button b You will still hear intercom calls and private voice announcements Default Settings Extension Paging group 1 for all extensions Range is 1 8 See Extension Page Groups Page Deny Accept is set to Accept for all digital soeakerphones Paging You can perform several types of page announcements e Internal Paging you can page a group or place a system wide internal page e External Paging you can access external ancillary paging equipment e All Call Paging you can access all paging zones internal and external P7290 IMM 3 178 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Paging is one way only The Page Allow Deny setting does not interfere with an extension s ability to make a page or to establish a Meet Me page Related Features Do Not Disturb External Paging Meet Me Page Flexible Feature Button Programming Related Programming Extension Paging Group Paging Allow System Resource External Pager System Applicati
382. n is idle incoming calls ring at the loudness level set by the user Operation While idle press up or down to set the ringing level Conditions a Ringing levels can be adjusted from the lowest level 0 to the highest level 3 b Distinctive Ringing CO Line settings overrides Extension settings c The highest setting and lowest setting ringing levels are heard as an indication that this volume mode cannot be adjusted further d Asringing levels are adjusted the current setting displays on the LCD Default Setting Ringer volume is set at level 2 P7290 IMM 3 197 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Ringing Line Priority Ringing Line Priority is a system wide feature that automatically connects incoming calls based on a predetermined priority The ringing extension is automatically connected to the priority ringing facility upon lifting the handset or pressing the ringing button Ringing Line Priority can be overridden at the extension by first pressing a direct appearing line CO Line Group feature button or by dialing an intercom number on hook Ringing Line Priority is Callback Extension Highest Callback CO Line Recalling CO Line call Transferred CO Line call Incoming CO Line call Incoming ICM call Lowest Related Features Same as the priority list above Saved Number Redial t 5 1 Saved Number Redial is normally used whenever you want to retain a telephone number to be d
383. n s for Feature Button Disable if they are to be restricted from using any system feature codes P7290 IMM 3 126 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note ask pest Brau En and 2 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the soca d operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 01 101 156 16 then press Eil e Press 2 until the appropriate value displays for the selected extension 101 156 e Press EE to return to the previous menu level or press MUS to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used to highlight Extension Then press e Use tohighlight Category 3 Then press e Use tohighlight the database item FTR BTN Disable for the extension to be changed e Press until the
384. n the other end for termination on a specially equipped 66 block with mating AM po type connector The Siemon Company Hydra Cable Assemblies Product Number Length feet 3 7 HYD F 24U1 10 10 25 Pair Female 3 7 0 HYD M 24U1 03 NE 25 Pair Male HYD M 24U1 07 7 25 Pair Male HYD M 24U1 10 25 Pair Male When the KSU wiring is complete each port of the DX 80 system may individually be isolated for independent maintenance needs The wiring in place is then terminated onto a 66M1 50 connector block s From this connector block ports are extended to station cables using standard jumper wire No MDF Since the Comdial DX 80 is equipped with RJ 11 interfaces for all port connections it is possible to route station cables into the KSU directly without use of 66M1 50 connector blocks Using quality modular connectors and crimping tool each terminal cable can be connected directly to the port required This method of installation although initially convenient and less expensive is not recommended due to the inherent lack of serviceability Regardless of the method used station MDF cables are routed out of the KSU through the opening at the lower left of the KSU housing A cable restraint clamp is provided and may be used to secure cables exiting the KSU P7290 IMM 2 5 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Typical MDF Installation The example install below illustrates a two cabinet installation
385. nalog Port Module 4 Circuits The APM4 provides four separate analog device ports This allows the DX 80 to support auxiliary office equipment found on the business premises such as fax machines PC Mac modems and analog telephones single line telephones The APM4 generates 30VDC and 20 25Hz 50V square wave ringing for operation The APM4 is equipped with a Heartbeat LED that indicates processing activity on the PCB The APM4 peripheral processor is operating when the Heartbeat LED is flashing The APM4 provides DTMF receivers for each analog port Ancillary analog devices connected to APM4 analog ports must generate DIME signaling Pulse dial rotary dial telephones equipment are not supported All connections are via RJ 11 connectors along the bottom edge of the module KSU1 is delivered with one APM4 installed on Ribbon Connector J5 as standard equipment APM4 s may be installed on 408M E J5 standard in KSU1 408M J5 408M E J2 or 408M E J3 Note it is not possible to install an APM4 on both J2 and J3 on any one 408 When an APM4 is installed via J2 or J3 they take the place of DPM8 modules that might be installed in those locations Therefore APM4 modules installed using J2 or J3 will reduce the total number of Digital Port Modules DPM8 possible HR Cie In A d H Got KK I Figure 3 APM4 Analog Port Module 4 Circuits DPM8 Digital Port Module 8 Circuits The DPM8 module expands the DX 80 syst
386. ndant Administration Related Features CO Line Ringing Modes Night Service Activate Attendant Administration Flexible Ring Assignment Night Service Mode Related Programming CO Line Answering Position Call Handling Auto Attendant Alternate Mode System Application Time Switching Operation Once programmed the function of Automatic CO Line Ringing Modes needs no user intervention The current mode of operation will be displayed for easy identification and verification Service Modes are displayed as follows Day Mode Display Alternate Mode Display Evening Mode Display P7290 IMM 3 22 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Conditions a Automatic CO Line Ringing time settings must be programmed in Time Switching and set for seven day a week b The system Ringing Mode must be set to Time Mode for Automatic CO Line Ringing c When programming Time Service Mode switching the input time represents the time of day that the service mode will change to the associated Service Mode Default Setting The system is set to Day Mode Operation The Time Switching programming is set to operate when Time mode selected in Day Mode from 8am to 5pm Monday through Friday Alternate Mode from 12noon to 1pm Monday through Friday and Evening Mode at all other times Programming Abstract e Set the Time and Date to the correct local time and date See System Time amp Date e Set the system in Ti
387. ndling during these times Any extension may manually switch the system service from day to night mode or vice versa using the Attendant Administration if the password is known The attendant extension can set the system mode of operation using the Evening Mode code or feature button programmed with the code for simple one button operation Related Features Automatic CO Line Ringing Mode Class of Service CO Line CO Line Ringing Modes Class of Service Extension CO Line Assignment Toll Restriction CO Line Ring Assignment Voice Mail Digital Integration Call Forward CO Predefined Automated Attendant Related Programming CO Line Day Eve Class Answering Position Call Handling Auto Attendant Restrictions Toll Restriction System Application Time Switching CO Line Day Eve Class Answering Position Call Handling Auto Attendant Restrictions Toll Restriction System Application Time Switching Operation Setup Service Mode button for one button operation At the attendant extension program a button for the Service Mode feature code 1 Press 3 2 Press an available Flexible Feature Button 3 Press FL 4 Press 5 Press6 3 9 9 9 9 four nines are the default Attendant Password 6 Press pases Operation change Service Mode 1 Atthe attendant extension Press the button programmed with the Service Mode feature code Or Press 63 Input the attendant extension password
388. ne returns to an idle status b Busy CO Lines may be queued for use Reference CO Line Queuing Default Setting All extensions are programmed with CO Line buttons for CO Lines 1 6 All extensions are allowed to dial all telephone numbers P7290 IMM 3 61 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 CO Line Group Directory Number Swapping Directory swapping is provided to further customize directory numbers to specific system resources within resource categories In this case the Directory Numbers assigned to CO Line Groups in Flexible Numbering Plans can be adjusted if required to meet the individual resource structure needs for the application For instance the Directory Number for CO Line Group 1 is defaulted to 9 and the Directory Number for CO Line Group 2 is defaulted to 800 These two Directory Numbers can be swapped using the Directory Number Swapping utility if the operation is to access CO Line Group 2 using the directory number 9 Programming Abstract Use CO Line Group Directory Number Swapping to assign the directory number to a specific CO Line Group Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Bra he EEF and ps are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to actuate the ssocialed operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note
389. nged e Press The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 04 13 1 then press F1 This advances to the Loud Bell Application programming screen e Press r until the appropriate application displays L B MS1 MS2 EP e Ifthe contact is to be used as LBC press to the CO Line Group s that will cause the contact to operate e Press to activate deactivate the LBC for each CO Line Group GELI to return to the previous menu level or press Wa to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming e Press Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used EB tohighlight System Resource and then press e Used tohighlight Loud Bell and then press e Used tohighlight the database item Application if this is to be changed e Press Each time that enter is pressed the value of this database item is updated P7290 IMM 3 162 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Use tohighlight the database item CO Group 1 8 to associate the control contact to the selected CO Group Loud Bell application only e Press Each time that
390. nician with PC skills can easily use the Maintenance function to obtain various data and information about the DX 80 and all connected components The DX 80 system allows the installer technician to administer system database parameters via an IBM Compatible Personal Computer The use of a PC has distinct advantages over programming the system via the digital telephone including specific database archiving via save function remote programming outboard programming program the system template into the PC memory then send it to the DX 80 when ready The PC program that interfaces with the DX 80 system is PC DBA PC Database Admiistration PC DBA requires the following resources in the PC environment e PC running DOS PC DBA can be run in a DOS Window but performance can be impacted by other Windows modules We do not warranty or guarantee any level of performance in the Windows environment e 640k minimum RAM e 386 minimum microprocessor e 2 megabytes minimum space on the hard disk Important Notice PC DBA is available via the Comdial web page at www comdial com This software is not available by any other means Use of this DX 80 utility requires a well rounded understanding of the PC environment and the DOS file structure The manufacturer and or supplier of PC DBA cannot support users who are unfamiliar with these basic requirements If any of these issues concern you please consult with a qualified technician who is well versed
391. nment is used for CO Line Pool access The CO Line Groups are default designated by three digit notation when programmed on Digital extension programmable feature buttons with the exception of CO Line Group 1 which is default designated a one digit 9 CO Line Groups 2 through 8 are programmed by dialing 800 through 806 Related Features CO Line Alternate Route Private Line Related Programming None Default Settings CO Line CO Group 1 for all CO Lines Range is 1 8 System Application CO Group Length 1 1 Range is 1 4 System Application CO Group Leading 1 9 Range is any available non conflicting Directory Number System Application CO Group Length 2 3 Range is 1 4 System Application CO Group Leading 2 80 yields 800 806 Range is any available non conflicting Directory Number System Application CO Group Length 3 5 3 Range is 1 4 System Application CO Group Leading 3 5 NULL Range is any available non conflicting Directory Number Programming Abstract e Program the Lines into the CO Line Groups e Reference Flexible Numbering Plan for programming of Directory Numbers for CO Line Groups Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note psk pesi Brow Er EEF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the Beier operation e Enter Database Administration using the
392. ns path between the system processor and PC DBA This communications path does not require use of analog port system resources Related Features Database Administration via PC DBA Related Programming System Resource Modem and Serial Port Conditions Modem speeds are 1200 bps 2400 bps Default Settings System Resource Built in Modem DIR No directory number is set to 199 System Resource Built in Modem Baud Rate is set to 2400 Programming Abstract e Change the modem directory number to the appropriate number e Change the modem operating baud rate if the application requires this change Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask Pest Breau pns and 2 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three butions below the LCD display to actuate the ascoclated operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 04 15 Then press This advances to the Built in Modem programming screen e Press Ene This advances to the Built in Modem Directory Number programming screen e Tochange the modem directory number press Ei e Input the new directory number that is to be assigned to the modem resource The directory number must be from those designated for
393. ns to aid the user by providing direct access to system features and resources There are also three 3 Interactive Buttons and 87 fixed function buttons fNote the Volume Button Bar represents two operations volume up and volume down Each Digital Executive Telephone is equipped standard with a 2 5 millimeter headset jack The user may toggle his speakerphone operation into an out of a special Headset Mode This mode allows the user to easily activate the headset jack via the ON OFF button as an alternative to using the speakerphone Headset mode is easily enabled or disabled so that the user may quickly select between use of the headset or speakerphone operations Must be idle to change this setting Each speakerphone is also equipped with a Status Lamp to aid in user operations The lamp is dual color red green and indicates various modes of operation Messages Voice Messages Waiting Incoming calls distinctive for CO and intercom in use indication for speakerphone mode and headset mode and others HOLD Figure 8 DET Digital Extension Terminal DSS Direct Station Selection Terminal The DSS Console is a digitally interfaced component of the DX 80 It connects to the system via any available digital port 408M E or DPM8 digital port The DSS is equipped with 60 Programmable Buttons 12 of these buttons are intended for features code storage only and do not have LED indications associated with them 48 buttons are
394. nt Toll Restriction P7290 IMM 3 211 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 System resource directory numbers used for extension intercom dialing Related Programming Extension Tenant Group CO Line Tenant Group Call Handling Tenant Calling Conditions a When Tenant Calling is restricted from one tenant group to another tenant group intercom calls call transfers and recalling operations will not operated across these designations b Extension directory numbers remain unique to system ports and are not duplicated for each Tenant Group Although extension dialing may be restricted across tenant group barriers c There are three tenant groupsmaximum in the DX 80 system Default Setting Extension Tenant Group all extensions are set to Tenant Group 1 Range is 1 3 CO Line Tenant Group all CO Lines are assigned to Tenant Group 1 Range is 1 3 Call Handling Tenant Calling All Tenant Groups are allowed to dial intercom directory numbers of extensions in all other tenant groups Range is Y N for each calling direction between tenant groups Programming Abstract e Program extensions for the tenant group e Program CO Lines for the tenant group e Program Tenant Group Calling is required Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brea he and 27e are LCD interactive button operations Use the three Bultone below the LCD display to aciuate the as
395. nt database will be erased Progressive operations in KSU shall be forcedly abandoned Programming status in KSU shall be returned to default settings Please press Y y to confirm Block Control Block Control is used to restrict access to certain system resources for the purposes of trouble shooting E g a CO Line might be blocked from use in order to test the circuit while avoiding user access to the CO Line circuit To use Block Control the Cabinet number Board Module number and Port number must be known pm mm rm mm mm rm mm mn rm mm mm rm mm mm rm mm mm rm mm Block Control 2 Se hie Ne io Block Control can be used to Board block access to a Board or a Port port The specific board module A eee Se and or port number must be known LAI SS IS A Slot Pos 1 10 Sa i ac SSS aS SSS SS eee Port No 1 8 PARRA SS SSS SS SSS SSeS eS A E When a port or board module is i Block Control blocked it must be Unblocked to regain access to the resource Unblock l Block PS il P7290 IMM 4 35 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 UO Memory Mapping Use I O Memory Mapping when instructed to do so by a customer service representative This operation is used to view system Input Output port values The Engineering Maintenance Tools should only be used by trained personnel Attempts to access these tools without knowledge of their use
396. nterval selected e Input the new starting digit sequence then press Paul e Press to advance to the TO column of the tenant group and interval selected e Input the new ending digit sequence then press pass e Press F to advance to Extension or CO Line COS as required for change e Press E The DAY Allowed parameter displays for the Extension or CO Line COS e Press fbexz to advance to the EVE Allowed COS for the Extension or CO Line COS e Press E to program COS allowed settings for this Digit Interval COS 0 displays e Press and 2 E until the appropriate COS to change displays e Press EA to return to the previous menu level e Press up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen Program Extensions for the COS to follow e Input 01 101 156 05 06 where 101 156 is the Extension and 05 is DAY Class Of Service and 06 is EVE Class Of Service SA up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen Program CO Lines for the COS to follow e Input 02 740 755 04 05 where 740 755 is the CO Line and 04 is DAY Class Of Service and 05 is EVE Class Of Service e Press 2 until the appropriate COS displays for the selected service mode e Press uc GE to return to the previous menu level or press MEUS to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility P7290 IMM 3 216 DX 80 INSTALLATION
397. ntom Line or Virtual Number where they can be accessed by any extension that has an appearance button for that Phantom Line In the event that internal call routing requires a connection CO Line or intercom to be placed in a general access location Phantom Lines can be the solution Phantom Lines do not audibly signal ring call indication at a Phantom Line is accomplished by fast flashing indication on the associated LED only Calls that are connected to Phantom Lines are usually announced using the Page feature for proper pickup Related Features Transfer Flexible Feature Buttons DSS BLF Related Programming System Application Numbering Plan Virtual Numbers see Flexible Numbering Plan Operation placing a call using Phantom Line 1 While idle dial the Phantom Line number lift the handset if you want a private conversation 2 The Phantom Line called will begin to fast flash at the extensions where this Phantom Line appears Operation transferring a call to a Phantom Line 1 While connected intercom or CO Line press tus 2 Dial the Phantom Line number 3 Hang up to complete the transfer 4 The Phantom Line called will begin to fast flash at the extensions where this Phantom Line appears Conditions a Phantom Lines must be programmed onto Flexible Feature Buttons to operate b Ifno appearance of the Phantom Line exists in the system the user attempting to call the Phantom Line or trans
398. nts 1 2 Last Number Redial 3 160 LCD Extension Feature Status Check 3 111 LCD and Interactive Buttons 3 161 line assignment CO 3 59 Loading PC DBA software 4 6 loud bell control installation 2 16 Loud Bell External Page Music Source 3 161 Maintenance 4 1 Maintenance Utilities 4 6 MDF installation 2 3 MDM installation 2 13 MDM Modem Module 1 10 Meet Me Page 3 163 Memo Pad 3 164 P7290 IMM Index 3 Messaging Call Me 3 167 display text 3 164 status text 3 164 Modem 3 171 Modem connection to the DX 80 4 10 monitoring extension CO Line 3 172 MTBF Mean Time Between Failure data 1 20 Music on Hold 3 31 3 174 music source installation 2 15 Mute 3 175 Muted Ringing 3 197 N Night Service Mode activate 3 176 O Off Hook Voice Announce with Hands free Answerback 3 177 On Hold Music 3 174 On Hook Dialing 3 178 optional equipment 1 1 optional features Automated Attendant 3 17 Overview 1 1 Pi paging Meet Me Page 3 163 Paging 3 178 external 3 123 Page Allow Deny 3 178 paging system installation 2 16 Password extension 3 113 Pause 3 181 Pause Insertion 3 181 automatic 3 181 PBX Compatibility 3 183 PC DBA connecting serial cable for 2 17 loading 4 6 remote programming via 3 194 PC DBA Maintenance entering 4 7 Phantom Lines 3 185 Phone lock unlock 3 186 Play Time 3 5 power supply 1 5 power up initialization 2 19 predefined forw
399. nts where outside plant equipment is becoming antiquated or line conditions are poor tone duration and or inter digit duration timing may be increased to offset these poor conditions Related Features CO Line Signaling Related Programming Call Handling Dialing Ratio Break Time Inter Digit Time Tone Time Conditions a A longer tone duration or inter digit duration time will cause a slower output of manual or automatic system dialed numbers b Alonger DTMF on time and or inter digit tone time can be used to ensure more reliable interaction with remote voice mail and similar remote DTMF dial pad actuated devices c Atdefault DTMF duration is set to 70 milliseconds Default Setting Call Handling Dialing Ratio Break Time 60 ms Range is 60 67 Call Handling Dialing Ratio Inter Digit Time 800 ms Range is 400 800ms Call Handling Dialing Ratio Tone Time 70ms Range is 70 90 120 ms Programming Abstract e Program changes to the Pulse Dialing operation Break and Inter Digit as required e Program changes to the DIMF Tone Time as required Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brey oh and 2 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three Buttons below the LCD display to actuate the assoclaled operation P7290 IMM 3 218 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Enter Database Administration using the feature code an
400. ny extension e CO lines that have been parked are on Transfer Hold at the extension that where the call was parked and on l Hold at the extension that parked the call f Any extension can retrieve a parked CO line even if the extension is normally not allowed to access or receive a call on that line g A user invokes Call Park Answer and has no CO line button for the line retrieved from call park may use Hold Call Answer to place the call on hold and retrieve the call from hold h The Call Park Answer feature code may be programmed on any programmable feature button i Calls that are parked follow the Transfer Recall Timer and will ring the initiating extension when that timer has elapsed Programming Abstract Use the related feature definition programming instructions to program the various related operations Call Pick Up Group l You may answer calls ringing at another extension using the Call Pick Up Group feature This feature allows you to easily access calls ringing in your group via the single digit code Calls ringing at extensions in other pick up groups may also be answered using the code assigned to that pick up group Pick Up Group 1 is assigned 440 PU Group 8 is assigned 447 Use Call Park Pick Up reference Call Park to retrieve calls in a Directed Call Pick Up manner If multiple calls are ringing at an extension a priority list shown below determines which call will be answered
401. o highlight Call Handling and then press Use to highlight Tenant Calling and then press The Tenant Group Calling screen and table displays Intercom calling is allowed from one tenant group to another Used 8 e to highlight the From and To calling designation for the Tenant Group Press until the appropriate setting displays Calling is allowed denied from the Tenant Group listed on the left to the Tenant Group listed across the top When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Toll Restriction Class of Service The DX 80 provides sophisticated monitoring of digits diale
402. o return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used EB e tohighlight System Application Then press e Used 8 tohighlight Category 1 Then press e Usetf 8 tohighlight the database item Hour Mode e Press until the appropriate hour format displays e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a
403. ode Programming requires two entries first the local area code then the code required usually the same code as a prefix when this telephone number is dialed from CID memory e Press the Mee up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen e Enter 03 28 then press baue e Press E Area Code table 1 displays e Press 2 to change the contents of this database item e Input the actual local area code that will be received with CID from the local calling area e Press pave e Press pest This area code prefix displays e If the area code must be dialed to complete local calls within that area code press e Enter the prefix code here usually the same digits as the area code so that local calls dialed from redial callback operations to telephone numbers received via CID include this code Note the Area Prefix may be left empty Null for callbacks to a local area code that do not require the area code to be dialed e Press pave P7290 IMM 3 53 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Use 8 to highlight Call Handling Then press Program CID codes r
404. of 50 milliseconds e Press pave e To select the previous or next database item press Ek or pest e When finished programming Call Abandon database items press Maa DB Item Select screen or exit programming up or down to return to the Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Program CO Lines for Call Abandon e Used to highlight CO Line Then press e Used tohighlight Category 1 Then press Notice the display header CO Line Category 1 1 2 The 1 2 indicates that this is the first of two pages for this database programming Page 1 shows the programmable database items for CO Line ports 1 8 CO Lines 740 747 e Usethe and buttons on the PC keyboard to select the screen of Category 1 that show the CO Line s to be programmed e Used ES to highlight Call Abandon for the appropriate CO Line CO Lines are listed along the left side of the display e Press until the appropriate value displays e Continue programming other database items as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen
405. of restriction When Forced Account Codes are verified against those codes listed in the Account Codes Table Related Features Extension Toll Restriction Auto Line Select SMDR Station Message Detail Recording Related Programming Restriction Toll Restriction Digit Intervals Restriction Toll Restriction Account Codes Extension Day Eve Class System Application Numbering Plan Account Code Operation 1 Dial the Account Code Directory number 79 The display will prompt you to enter a valid account code 2 Enter a valid account code considering digits programmed and programmed length of account code 3 The DX 80 system will automatically access an idle CO Line and assign the Class Of Service associated to the entered account code for use on this call 4 Dal the appropriate telephone number If this number is allowed by the entered account code the call will be completed Otherwise error tone will be heard and the call will be terminated Conditions a Ifyou dial an invalid account code you will hear error tone and the account code procedure will be terminated b When you dial a valid account code the call is monitored for toll restriction against the Class of Service associated to the entered Account Code Programming Abstract e Designate the length for account codes This single setting determines the length of account codes for the entire system The account code length can be from 2 to
406. of this database item is updated e Used 8 tohighlight the database item Hold Recall SLT to change the time that calls placed on hold at analog devices remain on hold before ringing back to the extension that placed them on hold e Press Each time that enter is pressed the value of this database item is updated e Used 8 tohighlight the database item Hold Recall DEKT to change the time that calls placed on hold at Digital Soeakerphones remain on hold before ringing back to the extension that placed them on hold e Press Each time that enter is pressed the value of this database item is updated e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation P7290 IMM 3 148 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via
407. om s Diagnostic aid Cause s Action No system operation CPU Heartbeat Memory strap in If the Memory strap is in the Cold Start position LED Dark or Lit Cold Start perform the Initialization and Power Up operation at steady position the end of the Installation Section of this manual Digital Ex iv giapexecuive Power Switch Switch the KSU AC power switch to the ON Telephones may have SS position data frozen on the display AC Fuse Switch KSU power to the OFF position and remove cover four screws Locate the system power Erroneous LED operation supply in the upper left corner of the KSU interior and inspect the AC fuse for continuity DVM required DC Fuse Switch KSU power to the OFF position and remove cover four screws Locate the system power supply in the upper left corner of the KSU interior and inspect the DC fuse for continuity DVM required SPI Buss Error Switch KSU power to the OFF position and remove cover four screws Then check for the following 1 Locate each expansion module and verify the ribbon cable connection is accurate and secure 2 Check for improper aligning of module connectors 3 Detach all station cabling and retest 4 Check all socketed IC s for good seated connections 5 Unplug one module at a time and retest until failed component is found 6 Perform Initialization and Power Up sequence Note this is an emergency action since the unique customer database will be erase
408. on Extension Drop Call Out N Range is Y N for each extension Call Handling Warning Time Outgoing Call 5 Range is 1 30 minutes Call Handling Warning Time Incoming Call 5 Range is 1 30 minutes Programming Abstract e Determine which extensions are to be limited and for what type of call incoming or outgoing Then program those extensions for the appropriate operation Warning Tone only or Drop Call In Out e Program the time period for the appropriate mode s P7290 IMM 3 247 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brea ore and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the Seet operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays Program the extension for the appropriate mode e Input 01 101 156 08 for Warning Tone 101 156 is the extension to program e Input 01 101 156 09 for Drop Call Out 101 156 is the extension to program e Input 01 101 156 10 for Drop Call In 101 156 is the extension to program e Press r until the appropriate value Y N displays e Press Esk or pest to select the previous next DB Item or press MES N to return to th
409. on Use the headset to place a call E button LED flashes to 1 P a DSS button or CO Line button The indicate that the headset is active P7290 IMM 3 142 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 2 Intercom Dial Tone CO Line dial tone or Intercom ring back tone is heard depending on the function invoked 3 Press s again to disconnect the current call Operation Use the headset to answer a call 1 While the telephone is ringing press ior The active 2 The ringing 3 Press ke ms button LED flashes to indicate that the headset is call is answered and connected to the headset again to disconnect the current call Conditions a You may assign a feature button with the Headset feature code and use the button to turn the headset on and off When the headset is enabled that button will light b While using the headset you may pick up Intercom Voice calls by pressing are c Incoming CO line calls may be answered by pressing hate for automatic priority ring selection or by pressing the specific CO line button d Other features like background music and muted ring continue to operate in the same manner while you are on hook e Non amplified headsets may be powered directly from the key telephone In most cases this interface permits the key telephone to control the Volume Up Down and Mute features Some headsets may require the use of the headset adapter keys to adjust the
410. on e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input the code to go to the specific database item to change per the list P7290 IMM 3 244 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 06 01 01 24 03 01 UCD Group Members where 01 24 is the group number e Press baal This advances to Member 1 of the new UCD Group selected e Press E3 e Input the extension directory of the digital channel to program into this Member At default the digital channels of DX 80 Voice are 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 e Press pave e Press et e Continue from E13 above to program all Voice Mail channels as members of this UCD Group to return to the DB Item e Press EM to return to the previous menu level or press MESA Selection screen or exit programming 06 02 1 3 01 Voice Mail Hunt Group where 1 3 is the Tenant Group usually 1 e Press 4 This advances to Voice Mail Table for Tenant 1 Hunt Group selected and programmed with digital channel Members e Press to continue programming the various call handling digits Prefix Suffix e Press HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press Z d to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note
411. on Ext Page Group External Pager see Flexible Numbering Plan Operation 1 To make a page announcement the page code must be known At default the page access codes are as follows e 400 Tenant All Call e 401 408 Page Groups zones 1 8 e 777 External Pager 2 Lift the handset it is recommended that all page announcements be made using the handset to reduce potential audio feedback and oscillation squeal Dial the page group zone directory number If the selected Page path is not being used a short page alert tone is heard and the connection is made 5 Make your page announcement and hang up to end the announcement Default Settings Extension Paging Group 1 for all extensions Range is 1 8 Extension Paging Allow Y for all extensions Range is Y N System Resource External Pager Tenant Group 1 Range is 1 3 System Resource External Pager Paging Group 1 Y Range is Y N System Application Ext Page Group assigns codes 400 408 System Application Ext Pager assigns code 777 Conditions a The display will show tit PHI LLI E if a page fails This is due to that page group zone being busy b Any of the paging codes may be stored on a programmable feature button c The External Pager port can be programmed to operate with any Page Group via System Resource External Pager programming Programming Abstract e Program extensions into paging groups see Extension
412. oned on the database item DSS Unit 1 DIR No e Press to select this data item for change The data item is ready for input e Input the directory number of the digital port to which the DSS Console is connected e Press The data is stored P7290 IMM 3 16 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Used tohighlight the DSS Unit 1 DSS Owner database item e Press to select this data item for change The data item is ready for input e Enter the extension directory number of the extension with which this DSS will operate e Press Enter The data is stored e Use tohighlight the next database item to be changed and follow the conventions used in the previous steps to complete any other changes required e When all changes are made press escape to exit System Reminder programming You will be prompted to confirm exit request press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave System Reminder unchanged e Press Y to save changes e You will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave System Reminder unchanged e Press Y to save changes e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Program Attendant Extension User Password e Reference Extension User Password for programming instructions of this feature Note Changes made via PC D
413. ord Extension 101 is set to 9999 All other extensions are set to 0000 Range is any alphanumeric characters up to the allocated User Password Length System Resource User Password Length is set to 4 Range is 4 8 P7290 IMM 3 113 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming Abstract e Program the User Password Length Note Changes to the length of the User Password affect the existing programmed passwords by adding or subtracting one default character to the end of the existing password When the length of the User Password is extended all passwords increase by one character and when the length of the User Password is reduced all passwords decrease by one character e Program the passwords for each extension Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Braid he foe SF and ps are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to actuate the assoclaied operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays Program User Password Length Input 04 04 01 then press zuel The current User Password Length displays e Press 2 until the appropriate Extension Password Length displays e Press F to advance to the Extension password view scr
414. orded announcement device e Program Overflow 1 Timer for the interval that a caller will remain on hold before hearing the first Overflow announcement or before she is routed to the overflow extension e Program the Overflow 1 Destination extension or RAN Device If the destination is a third party RAN device that is connected to a DX 80 analog port that port number must be programmed here If the destination is the DX 80 VP the DX 80 VP directory number must be programmed here usually 433 e Program Overflow 2 Timer and Destination similarly to Overflow 1 Overflow 2 Timer will result in the interval following Overflow 1 and the interval between repeating Overflow 2 e Program the Overflow Count Number of times a caller in UCD Group Queue will hear the Overflow 2 announcement e Program the Reroute Destination Destination to route caller after she has heard the Overflow 2 announcement Overflow Count times e If third party RAN devices are used for RAN announcements program those ports as Port Type V A e If third party RAN device traffic is expected to be high program analog ports of type V A into an available UCD Group and program that UCD Group as Attribute V A Programming Reference Uniform Call Distribution Hunt Group for specific programming details P7290 IMM 3 230 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 UCD Voice Announce Group The DX 80 system allows for the use of UCD
415. ory Numbers To successfully implement changes to the default factory programmed Directory Number Plan a new code cannot be input if it is in use elsewhere until it has been deleted from use in the previous assignment Related Features Account Code Directory Number Pickup Groups Operator Code Speed Dial Individual and Common CO Line Group Directory Numbers Music Sources Extension Numbers Load Bell Control Paging Groups External Pager Universal Call Distribution Groups Virtual Numbers CO Line Directory Numbers Meet Me Conference Directory Numbers Related Programming System Application Numbering Plan Default Settings Note 1 Range for Length for all items is 1 4 Note 2 Range for all Leading items is any available non conflicting directory number P7290 IMM 3 137 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Flexible Numbering Plan CO Line Group Defaults Lead Lead Lead Lead Lead AA A AE ma TUTE Oh SN EES Flexible Numbering Plan Directory Number Defaults Leading Dome Resulting Code j2 jala s ely je perator li es In Account zep AM CI Extension E Mull 100 1953 cer DIER qu sro up e DEER ro Groups ra DEER E Groups Individual ce DEI ES CO Line sie DEIER P e GR FE Source Loud Bell Control External Fager ortua 3 71 72 700 729 Number EE 3 139 Nut nut 390 397 Conference Programming Abstract Length fo A H el CEE a e Program the Di
416. ot Disturb is active Related Features Do Not Disturb Call Forward Operation Intercom dial tone will be appended with Stutter Dial Tone whenever the extension is used to place intercom calls Conditions Once you dial a digit the reminder tone is removed until the next time you access intercom Remote Programming via PC DBA Programming the DX 80 system database is possible in three ways First it can be programmed by the telephone second via PC DBA on site and third via PC DBA remotely via modem Refer to the feature description and operation for Database Administration Via PC DBA for instructions on how to establish a modem connection and then for programming system changes Emphasis must be placed on the F4 Send and F3 Receive functions The various setup parameters of the DX 80 system for use with a modem are described here The DX 80 system remote access parameters Built in Modem DIR No and Baud Rate must be set to allow access to the DX 80 The parameters PC DBA Connection Auto Log Off and Log On Again can be set to avoid unauthorized access to the DX 80 database Built in Modem Baud Rate is a data link speed setting requirement This setting is defaulted at 2400 bps but can be changed to 1200 bps if necessary The Directory Number setting is defaulted at extension 199 This also may be changed if necessary Regardless of the modem extension directory number this number is used to connect the ext
417. ou will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Monitor Extension CO Line The DX 80 system allows users to monitor conversations at other extensions for the purposes of service observance Monitoring of busy Extensions and CO Lines is possible only at extensions with a Monitor Class Of Service that has priority over the Monitor Class Of Service of the extension to be monitored Since this feature is very similar to Intrusion it is possible to shift between these two features when Monitor has been invoked LEGAL NOTICE This feature may violate privacy laws if used in a manner that is inconsistent with requirements of these laws Manufacturer assumes no responsibility with regard to the use of this feature It is
418. ow The display prompts for confirmation 3 Press go The operation is complete and confirmation tone is heard Feature Directory Number Lookup 1 5 There are many features and codes in the DX 80 system At times it may be difficult to remember the code for the necessary feature This feature code directory was implemented to aid in accessing the many features of the DX 80 When invoked the Feature Directory Number Lookup can be used to find the directory number and or Feature Code and or Suffix Codes required to operate the various system features Related Features Flexible System Numbering Plan All feature access codes Operation 1 While the telephone is idle no call activity press 5 The display shows 2 To find a system Directory Number press Eii The first screen of directory number listings displays If you don t see the system resource listed press until the resource displays then press that interactive 3 To find a system Feature Access Code press f t Features are listed abbreviated and alphabetically Note All codes in this list require that the button be pressed preceding the code 4 To find a Suffix Code press EHF F 2 The list of digits dialed after system resource directory numbers displays 5 Use the back and Peti buttons to move through the display categories 6 Use WEN 7 to return to a previous menu level Go off hook them on hook or press the ON OFF button t
419. owel iii T Where x is the current programming 0 e Input the CO Line Group that is to be used as the 1 or 2 Alternate Route for this CO Line Group e Press pave Press to advance to the Delete Digits for this Alternate Route selection If it is necessary to delete digits from the dialed digits when calls are routed to this alternate put in the number of digits to delete here e Press 2 Input the quantity of digits to delete from the beginning of the number dialed 0 9 e Press pase Press to advance to the Inserted Digits for this Alternate Route selection If it is necessary to insert digits before sending the dialed digits when calls are routed to this alternate input the actual digits required here e Press r Input the required digits Up to 16 digits may be inserted e Press baal Press x The display shows ALTER CO GP _ The next Alternate Route may now be programmed for this CO Line Group if required Input the Alternate Route to program 1 for first alternate or 2 for second alternate for this CO Line Group Press EP and continue programming as per the first alternate programming When finished programming Alternate CO Line Routes press Cubana S up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen Or use or F button to skip to the appropriate database item Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility En
420. p 04 02 3 06 for Tenant Group 3 e Press pave e Tochange the designated attendant extension press change e Enter the extension number to be assigned as the Attendant Extension Note Only valid extension directory numbers can be assigned as tenant group attendants Extensions that are programmed as Attendant for another Tenant Group or Alternate Attendant cannot be programmed as the attendant e Press pave P7290 IMM 3 12 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Program Attendant Extension User Password Reference Extension User Password for programming instructions of this feature Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then press Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Program Attendant Extension Use 8 to highlight System Resource and then press Enter The cursor is now positioned on the database item Attendant Press The cursor is now positioned on the database item Attendant Tenant 1 Press to select this data item for change The data item is ready for input Enter the extension directory number to be assigned as the Attendant Extension Press continue Program Alternate Attendant Extension Use
421. p 3 63 Directory Number Swapping 3 62 CO Line Groups CO Alternate Route 3 57 CO Line Name Label Programming 3 67 CO Line Programming Copy 3 68 CO Line Queuing Callback 3 71 CO Line Receive Assignment 3 72 CO Line Ring Assignment 3 73 CO Line Ring Type Assignment 3 75 CO Line Ringing Modes 3 76 CO Line Signaling Dialing Type tone pulse 3 79 CO Line Supervision 3 65 CO Line Type Assignment 3 80 CO Intercom 3 29 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Codes Hidden 3 143 COM4 installation 2 11 COM4 Central Office Module 4 Circuits 1 9 Conference Meet Me 3 81 Supervised Unsupervised 3 84 configuration 1 2 configuration table 1 4 Connecting to the DX 80 processor 4 8 COS extension 3 55 CPM Central Processor Module 1 6 Current draw 1 14 D Database Administration via any digital extension 3 96 via PC DBA 3 88 Default Set 3 98 DET Digital Executive Telephone 1 11 Dial Pad Confirmation 3 98 Digital Speakerphone 3 6 Direct Inward System Access DISA 3 98 Direct Station Selection Console 3 101 DISA 3 98 disabling feature button 3 126 disabling Hot Key 3 150 Disconnecting from the DX 80 processor 9 Discriminating Ringing 3 104 Distinctive Ringing CO Line 3 105 extension 3 106 Do Not Disturb 3 107 One Time 3 107 Override 3 108 DPM8 Digital Port Module 8 Circuits 1 8 DSS Busy Lamp Field 3 32 DSS Direct Station Selection Terminal 1 12 DSS Console 3
422. p functions such that calls to the group or calls transferred to the group are routed to the group members beginning with the first member every time That is the first Member of a Linear UCD Group will be the primary answering point for all calls received by this group Each subsequent Member receives calls only when the previous Member s are unavailable to take a call Unavailable is determined by the following status Busy DND active Agent Log Off active or when calls to the member go unanswered When configured as Distributed the UCD Group functions such that calls to the group or calls transferred to the group are routed to group members in a uniformly distributed fashion That is each new call is routed to the next available UCD Member such that previous call routing is retained If the third UCD Group Member handled the last call into the UCD Group the next call to this UCD Group will be routed to UCD Group Member 4 regardless of the status of other UCD Group Members Assuming Member 4 is available Unavailable is determined by the following status Busy DND active Agent Log Off active or when calls to the member go unanswered When configured as All Ring the UCD Group functions such that calls to the group or calls transferred to the group are routed to all group members simultaneously That is for each call into the UCD Group all available members ring Unavailable is determined by the following status Busy DND
423. pe Extension Application Universal Call Distribution Overflow Extension Application Universal Call Distribution ReRoute Extension Application Universal Call Distribution Attribute P7290 IMM 3 191 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Operation No user specific operation is required When UCD queued callers are routed to Recorded Announcement Devices Integrated RAN the message is played at the programmed intervals Conditions a When analog RAN devices are used multiple queued callers will stack in queue for message playback When the analog port is available to handle another call the next call in RAN queue hears the recorded message This does not affect DX 80 Voice Integrated RAN b When multiple analog RAN devices are required to handle high call traffic these RAN devices with the same recording can be placed into a UCD Group set for Attribute V A When this is done the Overflow Destination and ReRoute Destinations are programmed for that UCD Group number not the individual analog port numbers connected to the RAN devices c UCD queued callers who are routed to Overflow Destination RAN devices remain in UCD queue When a UCD Agent answers the queued ringing call the call is removed from UCD queue and connected to the UCD Agent d Ifa UCD queued caller is listening to a RAN message when the Agent answers the UCD call that call is diverted immediately to the UCD Agent and the
424. pe again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Holding Call Answer Select Holding Call Answer allows a Digital extension user to place and retrieve calls on and off of hold by simply pressing the WAN button When multiple calls are holding at an extension Holding Call Answer will access the CO line that has been holding for the longest period of time while placing the current call on hold Holding Call Answer works for all CO lines regardless of the extension CO line button programming lt is possible to handle calls that do not appear no button at an extension via Holding Call Answer Related Features Hold Common System CO Line Assignment Hold Exclusive Related Programming CO Line Call Abandon Call Handling Call Abandon Time Hold Recall Ex_Hold Time Operation When one or multiple calls are holding at your extension press pop The oldest holding call is connected Press MESAS again to place this call on hold Press MESA again to answer the next oldest holding call Repeat as required for any calls on hold at your extension a et Conditions a Holding Call Answer will also operate for intercom calls place
425. peration b Hook switch operations that are shorter than the Start time are ignored c Hook switch operations that are longer than the End time are considered to be On Hook hang up commands Default Settings Call Handling SLT Hook Flash Start is set at 200 milliseconds Range is 60 1400 Call Handling SLT Hook Flash End is set at 1000 milliseconds Range is 100 1500 Programming Abstract Set the acceptable flash range for the application Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brey pns and 2 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to aciuate the associated operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 03 14 then press This advances to the SLT Hook Flash programming screen e Press EY This advances to the Start screen e Press r to change the Start range setting This timer indicates the minimum time that an analog SLT must flash the hook switch to be considered a valid flash hook request A hook flash that is shorter than this timer is considered a mistake no action is taken e Press This advances to the End screen e Press r to change the End range setting This timer indicate
426. pervision Talk Hold Abandon CO Line Supervision is a Central Office Telephone Company feature This feature allows for advanced handling of call connections when the distant end party disconnects This function is especially useful when calls that have been placed on hold go unattended and the distant end party hangs up or when the caller is connected to voice mail leaving a message and hangs up The DX 80 receives the disconnect signal from the telephone company and forces the CO line on hook to release the system resource for other uses Related Features Conference DISA Conference Unsupervised Call Forward Extension External Call Forward Conference Room Voice Mail Digital Integration Related Programming None Default Settings CO Line Call Abandon set to Y yes for all CO Lines Range Y N Call Handling Talk Abandon Time set at 600ms Range 50 1000ms Call Handling Hold Abandon Time set at 600ms Range 50 1000ms Programming Abstract e Program CO Lines as required for non Loop Supervision mode Call Abandon N e Program the Call Abandon Times Talk mode and Hold mode as required to match the control signals being received from the telephone Company Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Bra he foe SF and ps are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to actuate the associated operation e Enter Database Ad
427. positioning arrows to highlight CO Line Application and then press e Use tohighlight Category 1 Then press e Used ES to highlight Search Order for the CO Line Group to be changed e Press until the appropriate search order displays e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes P7290 IMM 3 184 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Phantom Lines Virtual Numbers 7007729 Phantom Lines are software resources that act as placement mechanisms for call processing CO Line and intercom calls can be routed to Pha
428. pply AC transformer can be hard wire selected for either 117vac or 230vac operation It is shipped wired for 117vac operation The KSU is designed to be mounted on the wall and is shipped with a wall mounting template The compact KSU weighs less than 20 pounds and is UL Listed Panels installed over various KSU openings may be removed or repositioned to accommodate exterior connection requirements Three such panels are present One may be removed to route a serial cable through the KSU outer housing for connection of ancillary SMDR equipment Another may be removed to route a serial NULL Modem cable through the KSU outer housing for direct connection of a PC for on site P7290 IMM 1 4 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 PC DBA programming One KSU opening panel may be removed or repositioned to accommodate cable entry requirements through the outer housing for connection of station extension cables or to the MDF From the exterior with covers in place KSU1 and KSU2 look identical However KSU1 contains the Central Processor Module CPM system call processing il III II COMDIAL III III III IIDDIUHDIIUN HAHA HEET Ka Ge Figure 1 DX 80 Key Service Unit Power Supply The power supply circuitry of the DX 80 incorporates a linear design AC transformer with a choice of input voltage taps The transformer primary windings are shipped wired for 117vac applications A factory insulated tap wire may alternately be
429. press e Used tohighlight System Application and then press e Used EB tohighlight System Resource and then press e Used EB to highlight Preprogrammed Message and then press e Used tohighlight the message to be changed Then press e Input the message and then press to temporarily store this data e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e lf you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure P7290 IMM 3 166 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Messaging Call Me Text or Voice 96 A busy or unattended Digital Soeakerphone may be notified of a ca
430. press to store e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Automatic Hold 194 You may enable this feature on your telephone to simplify call handling and avoid accidental lost calls Automatic Hold will automatically place any call that is currently connected at your telephone on hold whenever a CO line button is pressed For instance if you are currently on a call on line 1 and you press line 2 the call on line 1 will be placed on Exclusive Hold automatically Similarly if you are currently on an intercom call and talking with another DX 80 extension then press a CO line button the intercom call will be pl
431. press save 3 Confirmation tone is heard and the display returns to the CO Line connected status Operation dialing the number stored in your memo pad 1 While the telephone is idle press 5 Or press the CO Line you want to place this call and then press 5 2 Thecallis placed 3 Hang up to end the call Conditions a The feature code 5 canbe programmed on an available Flexible Feature Button b There is only one memory location for Memo Pad numbers Messaging Status Text 90 Each digital telephone may invoke an extension status display message to inform other users of the current status of the extension user There are six programmed messages that may be used and one user customizable message Whenever another digital soeakerphone calls the extension with this Status message active the message displays at the calling extension Operation Setup 1 The extension must be idle 2 Press 9 O Thedisplay shows the first message choice customizable 3 To inputa custom message P7290 IMM 3 164 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 x Number lower case letter 8 ESA me fatele lol TC none eel Salas ei Oolul leral l a PTE ER GT e Se ES ee Ge Pars ES muu ER wsz e g ej 300 Press pase Otherwise press Pet until the appropriate pre programmed message to displayed 3 To activate the message for
432. previous menu e Press 4 to advance to CO Line specific DISA programming The CO Line input screen displays HEH e Input the CO Line directory number 740 755 e Press E This advances to the DISA CO LINE Y N screen e Press to change this data item value model to follow for DISA calls made into the system while the system is in DAY mode e Press fei to advance to DISA EVE COS e Press r until the appropriate value displays This data item will determine which extension COS model to follow for DISA calls made into the system while the system is in Evening mode e Press fei to advance to SERVICE mode e Press 2 until the appropriate value displays This data item will determine when the DISA feature will be active for the selected CO Line NEVER DAY EVE ALWAYS e Press to advance to TALK TIME e Press E3 until the appropriate value for this data item displays The Talk Time will determine the duration of outgoing CO Line calls made via the DISA feature on this CO Line e Press This advances to the input CO Line directory number screen so that another CO line may be programmed for DISA if necessary e Input the CO Line directory number to program for DISA operation then press E and set the necessary data item values as above e Press MLB button to exit DISA programming and return to the previous menu level e Continue making other programming changes or exit the progr
433. previous menu level Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Use 8 to highlight System Resource Then press Used 8 to highlight DSS Allocation Then press Use 8 to highlight the DSS to allocate up to 12 DSS Consoles may be added to the system When allocating DSS Consoles two directory numbers are required the actual digital extension port directory number where the DSS Console is connected DIR No and the Digital Extension Directory Number of the extension to which this DSS Console is to be associated DSS Owner Press Input the directory number for the selected data item For DIR No input the directory number of the port where the DSS console is connected For DSS Owner input the directory number of the extension to be associated to this DSS Console Press This temporarily stores this data while other changes are being made Used 8 to move the cursor to the next database item and input as data as required When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database
434. pt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure CO Line Name Label Programming Naming or labeling of CO Lines is provided to customize the appearance of the line identifier in the telephone display when the CO Line is in use This labeling can assist users when handling CO Line calls by orienting the line to its intended purpose Default Settings System Resource CO Line Names CO Lines are named LINE 1 through LINE 16 for CO Line directory numbers 740 755 sequentially Programming Abstract Program CO Lines as required for customized names 7 characters maximum Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note psk Peet Brow Er EEF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use
435. put press the ESC escape At this time it is possible to input another Source CO Line directory number and continue the process for another group of CO Line s e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure CO Line Queuing Callback cesk CO Line Queuing allows a user to request use of a busy CO line When the CO Line goes idle current user hangs up that CO Line rings the user that queued the line While the line is ringing at the extension it is unavailable for access by other users If the extension that queued the CO Line does not respond to the queue callback within 8 seconds the queue is cancelled and
436. queued call will remain in queue following the Overflow 1 Timer before being routed to the Overflow 2 Destination Overflow 1 Timer plus Overflow 1 Destination recorded message time plus Overflow 2 Timer The Destination can be an extension responsible for handling calls that remain in queue too long or a voice announcement device Recorded Announcement devices can be used to play recorded messages to callers waiting P7290 IMM 3 223 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 in queue Typically please continue to hold to reserve your place in queue For high traffic scenarios a recorded Voice Announcement UCD Group can be used to play the same message to multiple callers Overflow Count Each UCD Group has an Overflow Count that is associated to the Overflow 2 Timer This counter can be set to allow a specific number of times that the Overflow 2 Timer may repeat For each cycle of the Overflow 2 Timer the Overflow 2 Destination recording is played If a call remains in queue so long that the Overflow Count counter expires this call is routed to the programmed Reroute Destination Reroute Destination Each UCD Group has a Reroute Destination This can be programmed with an extension number and is used to remove this call from UCD Group queue and route the call for immediate handling Related Features CO Line Ring Assignment UCD Reroute Destination Flexible System Numbering Plan UCD Voice Announce Group UCD Agent Log On Log Of
437. r PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Program Extension Port Type e Used to highlight Extension Then press e Used tohighlight Category 2 Then press e Use 8 Y tohighlight Port Type for the analog extension connected to VM e Press until Port Type VM displays e Use 8 Y to highlight Port Type for the next analog extension to program e Press until Port Type VM displays e Continue until all analog extensions connected to VM are programmed e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Program UCD Group Members e Used tohighlight Extension Application T
438. r Speed Dial Directory number simply by lifting the handset This feature is especially useful for elevator phones and applications that dictate a specific destination for extension s of the system Related Features Speed Dial Extension intercom calling Related Programming Extension CO Line Assignment Extension Day Eve Class Of Service Operation Setup 1 While idle press 9 P7290 IMM 3 153 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 3 Input the speed dial directory number or extension number where this extension is to be connected when taken off hook Then press pans 4 Select if this destination is to be immediate or delayed If 2 Ffc1 1 S12 is selected confirmation tone and the function is invoked Operation invoke Hotline 1 While idle lift the handset The call is placed to the selected destination either immediately or after the delay time as selected 2 Hang up to complete the call Conditions a If delay mode is selected other calls can be placed during the delay period b The Hotline feature code 1 9 can be stored on an available Flexible Feature Button Default Setting Hotline is disabled Hour Mode Selection 12 24 Standard 12 hour time or 24 hour time mode can be selected for common display at all Digital Soeakerphones Related Features Attendant Administration Alarm Clock Extension System Time Date Alarm Clock System SMDR CO Line Ringing Modes Related Progr
439. r to the Programming Guide section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Tenant Groups Tenant Groups allow for separation of system resources such that the DX 80 system can operate as though two or three separate systems are deployed at one site Tenant Group Assignments can facilitate complete isolation of extension functions When extensions are assigned to their respective Tenant Group calling characteristics between these groups can be customized to prohibit calling from one group to another Often full tenanting separations are not required or desired to allow isolated functionality of system resources see CO Line Assignment CO Line Ring Assignment CO Line Receive Assignment for ideas on how to isolate system resources without invoking full isolated tenant operations Tenant Grouping allows for independent allocation of resource directory numbers Designated directory numbers for all system resources interact only with the resources allocated to the specific tenant group An example of this separation is Attendant designations Attendant extensions are designated for each tenant group and act independently for the assigned tenant group The designated Attendant Directory Number usually O is used regardless of tenant group assignment When a tenant group 2 extension dials the Attendant Directory Number the attendant designated extension for the same tenant group 2 Is called Related Features Speed Dial Attenda
440. r you may let the system automatically select the line The DX 80 system can be programmed to allow System Speed Dial Numbers to override Toll Restriction settings both CO Line and Extension COS Related Features Class of Service Extension Pulse to DTMF Conversion Toll Restriction Attendant Administration Flexible System numbering Plan Tenant Groups Flash Pause Related Programming System Resource Speed Number Assignment Speed Number Programming Call Handling Dial Wait Time Dial Delay Time System Speed Toll Check System Application Individual Soeed Number System Application System Speed Number Operation Setting up Extension Speed Dial Numbers 1 Press 1 2 Dial the Speed Dial location number 470 489 3 Press Ei The current contents of this speed dial number location are displayed 5 Input the number for this speed dial location including Pauses 7 0 Flash 3 and Pulse To Tone Conversion codes 6 Press E That number is stored in this speed dial location 7 Continue programming speed dial locations from step 2 above or hang up press Call twice to exit Operation Setting up System Speed Dial Numbers 1 Use Database Administration see Programming below Or 2 Use Attendant Administration see Attendant Administration P7290 IMM 3 202 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Operation system selects the CO Line automatically 1 Dial the Speed Dial
441. ramming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure P7290 IMM 3 132 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Flash PBX Line Flash PBX Line is a programmed setting that will determine what flash timing will be presented to the host telephone system when the DX 80 is installed as a subordinate system This feature is critical to perform accurate host system functions like PBX call transfer When used behind a PBX the DX 80 system extensions should have the Flash feature code programmed onto a Flexible Feature Button for easy access Related Features Speed Dial System and Station Memo Pad Last Number Redial Automatic Redial Related Programming Call Handling PBX Flash Ti
442. rd When the button is pressed the data item value is removed and is ready for the new value to be entered When the necessary and valid data is input press e Continue programming all those database items where changes are required e When all changes are made press escape to exit System Reminder programming You will be prompted to confirm exit request press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave System Reminder unchanged e Press Y to save changes e You will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave System Reminder unchanged e Press Y to save changes e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Automatic CO Line Ringing Modes The system can be programmed to follow a seven day twenty four hour time schedule that will automatically switch incoming CO lines to their programmed Day Evening or Alternate ringing status and destinations The programmed timed switching of ringing modes is flexible and can be broken down into individual tenant groups For manual changing of ringing modes Day Evening Alternate see CO Line Ringing Modes Feature 63 or Atte
443. rd at the busy extension and the display shows 4 When the busy extension goes on hook or places the current call on hold the Camp On begins to ring that extension Conditions a Each extension can have only one Camp On at the same time b While waiting for a busy extension Camp On invoked the music connected to MC2 is heard Class of Service Extension The system provides eight 8 Classes of Service COS for assignment of outside line dialing privileges Each system Extension may be assigned one Day COS and one Evening COS The Extension COS is primarily used for restriction and control of long distance dialing Toll restriction tables allow customized dialing privileges to be assigned to any or all COS System Speed Dial is specially linked with an Extension s COS such that all speed dial numbers may override toll restriction programming if designated to do so in Call Handling programming Related Features Toll Restriction Account Code Related Programming Restriction Toll Restriction Account Code Extension Day Class of Service Extension Evening Class of Service Call Handling System SPD Toll Check Default Settings Extension Class Of Service Day 0 for all Extensions Range is 0 7 Extension Class Of Service Eve 0 for all Extensions Range is 0 7 Restriction Toll Restriction Interval 001 is set for all calls allowed and all COS 0 7 See Toll Restriction for specif
444. rd disk Important Notice PC DBA is available via the Comdial Web page at www comdial com This software is not available by any other means Use of this DX 80 utility requires a well rounded understanding of the PC environment and the DOS file structure The manufacturer and or supplier of PC DBA cannot support users who are unfamiliar with these basic requirements If any of these issues concern you please use Database Administration via Any Digital Extension Loading PC DBA software When PC DBA is retrieved from the hosted Web site it is downloaded in an archived format to expedite the process It is recommended that you take the following actions when deploying PC DBA 1 Create a directory on the PC where PC DBA can be loaded Typically DX 80 This becomes known as the working directory 2 Copy the archive file into that directory and then executive the un archive process Whenever PC DBA is to be used start the computer and open the PC DBA directory To start PC DBA at the DOS prompt type DX 80 excluding the brackets Then press Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing At this time the title page displays as below A C Copyright 2000 All Rights Reserved l l Ver RIGUMO F19 Press Any Key e Press any key as req
445. re mounted using standoff posts Two standoff post sizes are used in the DX 80 The APM4 modules must be installed using the nickel color 2 5 cm standoffs All other modules use brass color 2 0 cm standoffs Proper use of standoff is imperative to assure proper system operation iii ii i i SC meme i em emm emm Ce Ee i iw zm eS S S SS em Sora A AE slots la lalalala Ena lalo nininini ILannni SLOTS 3 sLoT1 ZOO sos m e FA PA PAPA PA Wo P7290 IMM 2 8 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Adding a DPM8 Digital Port Module 8 port Two DPM68 Digital Port Module 8 port modules can be added to each KSU of the DX 80 system These modules expand the DX 80 system extension capacity to a maximum of 24 digital ports in each KSU 48 total digital ports DPM8 s are installed by connection to the 408M E via the Extension Expansion module connectors J2 and J3 These connectors have the logical system address of SLOT 2 and SLOT 3 in both Cabinet 1 KSU1 408M and Cabinet 2 KSU2 408E APM4 and DPM8 modules may be connected to the system via these two connectors DPM8 s are installed using four 4 2 0 cm brass color standoffs included with the DPM8 module LE RE Ce weiste Ip er Fei Z ei DPM8 DPM8 Extension number matrix per installed location KSU Connector used Extension numbers in Extension Numbers in KSU1 KSU2 J2 Extension Expansion 109 110 111 112 1
446. receivers are required to collect digits from outside callers c The default Class of Service COS of day and night for DISA CO lines is 0 Each DISA CO line has its own COS for dialing privileges d DISA CO line COS assignment coincides with Toll Restriction COS Tables e The activation time for a DISA CO line is programmable for Never Day Night or Always f Ifyou dial an extension number which is non existent your call will be directly transferred to the attendant g The DISA Talk Time is programmable for 1 2 3 5 10 and 15 minutes default is 1 minute The DISA Talk Time is set to automatically drop the connected outside parties upon expiration of the preprogrammed time A warning tone is heard 10 seconds prior to the disconnect operation h DISA Talk Time can be extended while connected in a DISA call To extend the Talk Time dial O i This restarts the DISA Talk Timer To disconnect a call originated via DISA before the Talk Time expires dial O Default Settings Call Handling DISA Ring Time to Answer is set to 0 Range is 0 99 seconds Call Handling DISA Allowed Extension COS 0 is set to Yes COS 1 7 are set to No Range is Y N Call Handling DISA DISA Line is set to No for all CO Lines Range is Y N Call Handling DISA Day COS is set to follow 0 Range is 0 7 Call Handling DISA Evening COS is set to follo
447. rectory Number Length for each of the system resources e Program the digits for the selected resource Special consideration should be taken when applying digits to resources Any resource may be assigned all specific digits or only the first digit s based on the Length total for each resource and those Leading digits assigned P7290 IMM 3 138 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note psk pesi Brow Fre EEEF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the soca d operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 08 09 01 then press E This advances to Numbering Plan CO Group programming e Press EF to enter into CO Group numbering plan programming Or e Press bet to advance to the next numbering plan item e When the numbering plan program to change displays press EF e The first parameter is Length If this is to be changed press EF code displays until the appropriate length for this e Press PEt until the Leading digit to be programmed displays e Press 2 to allow an entry into this item e Input the leading digit s to be assigned to this system resource e Pre
448. ress Used 8 to highlight Category 2 Then press Use 8 to highlight the Ring Type for the CO Line Press until the appropriate Ring Type displays Used 8 to highlight the next CO Line Ring Type to be changed Repeat the programming process for all CO Lines When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure CO Line Ringing Modes 6 3 The DX 80 system has several ringing modes to allow flexible ringing patterns depending office conditions The ringing modes available are DAY EVEning ALTernate and TIME The DAY and EVE modes can be programmed for ringing assignments as required in these two
449. ress N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure External Paging 777 The system provides external one way dedicated paging access to a paging amplifier or multi zone one way page controller The External Paging Zone may be accessed individually or with all eight 8 Internal Paging Zones as an All Call Page Related Features Paging Meet Me Page Related Programming Extension Paging Group Paging Allow Operation While in the idle condition lift the handset Dial the External Page access code Page Alert Tone is heard Make paging announcement Hang up when finished See 1 Conditions The External Page access code may be programmed on any feature button Default Settings System Application Numbering Plan 4 External Pager is set to 777 Range is any available non conflicting directory number P
450. ressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Use tohighlight Call Handling Then press e Used tohighlight Category 3 Then press e Used tohighlight the database item Hotel Enable e Press Each time that enter is pressed the value of this database item is updated e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Hotline Oz Hotline allows an extension to access an Extension o
451. revious menu level or press Cabal E to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used EB tohighlight Call Handling and then press Program Auto Pause Insertion Time used with PBX Type CO Line ports e Used EB tohighlight Category 1 and then press The first of 2 Call Handling Category 1 screen displays e Used 8 tohighlight PBX Auto Pause or Pause Time e Press until the appropriate time displays e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged P7290 IMM 3 182 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save opera
452. rise to return the site database to the factory settings this jumper is used to accomplish the task JP30 Internal External JP30 is used to select the Music Channel 1 source The DX 80 provides a synthesized music source for music on hold in applications where no music source Is available The synthesized tune is repeated JP30 is in the External position when it ships from the factory 408M KSU1 component The 408M is the large circuit board that is packaged inside of KSU1 The 408M provides interface for up to 4 loop start CO Lines and 8 Digital Extension Ports Additionally the 408M regulates the 24 volt DC power from the source to produce all required logic voltages and operations voltages There is also a Power Failure Port located on the 408M that is connected to the first CO Line circuit Whenever power fails this port becomes active with dial tone from the CO line connected to the first CO line port The 408M is equipped with a Heart beat LED that indicates processing activity on the PCB The 408M peripheral processor is operating when the Heartbeat LED is flashing The KSU1 operation LED located next to the power switch is tied to the 408M Heartbeat LED Therefore when the LED next to the power switch is flashing the 408M is active The KSU1 408M has three ribbon cables one at the upper right and oriented in a horizontal position J1 is used to interface a COM4 if required to expand the system CO Line capacity The other two r
453. rough all of the various extension features 5 The telephone must be idle Extension Paging Groups The system provides eight 8 Extension Paging Groups per Tenant Group for partitioning the system into separate departments for page announcements As an Extension Paging Group member you receive Internal Zone Pages directed to your Extension Paging Group Extension Paging Groups are assigned in the Database Programming Related Features Extension Paging Related Programming Extension Paging Group System Application Numbering Plan EXT Page Group Conditions a Extensions may be assigned to only one Extension Page Group b When Page Announcements are made all idle extensions in the Extension Page Group dialed by the paging extension will receive the voice announcement from that extension c Busy extensions extensions in DND and extensions that have invoked Page Deny at their extension will not receive page announcements d Extensions that are receiving page announcements are busy for other intercom calls e Extensions that are receiving page announcements will show busy on DSS BLF buttons at other extensions Default Setting Extension Paging Group 1 Range is 1 8 System Application Numbering Plan EXT Page Group 400 408 Programming Abstract e Refer to Flexible Numbering Plan to program the EXT Page Group directory numbers e Program extensions into Page Groups as required Programming via the
454. roup number displays usually 24 Use to highlight the various call handling digit parameter to program Then press Input the digit string for the selected call type Then press Continue until all programming is complete When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Program Voice Mail Dialing Ratio Use 8 to highlight Call Handling Then press Use 8 to highlight Category 3 Then press Used 8 to highlight VM Dialing Ratio Tone Time or Inter Digit Time Then press Press until the required time displays When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press
455. rride e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Program Extensions for the COS to follow e Used to highlight Extension and then press e Used 8 tohighlight Category 1 and then press e Used to highlight the COS Day or Eve of the extension for which changes are to be made e Press until the appropriate COS assignment displays e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Program CO Lines for the COS to follow e UsegE to highlight CO Line and then press e Used tohighlight Category 2 and then press P7290 IMM 3 217 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Use tohighlight the COS Day or Eve
456. rs 7 Replace the KSU cover and secure with cover screws 8 Restore KSU power P7290 IMM 2 13 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Adding an AAM Automated Attendant Module One AAM Auto Attendant Module can be added to KSU1 The AA Module adds automated attendant functionality to the DX 80 system with 10 integrated announcements The AAM does not provide voice mail functions Refer to the specific feature description Automated Attendant for information about announcements and programming CO Lines to be answered by the AAM The AAM is installed onto designated connectors located on the CPM AAM Installation Procedure 1 Be sure that KSU power is turned off kb kb kb kb 2 Remove the KSU cover four screws at each corner 3 Connect grounded wrist strap to a suitable earth ground If a grounded wrist strap is not available bleed any static charge from your body before touching circuit modules by touching the gold painted surface of the inside of the KSU cabinet If the KSU is properly grounded this will momentarily discharge CPM static electricity from your body NOTE A GROUNDED 4 WRIST STRAP IS THE ONLY METHOD OF ASSURING THAT STATIC ELECTRICITY DOES NOT DAMAGE CIRCUIT a MODULES wellt 4 Locate the CPM at the right hand side of KSU1 above the wem mmm emm 408M and COM4 if installed D 4 28 5 Position the AAM over the CPM AAM connectors as illustrated we EGET ww in the diagram
457. rtual Numbers etc in such a way that the wrong party cannot easily intercept them There are two 2 types of transfer you may use Screened talk Transfer and Unscreened Transfer Screened Transfer means that before the transfer is completed the call is announced to the destination extension This transfer method provides the transferring party with the option to reroute the call being transferred if the selected destination is determined not appropriate Unscreened Transfer simply delivers the call to the destination selected regardless of the destination readiness to accept the call When you complete a transfer the outside line is placed on Exclusive Hold and can be retrieved only at your telephone or the telephone where you transferred the call Calls that are transferred are subject to a unique transfer recall time Transferred calls that go unanswered at the destination will recall ring to the transferring party when this timer expires There are two recall timers that affect P7290 IMM 3 220 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 transferred calls Transfer Busy Recall Time and Transfer Idle Recall Time Idle and Busy represent the status of an extension for unsupervised transfer scenarios If the extension destination is busy the Transfer Busy Timer is used If the extension destination is idle the Transfer Idle Timer is used Related Features Transfer and Answer Call Recall Transfer Beep Enable Call Forward Call W
458. rty eight of the sixty buttons have dual colored LED s and are user and or system programmable for any system directory number System Speed Dial CO Lines and DSS BLF extensions The remaining twelve buttons on the Attendant Extension DSS Console are not equipped with an LED and are better suited for directory numbers of features that don t require status indication like Background Music P7290 IMM 3 13 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Related Features Attendant Extension DSS Console Related Programming None Operation Note bask ret Bra he foe SF and 22 are interactive LCD button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the associated operation 1 Press 1 2 Press the programmable feature button on the console you wish to view or change 3 Press EY to view more details Or 4 3 to change the directory number for the selected button 5 Input the valid Directory Number for the selected function 6 Press to store the change 7 Press a different button to make additional changes or exit button programming by toggling the W button or by going off hook and back on hook with the handset Conditions a Only directory numbers can be programmed on DSS Console buttons b The Attendant Extension DSS Console must be assigned to operate with your extension in order to program buttons Default Setting The button map of each DSS Console is defaulted
459. ry and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Program the extension for the ability to use External Call Forward e Used to highlight Extension Then press e Used tohighlight Category 2 Then press e Used ES tohighlight ECF Operation e Then press until the appropriate value displays e Continue making changes for other extensions as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged P7290 IMM 3 43 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Program the various system External Call Forward parameters e Used tohighlight Call Handling Then press e Used tohighlight Category 2 Then press e Used 8 to highlight either database item External CFW S
460. ry numbers as necessary e Program CO Line directory numbers as necessary e No specific programming is required to set up or operate Automatic Selection Auxiliary Lamp LED Status Bar Each Digital Soeakerphone is equipped with a dual colored LED Auxiliary Lamp LED Status Bar to assist users in recognizing the extensions status The LED will operate and indicate active CO line ringing Intercom ringing Mute Message Waiting Soeakerphone Headset Mode and Call Forward conditions Operation The Auxiliary Lamp LED Status Bar will operate and give visual indications as follows Flash Rate Priority Red Lamp Green Lamp Fast 1 Incoming CO Line Ringing Incoming Intercom Ringing Slow 2 Mute Message Waiting Steady 3 Speakerphone Headset in use Call Forward Conditions a The lamp may have more than one indication flashing or steady at one time as features are utilized in the system Both colors of LED green and red may be lit at the same time to indicate more than one feature or function is active b The Call Forward steady green indication may be turned off via Attendant Administration programming This is helpful if a permanent call forward option such as Voice Mail forwarding is required at an extension and the user chooses not to have a the lamp constantly lit Default Setting All LED indications active P7290 IMM 3 30 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming Abstract No database programming is req
461. s Use 8 to highlight Category 2 and then press Used amp to highlight Port Type or the extension number to program Press until the appropriate Port Type displays Continue making other programming changes as required When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Release Key i 5 2 A digital soeakerphone user may want a Release Key that will act to cancel or complete any current action The Release Key function can speed call processing by allowing the user to eliminate the use of the hook switch when call processing is encumbered by this operation The Release Key can be used to
462. s escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Extension Feature Status Check I 8 The Digital Soeakerphone user can quickly determine the status of all user controlled features This feature is useful for the technician as well as the user since some feature conditions may not be evident if they are not programmed on an available programmable feature button The current status can be observed using the LCD interactive buttons The following features are checked with this code LNR empty SNR No Saved Number Memo No Saved Number Telephone Lock No Auto Hold No Page Receive Yes Busy Ring Yes Hotline to NULL Position Tenant Group Pickup Group Paging Group P7290 IMM 3 111 Day COS 0 Eve COS 0 Monitor COS 5 Warning Tone No Drop Call Out No Drop Call In No Intrusion Active Yes Intrusion Accept Yes Intrusion Tone Yes ECF Operation No SMDR Output Yes ICM Mode VC HF DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Operation 1 The Digital Speakerphone must be idle 2 Press 8 3 The display shows the contents of LNR Last Number Redial 4 Use the right soft button to advance th
463. s Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming P7290 IMM 3 222 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure UCD Hunt Groups 1 24 410 433 Linear Distributed All Ring UCD Uniform Call Distribution is an incredibly flexible function of the DX 80 system Simply stated UCD Grouping allows system resources primarily extensions to be linked for call handling The DX 80 has 24 UCD Groups Each group has a lead or pilot number This is the access point of the UCD Group Extensions may call a group of extensions by dialing the associated UCD Group number Calls may also be transferred to UCD Groups for handling by one of the UCD Group Members UCD Group Members are often referred to as Agents The use of Agent and Member in this material is synonymous The DX 80 allows each UCD Group to be configured in one of three ways Linear Distributed All Ring When configured as Linear the UCD Grou
464. s UCD V A Extension Application UCD Tenant Group 1 Range is 1 3 Extension Application UCD Name NULL Range is 7 characters Extension Application UCD Member 1 24 NULL Range is any extension number Extension Application UCD Hunting Method Linear Range is Linear All Ring Distributed Extension Application UCD No Answer Timer 10 Range is 5 60 sec Extension Application UCD Overflow 1 Timer 0 Range is 0 255 Extension Application UCD Overflow 1 Destination NULL Range is UCD Group or extension directory number Extension Application UCD Overflow 2 Timer 0 Range is 0 255 Extension Application UCD Overflow 2 Destination NULL Range is UCD Group or extension directory number Extension Application UCD Overflow Count 1 Range is 1 128 P7290 IMM 3 224 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Extension Application UCD Reroute Destination NULL Range is UCD Group or extension directory number Programming Abstract e See CO Line Ringing Assignment to program a UCD Group number as a CO Line Answering Position e See Flexible Numbering Plan to program changes to the directory numbers used to access UCD Groups e Program extensions into UCD Groups as required e Program UCD Group call handling required via Overflow and Reroute functions Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal No
465. s 3 The connections are joined together Hang up to end the Conference Operation establish a four party conference 1 First establish a three party conference per above o Press ED 3 Place the third call internal or external 4 Press eae The connections are joined together Four parties include the initiator Controller of the conference P7290 IMM 3 84 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 5 Hang up to end the Conference Operation establish an Unsupervised Conference 1 First establish a conference per above with two or three CO Lines 2 Press 7 7 3 The Unsupervised Conference is established and your extension is returned to idle Operation rejoin an Unsupervised Conference 1 Press 7 7 2 Your extension is rejoined to the conference connection Operation Forcedly Release a conference member Conference Controller only 1 While engaged in a conference the display shows 2 Press forced 3 Press exit to abort the operation and return to the conference Dial the directory number CO Line number or Extension number to release You may also simply press the CO Line button or DSS button of the CO Line extension to be released That conference member is disconnected and you are rejoined in conference with the remaining members 4 Hang up to end the Conference Operation private connection with a conference member Conference Controller only 1 Whi
466. s Paw up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen or exit programming P7290 IMM 3 72 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used to highlight Extension Then press e Used tohighlight Receive Assignment Then press e Used and Y to highlight the extension and CO Line to change e Press until the appropriate data displays Y N e Used and to highlight the next extension CO Line to change e Continue this process for all extensions CO Lines to change e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Datab
467. s changed or some other digit is necessary to reach the system attendant e Program the extension to be assigned the system Attendant for each of the tenant groups e Program the extension to be assigned the system Alternate Attendant for each of the tenant groups Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note psk Peet Brow Fre EEEF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to actuate the aecoclaiad operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays Program Operator Code Index 08 09 14 e Input e 08 09 14 01 to program Operator Code Length the length of this code may be 1 4 digits Or e 08 09 14 02 to program the Operator Code Leading Digit e Press 84 This advances to the selected database item e Press E3 to change the contents of this database item e For Length press until the appropriate number of digits to dial for the operator code displays e For Leading Digit input the actual code necessary for the attendant For example if Length is set to 1 the entire code is the Leading Digit typically 0 If the Length is 2 P7290 IMM 3 34 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 the resulting code will be two d
468. s the Attendant extension e Program the selected extension as the Alternate Attendant extension e Program Attendant extension User Password Note Reference User Password for programming instructions of this feature Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note psk pesi Brow Fre EEEF and 22 are interactive LCD button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the associated operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password HHH HH ZZ ZZ ZZ Note This eight character can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays Program Attendant Extension e Enter 04 02 1 01 to program the attendant extension for Tenant Group 1 04 02 2 01 for Tenant 2 Group 04 02 3 01 for Tenant Group 3 e Press pave e Tochange the designated attendant extension press change e Enter the extension number to be assigned as the Attendant Extension Note Only valid extension directory numbers can be assigned as tenant group attendants Extensions that are programmed as Attendant for another Tenant Group or Alternate Attendant cannot be programmed as the attendant e Press pave Program Alternate Attendant Extension e Return to the Database Item Select screen by pressing Volume Bar Up or Down e Enter 04 02 1 06 to program the attendant extension for Tenant Group 1 04 02 2 06 for Tenant 2 Grou
469. s the Maximum time that an analog SLT must flash the hook switch to be considered a valid flash hook request A hook flash that is longer than this timer is considered an On Hook hang up request e Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode AEAT to return to the previous menu level or press screen or exit programming e Press MSC to return to the DB Item Selection P7290 IMM 3 199 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used EB tohighlight Call Handling and then press e Used tohighlight Category 2 and then press e Use tohighlight the database item SLT Hook Flash Start or End as required e Press until the appropriate value displays e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to
470. saessaeeseeseeesaeseeeseeeseeeaeeeas 3 96 A E 3 98 Dial Pad Confirmation Touch Tone II 3 98 Direct Inward System Access DISA Optional AAM reoured nc cnn nnnnnrccncnn 3 98 Direct station Sel CUINA a 3 101 ME r 3 104 Dis nc ve Ringing CO ode lucido rico ee 3 105 Distinctive Ringing Extension IL 3 106 RH Oe EI E led OE OY ae EEE 3 107 Do Not Disturb One Time IA 3 107 DO Not DIStrb OV e Sutil 3 108 EGE MG SIC et ln e EE 3 108 Enhancedketenng AA e o 3 110 Extension Feature Status Check a e oo 3 111 Extension Pag Gro siaaa ia a ee E 3 112 EXTENSION E EE 3 113 EXTENSION ICID GIOUDS nn a 3 115 Extension Programming E E 3 117 EXTEMSION OW ADDING EE 3 118 Extension User INA E 3 120 External Music Source Two Standard 7 7 1 7 IA 3 121 External Paging II 3 123 FAX Detection with Automatic Transfer ue 3 125 Feature Button Disablel us ii 3 126 EM e e e Oe Reem eT Cees tee eee 3 127 Feature Directory Number Lookup T 3 128 Flash Analog Port SET Flash Recorra Idle 3 130 lee 3 131 SE a HINE EE 3 133 Flexible Feature Button Inquiry T 3 134 Flexible Feature Button Programming T 3 134 Flexible Eeler a ge GE 3 137 Forced Intercom Call Forward A a id 3 141 Forced Intercom Tone EE 3 141 EE eege o O O II Headset Mode Hidden Codes Hold Exclusive E kg a a ett E cate Hold Common System amp L Hold Indication CEAD HO RSE a o ei e e Holding Call Answer Select BS Hot Key Enable D
471. save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Single Line Telephone CO Line Flash 3 Reference the feature Flash CO Line When a Single Line Telephone must generate a Flash command to the connected CO Line typically applicable to PBX circuits and Centrex features of CO Lines the SLT CO Line Flash command must be used Related Features Single Line Telephone Flash Flash CO Line Related Programming Call Handling CO Flash Time Reference Flash CO Line Operation sending a Flash to a connected CO Line from a SLT 1 While connected on a CO Line and conversation operate the single line telephone hook switch flash 2 Dialthecode 3 The DX 80 sends the hook switch flash command to the connected CO Line 3 Dial whatever code is required to complete the hook flash initiated PBX Centrex feature Conditions The successful operation of the connected device features PBX Centrex is depend
472. se d Usel toinserta space e Use to advance to the next character position f Custom Text Messages can be 16 letters symbols maximum g When a custom message has been input that message is retained for future use h The system will allow a total of forty eight 48 message wait indications in the system at any one time i At Digital Speakerphones the message waiting indication will not be removed until per i or pisi ete Jis pressed j When a message wait indication has been left at an extension the Auxiliary Lamp at that extension will slow flash green k Each extension may receive more than one message waiting from various extensions Multiple messages are retrieved in the order that they were left m Each extension can leave only one message waiting at any one extension Default Setting System Resource Preprogrammed Message Outgoing Message 1 Call Operator System Resource Preprogrammed Message Outgoing Message 2 Call Home System Resource Preprogrammed Message Outgoing Message 3 Call School System Resource Preprogrammed Message Outgoing Message 4 Visitor Waiting System Resource Preprogrammed Message Outgoing Message 5 Urgent System Resource Preprogrammed Message Outgoing Message 6 Come See Me P7290 IMM 3 169 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming Abstract Change the content of the preprogrammed me
473. seecseecesecseecsescaeseaesaessaesusesusesseesseesaeesaessaeseseesaeseseseaeeeges 3 51 Galler Identification Table Callback O ae ee 3 51 Camp EN Eds ads 3 55 Glass Of Services Extension ui at a i 3 55 ERENNERT 3 57 ES a ay Te e a og EE 3 59 CO Line Calling Gel USE Indica on as ag ses la do nas 3 61 CO Line Group Directory Number Swapping cccccccococococonononononononncononnononononononononnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn non nnnnnnrnrnnnrarnrannnnnos 3 62 A a E 3 63 CO Line Loop Supervision Talk Hold Abandon enean 3 65 CO Line Name Label brogrammimg enn 3 67 CO Eine e Tele un ele Bee EE 3 68 CG Hine Queuing Callback ba O dd oi 3 71 CO Line Receive Aesignment non nnnnn nn n nn RR RN RRnNRRnRRnnRRRnRNRnRNRNNRRNRNRnnNRnnNRnnnnnannrannrnrnennnnnns 3 72 CO Line Ring Assignment Answer Boston 3 73 CO Line Ring TvpeAesignment non non aeaaeai Rae aa a Aea rae RERE 3 75 CO Line Ringing Modes 3 iii a 3 76 CO Line Signaling Dialing Type Tone Pulse oocococococonoconoconocanononononononononononononnncnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn non nana rannrannranncinos 3 79 P7290 IMM TOC 2 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 CO Line EE 3 80 Conference Meet Me 3 9 O 20 I nn kann k anank unnn nann n nnn nnan nnn aann reaa 3 81 Conference Supervised Unsupervised II 3 84 Database Administration Via PG OBA cia 3 88 Database Administration Via Any Digital Extension ccccccsssssesscesseesseeeeesseesnesseesesseee
474. semblies for CO lines etc Preparing the Main Distribution Frame The Main Distribution Frame MDF is the point at which the KSU terminal equipment CO lines and miscellaneous equipment are connected to one another It is extremely important that the connections be made carefully and accurately Assembling the MDF Follow these steps to assemble the MDF 1 Mount a sufficiently sized 3 4 inch plywood backboard at the proper location for use as the MDF termination and equipment mounting board 2 Plan the layout of all required MDF components allowing for expansion This may include KSU1 KSU2 66M1 50 termination blocks cable fastening hardware and miscellaneous third party communications equipment paging equipment etc 3 Locate the Telco provided CO Centrex lines at the DEMARC Demarcation and extend them to the MDF location 4 Locate a suitable known good earth ground preferably within 10 feet of the MDF and route a 10AWG grounding wiring from the point of grounding to the MDF for connection to the KSU 5 Install all terminal device wiring telephone cabling and route to the MDF location for termination 6 Mount all equipment and termination hardware as required to complete interconnection of terminal devices and KSU modules KSU Components and Installation The Key Service Units are shipped in their own protective master carton and contain the following components KSU1 e 1 mounting template e 1 System Installa
475. sion directory number to be programmed for the selected member then press e Continue programming other Auto Record Member as required e When all changes are made press escape to exit System Reminder programming You will be prompted to confirm exit request press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave this data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e You will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave this data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Automatic Redial 1 45 Automatic Redial AR may be used to dial the last number dialed The system will automatically dial the number and then wait for a predetermined time period Following this predetermined time period if no action is taken the system will then hang up and the redial cycle will continue until the number of attempts designated in programming is reached Related Features Voice Mail Digital Integration Related Programming Extension Application Voice Mail Table Record Digit and Automatic Record Member Call Handling Voice Mail Dialing Rat
476. sion port that port is immediately reassigned the directory number previously assigned to the port where the swap was invoked e Continue swapping extension directory numbers as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting P7290 IMM 3 119 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Extension User Name An alphanumeric seven character title may be assigned to each extension in the system This title will be displayed on the Digital Speakerphone in place of the standard EXT message Extension user names are programmed in the customer database programming The names may consist of upper and
477. so dalea operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code I and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays Program extensions into the tenant group e Input 01 101 156 02 Then press This advances to the Tenant Group selection for the extension selected e Press 2 until the appropriate tenant group for this extension displays e Press HOLD to enter a new extension to program Or e Use the E or F button to skip to the appropriate database item Or e Press S D up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen Program CO Lines into the tenant group e Input 02 740 755 02 Then press Paul This advances to the Tenant Group selection for the CO Line selected e Press E3 until the appropriate tenant group for this CO Line displays P7290 IMM 3 212 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press EES to enter a new CO Line to program e Use the E or F button to skip to the appropriate database item e Press up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen Program Tenant Group Calling e Input 03 29 Then press This advances to Tenant Calling e Press bio e Input the Tenant Group for which changes are to be made Then press i The display shows the status of calling allowed settings from this tenant group to the tenant
478. splays e Input 01 101 156 22 then press E This advances to the Directory Number Swapping screen e gt Press pher e Input the extension directory number that is to be assigned to this port then press The new directory number is now in operation on this port The old directory number is now moved to the port where the new number came from e Press HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press Abed to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Use tohighlight Extension Then press e Used tohighlight Category 4 and then press The Extension Category 4 screen DIR No Swapping displays The cursor is positioned on the first digital extension port e Used to highlight the extension port to be changed e Press e Input the new directory number for this extension Note The directory number must be a valid Extension Directory Number as allocated in System Applications Numbering Plan 2 e Press toinvoke the swapping of directory numbers If this directory number was in use at another exten
479. ss Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Program the Voice Announcer UCD Group Use 8 to highlight Extension Application Then press Used 8 to highlight Uniform Call Distribution Then press P7290 IMM 3 232 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Input the UCD Group number to be used as the V A Group then press This advances to the selected UCD Group with the cursor positioned on the Attribute database item e Used EB tohighlight Members Then press This advances to this UCD Group Members database screen e Used EB to highlight the Member to be changed Then press e Input the extension directory number of the analog extension to be programmed as a member of this UCD Group Then press e Continue making programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e If you press Y yes you will then be prompted
480. ss Be up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen to input a new CO Line number e Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used to highlight CO Line Then press e Used tohighlight Category 1 Then press e Use amp to select CO Lines 1 8 or 9 16 e Used ES tohighlight the appropriate CO Line Dialing mode e Press until the appropriate value displays e Used ES tohighlight the next CO Line Dialing mode to change e Repeat the programming process for all CO Lines e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes P7290 IMM 3 79 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e
481. ss pave e Press F to advance to the next Leading Digit to program or until the next Numbering Plan item to be changed displays e Repeat the steps above for all Numbering Plan items to be changed Reference the tables below for information on Numbering Plan capabilities Pickup Group Directory Number examples Leading Digits Digiti Length cece Comments Code Users dial 40 47 for Group Pickup A Pull Pull 40 47 The digit 4 is unavailable as the first digit for ary other directory number use Users dial 44 or 45 for Group Pickup There are only to Group Pickup groups 3 Digits 40 43 46 49 are available as the first tao digits for other num bering plan requrements Users dial 440 447 for Group Pickup Digits 40 43 45 49 are available as the first two P7290 IMM 3 139 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Extension Directory Number examples ength Code Comments ri Users dial 1 0001999 when dialing other 1000 extensions P Neil Wett ei VC V i V i Ven ass a The digit ia nese lable EE any other directory number use Users dial 1 00199 when dialing other 100 exfterelon B 2 VI NUE Pal Nuat Na MOIEN 99 The digit 1 is unavailable as the first digit for any other directory number Lee Users dial 1 0739 when dialing other o extensions Digtt1 2 2 3 are unavailable as the first digit Users dial 1117 sehen dialing other ex
482. ss the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Extension Password All extensions of the DX 80 system have an associated User Password Passwords are used to facilitate Phone Lock Call Forward Remote and Attendant features Password length is system programmable from four to eight characters Related Features Call Forward Remote Caller 1D Call Table Phone Lock Unlock Direct Inward System Access DISA Attendant Administration Related Programming System Resource User Password Length System Resource User Password Password Operation Refer to the specific feature for operation Default Settings System Resource User Passw
483. ssages Since Caller ID is a standard DX 80 feature this valuable identification feature if subscribed from the local telephone company will greatly enhance the way outside callers are handled The LCD enhances many system features as well since User and CO Line names may be programmed in the system the display will help identify these callers When programming is required any Digital extension may be used for System Database Programming The LCD is interactive and will prompt the user with various choices concerning call set up handling and completion The LCD provides help screens for feature button programming password and security control and status of incoming calls All messages call status operation prompts and related indications will be displayed in a logical preset order and priority Related Features Extension User Name CO Line Name Programming Enhanced Lettering Letter Type Related Programming System Resource CO Line Name User Names System Application Category 1 Letter Type Operation Since the alphanumeric display enhances most feature operation its use is discussed in the text of the related features P7290 IMM 3 6 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Conditions a Display messages each have their own display priority depending on various call feature operations b The message with the highest priority will be displayed on the LCD at any time c In reference to the time and date message
484. ssages as necessary Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest phos oh and 2 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three Buttons below the LCD display to actuate the associated operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 04 07 01 01 then press 2 This advances to Preprogrammed Messages Outgoing Text Message 1 e Press if necessary to advance to the next preprogrammed message to change e Press to input a new message for the selected preprogrammed message e Use the chart and the dial pad keys to input the new message When finished press F 5 e Continue programming messages as required e Press HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press Gh Socal E to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Use tohighlight System Application and then press e Used EB
485. status indication press piere Operation deactivate 1 The extension must be idle 2 Press 9 O Thedisplay shows 3 The telephone returns to idle Conditions a Dial Pad Key 1 is used to select special characters Refer to the Letter Scheme feature b Dial before any dial pad key to insert the numeral on the dial pad key instead of a letter in this character position c When is pressed after a letter has been selected for this character position the selected letter is forced to lower case d Usel toinsert a space e Use to advance to the next character position f Messages can be 16 letters symbols maximum g The Message Status feature code can be stored on an available Flexible Feature Button h When the Message Status feature code is stored on a Flexible Feature Button that button is used to activate and deactivate the status message Default Settings System Resource Preprogrammed Message Premises Message 1 Out to lunch System Resource Preprogrammed Message Premises Message 2 Will return soon System Resource Preprogrammed Message Premises Message 3 Gone for the day System Resource Preprogrammed Message Premises Message 4 In a meeting System Resource Preprogrammed Message Premises Message 5 Out of office P7290 IMM 3 165 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 System Resource Preprogrammed Message
486. t If the extension user wishes to retain the recorded conversation he must press the Voice Record programmed feature button prior to completing the call hanging up Conditions a The Feature Code 6 7 must be programmed under a flexible feature button on the digital speakerphone to be used with the Auto Record feature P7290 IMM 3 25 e DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Outgoing call recording begins after the Call Duration Timer has expired Placing a call on hold constitutes completing a call and ends the recording function If the recorded conversation prior to pressing hold is to be kept the Voice Record button must be pressed prior to pressing Hold Auto Record and Voice Record occupy one voice channel on the DX 80 Voice Mail system during the record operation This resource consuming function should be deployed with careful consideration of the total available voice mail channels and the overall impact on other voice mail auto attendant related functions Only eight 8 digital speakerphones may be assigned for use with the Auto Record feature Default Setting Auto Record is disabled at default for all extensions Programming Abstract Program the extension s to be used with Automatic Record for Record Allow Program the extension s to be used with Automatic Record as Auto Record Member s Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask Pest Ere E ck sr and 23 are
487. t 15 seconds Programming Abstract Adjust timers as required Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brey he and E42 are interactive LCD button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to aciuate the associated operation Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password HHH HH F Note This eight character password can be changed Press Er The DB Item Select screen displays Input 03 31 to program Auto Redial Press Pauel This advances to the Call Handling Automatic Redial database item Press EPs to enter into these data items Use the fk and F interactive buttons to select the appropriate data item to be changed Available data items in Auto Redial are Attempts Interval and Waiting Time When the appropriate data item for change displays press E13 e Attempts will allow any number to be entered from 0 99 Note 0 disables Auto Redial gt When the number has been entered press F35 e Interval may be selected from the following choices 30 60 90 120 Each time that the selection is incremented through the available choices v Is pressed e Waiting Time may be selected from the following choices 10 15 20 25 30 Each time that lt is pressed the selection is incremented through the available choices Programming via PC DBA
488. t set to the same point of connection ahead of the system If noise static persists contact the local servicing telephone company and request repair If noise static can be isolated to the DX 80 equipment verify which CO line ports are affected which CO ports seem to have noise static replace interface modules as required DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Symptom s Diagnostic aid Cause s Action Programming lost or Digital Executive Intended Check with system administrator for incidental changed Telephone programming changes made display change PC DBA When using PC DBA to make customer database programming changes the user must take special precaution not changes Send All to overwrite existing data with residual PC DBA operation working directory values When using PC DBA to update any database it is highly recommended to perform the function Receive All prior to making any specific database changes to assure that the working directory database matches the database in use at the customer site Bad Memory lf power fluctuations occur and the Memory Battery battery Backup battery is low or bad the customer database is susceptible to being defaulted factory settings loaded whenever a power interruption occurs If this occurs change the standard photo cell type lithium battery Maintenance Utilities The DX 80 includes a versatile Maintenance Utility that is accessed through PC DBA A tech
489. ta unchanged gt Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override gt Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged gt Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press ESC escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e To program call logging conditions Outgoing Incoming Account Code e Use the cursor positioning arrows to highlight Call Handling and then press Enter e Use the cursor arrows to highlight Category 2 and then press Enter e Use the cursor arrows to highlight the database item SMDR Call Output Outgoing Incoming Account Code as required e Press Enter Each time that enter is pressed the value of this database item is updated e Continue to make other changes to the Call Output settings as required e When all changes are made press the ESC escape key to exit this database programming screen When you will see the Exit This Feature prompt press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting gt Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged gt Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override gt Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged gt Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press ESC escape again to return to the Da
490. tabase Programming menu e To program the CIL Call Information Log serial port baud rate CIL X_RATE e Use the cursor positioning arrows to highlight System Resource and then press Enter e Use the cursor arrows to highlight Modem amp Serial Port and then press Enter e Use the cursor arrows to highlight the database item CIL X_Rate e Press Enter Each time that enter is pressed the value of this database item is updated e When all changes are made press the ESC escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting gt Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged gt Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override gt Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged gt Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press ESC escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note changes made via PC DBA are NOT updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming Guide section of this manual to learn more about this procedure P7290 IMM 3 209 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 System Time amp Date The DX 80 sys
491. tandard RS 232C straight through cable When accessing the system remotely this connection can be made via a modem Cable e Connection to the DX 80 system on site is accomplished via the PC serial port COM Port Use a straight through 9 pin to 9 pin cable from the PC serial port to the DX 80 CPM PC DBA Port Once this connection is made it is possible to connect to the DX 80 system processor and download receive DX 80 database memory to the PC DBA working directory Modem e See F9 Modem below This connection method can be used while off site Connecting to the DX 80 processor e Once a physical connection cable or modem has been made between the PC and the DX 80 system You must link the two devices using the F5 Connect function See the details below e When a successful connection has been established between the DX 80 processor and the PC PC DBA software the following icon displays in the upper left corner of the PC DBA screen Cnt Receiving data e Press F3 The options for what data to Receive are displayed Receive Request pease tease ee Receive All Receive Part Receive Item e Used to select from list which receive technique you desire When Receive All is selected the data exchange is started immediately When Receive Part or Receive Item is selected you must chose either the specific data item Item or data category Part you wish to receive Use 8 to select
492. te bask Pest Brea he and E4 lt are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the associated operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays e Input the code to go to the specific database item to change per the list e 06 01 01 24 UCD Group e Press baue e 06 01 01 24 01 UCD Group select Tenant number e Press 2 to select the Tenant number to which this UCD Group is to be associated e Press pesi e 06 01 01 24 02 UCD Group select Attribute e Press E3 to select the Attribute for this UCD Group e Press pesi e 06 01 01 24 03 UCD Group select Member s e Press BF 34 J e Press pest pack to choose the Member to program e Press E3 e Input the extension directory number of the extension to assign as a Member e Press pave e Repeat from essi Pack for additional Members e Press WEA when finished entering members e Press pesi e 06 01 01 24 03 01 24 UCD Group select specific Member e Press E3 e Input the extension directory number of the extension to assign as a Member e Press pave e Press xt Ex for additional Members e Repeat from Press ESA when finished entering members P7290 IMM 3 225 DX 80 INS
493. te value for this data item displays e Press to advance to the next data item or exit programming Or e Input 03 11 then press Saul This advances to the Transfer Busy Recall programming screen e Press 2 until the appropriate value for this data item displays e Press to advance to the next data item or exit programming e Press GED button to exit DISA programming and return to the previous menu level e Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Program extensions into the tenant group e Used EB tohighlight Call Handling and then press e Used EB e tohighlight Category 1 and then press e Used 8 tohighlight XFR_ Recall or XFR_B Recall as necessary for change e Press until the appropriate value displays e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Pres
494. tem Monitor Class for the Extension to be changed e Press until the appropriate Monitor Class displays for the selected extension e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting P7290 IMM 3 173 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Music On Hold Two Source CO lines that are placed on Hold are connected to one of two External Music Sources The DX 80 system provides two sources of Music On Hold since the system may be installed in a location that serves two separate businesses and music on hold requirements Alternately a Tone can
495. tem provides a built in time clock to track System Time for reference in certain features such as System Night Service Mode Change SMDR Alarm Clock System Extension and Time and Date display at Executive Speakerphones This clock is battery protected from power failure System Time can be changed at any Digital Soeakerphone using the attendant password Related Features Attendant Administration SMDR Automatic CO Line Ringing Modes Alarm Clock System Extension Related Programming System Application Hour Mode Time Switching System Resource Hour Mode System Resource Time settings Conditions System Time and Date must be set in Database Administration for proper display at digital Executive Speakerphones and all other time sensitive feature operations Default Settings System Resource Hour Mode set at 12 Range is 12 24 System Resource System Time Year 99 Range is 0 99 System Resource System Time Month JAN Range is JAN DEC System Resource System Time Day 1 Range is 1 31 System Resource System Time Weekday FRI Range is SUN SAT System Resource System Time Hour 00 Range is 0 23 System Resource System Time Minute 00 Range is 0 59 Programming Abstract e Use Hour Mode to set the display format 12 hour or 24 hour format e Use the System Time programming to set the system clock to the correct tim
496. tems that can be changed are ALT START ALT END EVE START EVE END e When the Service Mode to be changed displays press E 1 00 PM is entered as 13 00 and input the new value in 24 hour format e g e Press 2 to store this data e Continue programming other Service Mode switching times as required e Press HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press Gael to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming P7290 IMM 3 23 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Use tohighlight System Application and then press e Used tohighlight Time Switching and then press e Used 8 e tohighlight Service Mode for which a time must be input This screen is read as FROM and TO for each day of the week and for the switch modes Alternate and Evening It is also split into the three groups for each of the Tenant Groups e Press e Input the time when this service mode should become active in the left column and when it should stop being active in the right column When the time has been input
497. tension s speed numbers assignment e Input the extension number to change assignments e Press EP this advances to the Increase screen for this extension e Press F to advance and input another extension number e Press the EI button to return to the previous menu level Or e Press bei this advances to the Assignment for System Speed Dial numbers screen e gt Press Eb e Input the Tenant Group for which changes are to be made Usually Tenant Group 1 e Press EnS this advances to the Increase screen for this Tenant Group System Speed List e Press ui screen To program System Speed Numbers e Input 04 09 1 3 then press This advances to the System Speed Dial entry point for the Tenant Group selected e Input the speed dial number to program 500 699 then press i The current stored number displays e Input the new telephone number with special characters as required Pause 4 Flash 0 Pulse To Tone Conversion Speed Numbering Chaining next speed number 500 699 x e Press bal The speed dial number and the new contents are displayed e Press pest e Input the next speed dial number to change and follow the conventions above e Press the LL button to exit this programming and return to the previous menu level P7290 IMM 3 204 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Then Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode
498. ter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Use 8 to highlight System Application Then press Use 8 to highlight Category 2 Then press Program CO Line Groups for Alternate CO Line Groups Use 8 to highlight CO Line Application Then press Enter Use 8 to highlight Alternate CO Group Then press Enter Notice the display header CO Line Application Alternate CO Group1 1 2 The 1 2 indicates that this is the first of two pages for this database programming Page 1 is Alternate Route 1 for this CO Line Group Page 2 is Alternate Route 2 for this CO Line Group Used 8 e to highlight the database item to be changed CO Group Number Delete Digits Inserted Digits Press to change the data item value e For CO Group Number input the CO Line Group that should be used as the alternate for this CO Line Group Then press P7290 IMM 3 58 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e For Delete Digits input the quantity of digits to delete at the beginning of the actual digits dialed when this alternate route is used Then press e For Inserted Digits input the actual digits to insert before sending th
499. terelons 2 1011 p12 13 14 15 16 17 Tre digit 1 is unavailable as the first digit for other numbenng plan requirements Only eight extensions will have intercom numbers D Press W2 to return to the previous menu level or press USAS to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Use 8 to highlight System Application Then press Program EXAMPLE Group Pickup Directory numbers Use 8 to highlight Numbering Plan 3 Then press Used 8 to highlight the database item to be changed Length Leading 1 Leading 2 or Leading 3 Press to change the data item value e For Length press until the appropriate length of this directory number displays e For Leading 1 2 amp 3 input the required code then press Continue programming other database items as required When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N
500. terface is protected against circuit wiring shorts by an over current protection Polyswitch The digital station circuit requires only one cable pair to operate and is not polarity sensitive Physical connection of digital extensions power failure telephones and CO lines to the 408M module is made through convenient RJ 11 connectors along the bottom edge of the module The 408E is very similar to the 408M however it is unique to KSU2 The 408E KSU2 component provides interface for up to 4 loop start CO Lines and 8 Digital Extension Ports Additionally the 408E regulates the 24 volt DC power from the source to produce all required logic voltages and operations voltages There is also a Power Failure Port located on the 408E that is associated to the first CO Line circuit Whenever power fails this port becomes active with dial tone from the CO line connected to the first CO line port The 408E is equipped with a Heartbeat LED that indicates processing activity on the PCB The 408E peripheral processor is operating when the Heartbeat LED is flashing The KSU2 operation LED located next to the power switch is tied to the 408E Heartbeat LED Therefore when the LED next to the power switch is flashing the 408E is active The KSU2 408E connections are almost identical to those on the 408M KSU1 The exception is the long shielded cable used to connect KSU2 to the CPM inside of KSU1 Also notice that there is no standard APM4 installed inside of K
501. the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Used 8 to highlight CO Line Then press Use 8 to highlight Answering Position Then press Use 8 to highlight the Day Member or Eve answering position Then press Input the directory number for the ringing position extension 101 156 UCD 410 433 or Virtual number 700 730 Press to store this data Continue making other programming changes as required When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming sec
502. the appropriate MOH source displays MC1 MC2 Tone P7290 IMM 3 174 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Press HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press amp d to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Use 8 to highlight CO Line and then press Use to highlight Category 2 and then press Used to highlight the database item MOH Source for the CO Line to be changed Press Each time that enter is pressed the value of this database item is updated Continue making other programming changes as required When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes If you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continu
503. the digits required to delete the current recording in this subscriber MB e Press pave e Press to continue programming the various call handling digits Prefix Suffix e Press GHEE to return to the previous menu level or press ESOS to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming 06 02 1 3 03 VM Table Disconnect Digit where 1 3 Tenant Group Press shot e Press E3 e Input the digits required to force disconnect of the active port e Press pase e Press to continue programming the various call handling digits Prefix Suffix e Press ES to return to the previous menu level or press MESS to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming 03 33 01 VM Dialing Ratio Tone Time e Press 2 This advances to Call Handling VM Dialing Ratio Tone Time P7290 IMM 3 240 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press CAE to return to the previous menu level or press ME to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming 03 33 01 VM Dialing Ratio Inter Digit Time e Press 24 This advances to Call Handling VM Dialing Ratio Inter Digit Time e Press F r until the appropriate Inter Digit Time displays e Press CE to return to the previous menu level or press MES to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Ente
504. the extension number entered P7290 IMM 3 98 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Related Features Auto Attendant Intercom calling System Speed Dial CO Line calling Related Programming Call Handling DISA Operation Call into the DX 80 system from some remote location 3 If answered by the Automated Attendant press 9 to access DISA 3 Ifthe dialed number is a DISA line only the line will automatically be answered after the Ring Time to Answer timer has expired 4 DISA dial tone is heard stutter dial tone 5 Dial an extension number Hunt Group number the Operator code Ring back tone is heard until the call is answered 6 Or 7 Dial ff Extension Password Extension Number ff to access a system CO Line to dial out If the extension number and password match authorized CO Line dial tone is provided and based on the entered extension number COS 8 Dial a CO Line Group number or speed dial location number to place an outgoing call 9 Hang up when finished Conditions a Four DISA CO lines may be used simultaneously If more than four DISA CO lines are signaling for answer the subsequent calls will receive internal busy tone b While DISA to CO calls are in use DTMF receivers on the AAM are dedicated to the function Therefore the quantity of DTMF resources four are reduced by one for each DISA to CO call in progress This affects Automated Attendant operation since DTMF
505. the line becomes available for other users Related Features CO Line Groups Related Programming CO Line CO Group Extension Line Assignment Operation Queue 1 Press a CO Line that is busy or dial access to a CO Line Group 9 800 806 The display shows 2 Press pisk The display shows LECE TO LEHE a momentarily and then goes idle Operation Queue Callback Answer 1 When the CO Line queued becomes idle it will Callback ring the extension The display shows 2 The user may lift the handset press the ON OFF button to activate speakerphone or press Femi to answer the Queue Callback Conditions An extension must have access to a CO Line via Line Assignment to Queue a CO Line Default Settings N A P7290 IMM 3 71 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming Abstract No Programming is required for CO Line Queuing CO Line Receive Assignment CO Line Receive Assignment is the DX 80 system utility used to allow an extension to answer ringing CO Lines The DX 80 system allows the Receive Assignment of CO Lines to extensions in a matrix fashion such that complete flexibility is possible Each CO Line may be assigned individually as a Receive Assigned Yes or No When ringing occurs on a CO Line that is Receive Assigned No the LED for the CO Line lights busy while the line is ringing Related Features Tenant Group CO Line Private Line CO Line Group Related Programming
506. the programmed CO Line Preset FWD timer has expired Call Forward CO Line Predefined is a No Answer condition forward Related Features Call Forward Extension CO Line Answering Position Call Forward Extension Predefined Uniform Call Distribution Groups Related Programming CO Line Line Type Answering Position Call Handling CO Line Predefined CFW Extension Application Uniform Call Distribution Extension Line Assignment Receive Assignment Conditions a Call Forward CO Line Predefined is a system programmed feature and will follow the programmed conditions unless an extension call forward has been enabled and the timer for the extension call forwarding is programmed at a shorter time than the Predefined timer b Ringing at the DAY and EVE assigned locations continues until the CO Line has been answered c When CO Lines are Call Forwarded Predefined to the DX 80 Voice Mail system special handling of the ringing line occurs The directory number of the CO Line 740 755 issent to the VM system so that automated attendant handling can be customized for the CO Line to be answered P7290 IMM 3 44 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Default Settings Call Handling Predefined Forward Time 10 seconds Range is 6 30 seconds in 2 sec Increments CO Line Answering Position Pre CFW NoAns NULL no destination for all CO lines Range is any Extension UCD or Virt
507. the right hand side of KSU1 above the 408M and COM4 if installed 6 Position the KSU2 connection cable over the CPM 2 Cabinet Connector as illustrated in the diagram above 20d Cabinet Connector 7 Press firmly but not forcefully on the KSU2 Cable connector mn to secure a good connection into the CPM 2 Cabinet a Connector mes Replace the KSU cover and secure with cover screws Restore KSU power by powering both KSU cabinets at the E same time Operate both cabinet power switches to the ON y MEM ww position simultaneously Adding a Music Source s El Two sources of music can be connected to the CPM of the DX 80 system for use with the features Music On Hold and Background CPM J Music Optionally an internal musical tune or tone can be used for Rm Im Im callers on hold When this option is used the MC1 connector is not used To select the internal music tune for use on music channel MC1 MC 1 8 MC2 External Music source connectors 1 Remove the KSU cover four screws at each corner of KSU1 2 Connect grounded wrist strap to a suitable earth ground If a grounded wrist strap is not available bleed any static charge from your body before touching circuit modules by touching the gold painted surface of the inside of the KSU cabinet If the KSU is properly grounded this will momentarily discharge static electricity from your body NOTE
508. the system time and date to the correct local time and date e Set the System Reminder Time s for the appropriate time and for each Tenant Group Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bagt pest prow phs EKSF and 4 2 are interactive LCD button operations Use the three bution below the LCD display to aciuate the aso daca operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code I and then enter the DB Admin password HHH HH F Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 03 19 e Press 2 The database item ALARM PLAY displays e Press r change until the appropriate Alarm Play Time displays in seconds e Press bach or pent to continue programming Or exit programming Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing The program title page displays e Press any key at the program title page to enter the Main Menu P7290 IMM 3 5 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Select PC DBA from the Main Menu The PC DBA menu is then shown e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu e Used to highlight Call Handling and then press e Used EB tohighlight System Reminder then press The cursor is now positioned on the database item
509. the telephones should be functional Default data is now loaded and operational In this status all CO Lines will ring at extension 101 all extensions may take and place calls and all systems features are operational per their default configuration Custom programming of features may now begin to meet the specific needs of this user P7290 IMM 2 19 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 P7290 IMM 2 20 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 3 Features The DX 80 system has a variety of features designed to provide maximum call handling efficiency and flexibility This section details these features which appear alphabetically Account Code Voluntary Forced Verified 79 Account Codes can be entered at any extension voluntarily to record an association of the call in progress in detailed records output from the DX 80 system SMDR Alternatively an extension may be Forced to enter an account code to make certain LINE calls or before any LINE calls can be made The account code length is predetermined and programmed to be from 2 to 8 digits When Forced to use an account code the extension is restricted to certain call criteria via that extension s programmed Class of Service This initial Class of Service is bypassed by entering an Account Code that is assigned a new Class of Service This Class is in effect for the duration of consecutive use at this extension Note This new Class may itself have some level
510. then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged P7290 IMM 3 180 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Program External Pager to a Tenant Group and Paging Groups e Used EB tohighlight System Resource and then press e UsegE tohighlight External Pager and then press e Used tohighlight the Tenant Group or Paging Group that you wish to program e Then press until the appropriate value displays for these parameters e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please re
511. then press e Used tohighlight Category 1 Then press e Use the cursor arrows to highlight the database item Private To for the CO Line to be changed e Press e Input the extension directory number of the extension that this CO Line is to be assigned as private e Press to temporarily store this data e Continue making other programming changes as required e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting P7290 IMM 3 189 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Pulse to DIMF Conversion i When the system is connected to Dial Pulse rotary outgoing CO lines you may manually force
512. ther 4 Run cable wiring to any optional equipment such as external paging equipment loud bell signaling devices music sources etc 5 Mount the MDF backboard and attach the bunch down 66 terminal block s on the backboard This documentation adheres to traditional installation practices of telephony equipment using a dedicated MDF with 66 block wiring field to promote full serviceability of the system and connections using proven techniques Alternately the extension cable wiring may be routed directly into the DX 80 KSU1 KSU2 housing for connection directly to the appropriate interface module 408M DPM8 APM4 COM4 CPM If extension cables are routed into the KSU each will require termination of one cable pair into standard crimping modular connectors This method is not recommended due to the inherent lack of serviceability once compete Terminate extension cables on modular jack assemblies at the terminal locations Mount the KSU s on the MDF backboard Mounting template provided Ground the KSU1 and KSU2 if applicable to a known good earth ground Install optional expansion modules COM4 DPM8 APM4 inside the KSU as required 10 Install optional features modules AAM VP1 VP2 VP3 MDM inside the KSU as required 11 Route telephone and CO line port interface connections through the appropriate KSU opening lower left corner and connect to them to the interface port The four pair modular plug pre termin
513. tion e Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure PBX Compatibility The DX 80 system may be installed as a subordinate of a host PBX In this connection arrangement users access PBX facilities via a DX 80 CO line button To make a PBX call PBX extension numbers and trunks the user accesses the PBX port via line button and dials the appropriate PBX code The DX 80 can be programmed to recognize the code used to access PBX trunks on PBX Type CO ports This code identifies the type of call being placed so that call control can be administered When the PBX code is recognized the DX 80 system will invoke automatic conditioning of calling for redial features and administer Class Of Service characteristics as programmed for each user Related Features Automatic Redial CO Line Type Assignment Last Number Redial Speed Dial System Extension Memo Pad Flash Saved Number Redial Related Programming CO Line CO Line Type see CO Line Type Assignment CO Line CO Group see CO Line Groups Call Handling CO Flash Time see Flash CO Line Call Handling PBX Flash Time see Flash PBX Line Call Handling Pa
514. tion amp Features Manual e 1 Quick Start up Guide e 1 Programming Guide e Standard 408M Module equipped with 8 digital extension ports 4 CO Line ports and 1 CO Line PFT Power Failure Transfer port e Standard CPM Central Processor Module e Standard APM4 Analog Port Module 4 port KSU2 e 1 mounting template e Standard Expansion Cabinet 408M Module equipped with 8 digital extension ports 4 CO Line ports and 1 CO Line PFT Power Failure Transfer port Open the carton s and verify that all items are complete and undamaged Remove all packing material and store for future use in the event that return shipment is required Mounting the KSU P7290 IMM 2 3 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Follow these instructions to mount the KSU Select a suitable location for the KSU1 considering that the expansion KSU2 may be installed at the same time or sometime in the future KSU1 and KSU2 may be mounted such that they are side by side or mounted one above the other TRETI UU II COMDIAL HU COMDIAL II MH II HH II g il HU HI II ID 1 i III H E J TT J H i mE mE viii DU HUNN COMDIAL MAMI THRE LAEN risen j UA IHR E II A 1 U I HI SE HIERT TII LIETIE COMDIAL Ade UR I II III TAN Tt J I H 1 uu mE One above the other Using the mounting template as a guide mark the two 2 mounting screws locations on the MDF 2
515. tion is assigned for any CO Line see Call Forward CO Line Predefined Programming Abstract e Program CO Lines for ringing as required Ringing may be assigned to extensions Hunt Groups or to Virtual Numbers Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brau he and Es are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the Ee operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code I and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays Program CO Lines for Day Ringing assignments 02 ccc 13 01 01 e Input 02 ccc 13 01 01 where ccc the CO Line directory number to be programmed The first of six Members ringing destinations displays e Press F to change this member Or e Press to select the next programmable member for ringing assignment e When the Member for change displays press Ei e Input the directory number where Day mode ringing for this CO line is necessary Extensions 101 156 Hunt Groups 410 433 Virtual Numbers 700 729 e Press 4 1 The data is stored e To program other Members press or ESSE to select the Member to change and repeat the process e Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode Program CO Lines for the Evening Rin
516. tion of this manual to learn more about this procedure P7290 IMM 3 78 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 CO Line Signaling Dialing Type Tone Pulse CO Lines may be designated as Pulse Dial or DIMF Touch Tone Dial types This setting will determine how telephone number dialing is delivered to the telephone company Related Features Pulse to DTMF Conversion Operation Dialing is delivered according the programming of each CO line while a user dials the telephone number Conditions A CO Line that is marked as Dialing Type Pulse can be temporarily forced to Tone mode for use with automated answering devices etc using the Pulse to DIMF Conversion feature Default Settings All CO Lines are assigned to signal in DTMF Tone mode Programming Abstract Program CO Lines for Pulse dialing or Tone DT MF dialing as required Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note psk pesi Brow Fre EEF and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the SEI operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays e Input 02 ccc 07 where ccc the CO Line directory number to be programmed e Press dl Si to select Tone or Pulse dialing mode e Pre
517. tructions the P7290 IMM 3 96 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 associated LCD Interactive button operation is indicated within square brackets LCD Interactive buttons include the following 6x7 move back one database item or database item parameter 2 move to the next database item or database item parameter F show the contents of the current database item or parameter L3 change the contents of the current database item or parameter F used during data input to backspace over input data and re input new data 23 2 used to save input data Database ltem Select After you enter the correct password and press EY see Enter DB Admin mode above the DX 80 Database Administration opens and the Database Item Select screen displays This screen allows the programmer to skip to the necessary database item for immediate programming of that item Each database item is indexed for this purpose Details of the indexing are available in the DX 80 Programming Guide and in the programming instructions of each feature description in this manual The first level indices are shown below EXTENSION CO LINE CALL HANDLING SYS RESOURCE RESTRICTION EXT APPLICAT CO APPLICAT SYS APPLICAT Example To skip to the Extension Application section of Database Administration input 05 at the Database Item Select screen and then press baue Exit Database Administration To exit Database Administration press th
518. ture code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays e Input the code to go to the specific database item to change per the list 01 101 156 21 Extension Port Type where 101 156 is the analog port e Press pave e Dress r until the port type VM displays for this extension e Press HOLD to return to the previous menu level or press ES to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming 06 01 01 24 03 01 UCD Group Members where 01 24 is the group number Press baue This advances to Member 1 of the UCD Group selected e Press E3 Input the extension directory of the analog port to program into this Member Press pave P7290 IMM 3 237 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Press pest Press BESSE to return to the previous menu level or press TOS to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit programming 06 02 1 3 01 Voice Mail Hunt Group where 1 3 is the Tenant Group usually 1 Press 22 This advances to Voice Mail Table for Tenant 1 Hunt Group the VM type analog ports are programmed as Members Press Pet to continue programming the various call handling digits Prefix Suffix Press MELO to return to the previous menu level or press MES 5 to return to the DB Item Selection screen or exit pro
519. ty to disable this function of the Auxiliary lamp 1 Press Pe 2 Dial the directory number for the extension to be programmed 3 Press EPs 4 Toggle F to turn on and off the Auxiliary Lamp Status bar functionality for Call Forward status of that extension Y yes N no 5 Press ask or f to program another extension 6 When finished making changes exit Admin by pressing the maior button twice Or return to the previous Admin level by pressing the x25 button Conditions Speed Dial P7290 IMM 3 10 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 a To enter a CO Line Flash hook flash in a System Speed number press 3 A stored hook flash is indicated by a character For example to enter FLASH 1389 in a system speed number the entry would be 3 1 3 8 Q 2 The displayed system speed number would be 1389 b To enter a Pause in a System Speed Dial press 7 O Astored pause is indicated by a P character For example to enter 9pause18008778000 into a system speed number the entry would be Og 4 70 18008 77800 0 28 gt The displayed system speed number would be 9P 18008778000 c To chain one speed dial number to another press 1 the speed dial number location to dial For example if a very long telephone number will not fit into one speed number location split the number into two locations To store the number 123 456
520. ual directory number Programming Abstract Program the Predefined Forward Time for the amount of time that should elapse before CO lines are routed to the Predefined destination Program the Predefined Forward destination for each CO line to be forwarded Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Bra he EEF and ps are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons Below the LCD display to actuate the associated operation Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed Press EY The DB Item Select screen displays Enter 02 ccc 13 03 to program the Predefined No Answer destination for each CO Line to be forwarded where ccc the CO Line directory number CO Line 1 740 CO Line 2 741 CO Line 3 742 CO Line 4 743 CO Line 5 744 CO Line 6 745 CO Line 7 746 CO Line 8 747 CO Line 9 748 CO Line 10 749 CO Line 11 750 CO Line 12 751 CO Line 13 752 CO Line 14 753 CO Line 15 754 CO Line 16 755 Press E This advances to the selected CO Line Predefined Call Forward No Answer database item Press to change the value of this data item Input the appropriate destination Valid entries are extension directory number 101 156 UCD Hunt Group Directory Numbers 410 433 or Virtual Directory Numbers 700 729 Press E
521. ual indications are given Refer to the table below Button GM Confirmation Status Bar Mode Lamp eee Tone Heard ER d confirmation call is received Voice Announce Green fase Mane single burst Solid Handsfree lamp Sn tone Red lamp Voice Announce Red g eerie mane Single burst Slow Flashing GE a dd a diam no lamp ue era wane Single burst Fast Flashing it TOME RING MODE ana Green lam Tone Ring Mode Related Features Distinctive Ringing Extension Do Not Disturb Forced Intercom Tone Ring P7290 IMM 3 233 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Voice Call Recorder via Voice Mail System 6 7 The Voice Call Recorder function is directly related to the digitally integrated DX 80 Voice system This feature allows you to record external CO Line conversations When the Voice Recorder is activated a connection is established between your extension and the DX 80 Voice system The conversation is recorded in your extension voice mailbox Related Features Automatic Record Voice Mail Digital Integration Related Programming Extension Application Voice Mail Table and Automatic Record Member Call Handling Voice Mail Dialing Ratio Extension Record Allow Operation setup 1 While connected to a CO Line enter the code 6 7 2 During recorder setup the display will show 3 When recording has begun the display shows Operation cancel While recording a conversation enter the code
522. ue with the save operation Press escape again to return to the Database Programming menu Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are not updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refer to the Programming section of this manual to learn more about this procedure Private Line The Private Line assignment provides a quick and secure method of programming one or more CO Lines for access by only one extension If the associated Private CO Line appears on a feature button at other extensions the button will light when busy but the line cannot be accessed from Hold answered on incoming calls or used for outgoing access The Private Line is used exclusively by the extension that is assigned the Private To extension in Database Programming P7290 IMM 3 188 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Related Features CO Line Assignment CO Line Ring Assignment CO Line Receive Assignment Related Programming CO Line Private To Conditions a Incoming calls signaling on a private CO line will ring its associated extension regardless of whether the CO line ring assignment is allowed in programming Private Line programming will override CO Line Answer Position and CO Line Receive Assignments for that extension b CO Lines designated as Private To will follow call forward modes as set by the Private To extension
523. uested The Main screen is then displayed with the cursor positioned on PC DBA P7290 IMM 3 88 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 PC DBA Database Save Database Restore Exitto DOS e Press to enter into the Programming and Maintenance functions of PC DBA The PC DBA screen is now shown with the cursor positioned on Programming Programming Maintenance e Press to enter into the Database Programming screen The Database Programming screen displays with the cursor positioned on Extension All of the various programming parameters of the system are accessed from this main screen e During all PC DBA programming operations changes to the DX 80 database are stored in the working directory not in the DX 80 system memory Note Data in the working directory is only updated to the DX 80 system via the PC DBA SEND operation Database Programming l Extension l CO Line Call Handling l System Resource Restriction Extension Application CO Line Application l System Application Feature Key Programming KSU DB Password e Used to highlight the category of your choice then press to open that category and begin programming database parameters as required e Use tohighlight the various menu levels and database parameters Then press to open that level parameter e There are many menu levels within Database Programming
524. uired Call Forward Lamp indication may be eliminated via Attendant Administration if necessary Background Music BGM 771 772 The DX 80 system has two 2 standard external music source inputs for Music On Hold and Background Music When a Digital telephone is idle and this feature is activated you can monitor background music BGM through the telephone speaker You can use the feature code or press the programmed feature button to select BGM Channel 1 771 BGM Channel 2 772 This is a standard feature of the system no additional equipment is required other than your choice of Music sources Related Features Music on Hold Alarm Clock System Related Programming System Application Music Source Length System Application Music Source Leading 1 28 3 Conditions Di One feature button is already setup for BGM operation at the factory b The feature button LED will not light when BGM is activated c BGM automatically turns off when you receive or make a call d BGM turns on again when the telephone return to idle status Default Settings System Application Music Source Length set at 3 Range is 1 4 System Application Music Source Leading 1 set at 771 Range is any available digits System Application Music Source Leading 2 set at 772 Range is any available digits Programming Abstract Make changes as required to music channel numbering See Flexible Number Plan for informat
525. ully loaded or whenever the system becomes functional following a power failure the CPM Heart beat LED maintains a consistent fast flash rate The terminal equipment should be operational at this time P7290 IMM 0 1 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 18 Refer to the specific feature descriptions section of this manual for operation and programming information Site Planning Establishing Suitable Environmental Conditions for the System Place KSU1 and KSU2 if applicable within 5 feet 1 5 meters of an isolated dedicated 105 125VAC 57 63Hz 15A single phase commercial power source Note This must be an isolated dedicated AC circuit for proper operation All three wires power neutral and ground must be run separately from the outlet to the breaker panel without being bonded to any other wire or circuit Do not plug any other equipment into this outlet To maintain the protection provided by the isolated dedicated circuit the length of the AC power cord limits the distance between the KSU and the outlet Do not use an extension cord To protect the system from lightning damage or other AC power line disturbances a surge protector should be installed Select the KSU location to minimize cable run length Terminal Equipment connected to the system must not exceed specified limits see overview Specifications The KSU location should not be exposed to direct sunlight high humidity heat dust or strong magnetic f
526. up directory number where the source data is to be copied COPY TO again Continue inputting CO Line Group directory numbers where the copy data should be stored Press for each input directory number When finished programming CO Lines via the Group Copy function press volume up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen Or press HOLD to return to the previous database menu Then use pas or Henst to skip to the appropriate database item Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Use to highlight System Application Then press Used 8 tohighlight CO Line Copy Then press The CO Copy menu displays Copy CO Line s via Individual one at a time programming method e Use to highlight Individual Then press The cursor is immediately positioned on the Source CO Line Directory number input e Input the CO Line directory number of the CO Line that has been programmed for copying to other CO Lines e Press The cursor immediately moves to the Destination Directory number input area e Input the CO Line directory number 740 755 where the copy data should
527. up session Adequate planning of announcements and the required results are essential to deploying a successful automated attendant operation Consider the ten 10 messages greetings and any specific telephone system dialing operations that have been established for your DX 80 application Consider the following e What are the extension numbers that should be listed in the greeting if any P7290 IMM 3 17 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Should any UCD Group directory numbers be announced For example dial 410 for Sales e Will you be using the Inquiry message e Do you want to advise callers of the Waiting Code The Waiting Code may be dialed when the called party s extension is busy When the caller hears the BUSY MSG she may dial the Waiting Code to wait 10 seconds When ten seconds have expired the DX 80 system will automatically try the extension again e Prepare a written announcement for each message greeting Messages Greetings are as follows DAY GREETING This is the greeting the callers hear when they are answered while the system is in DAY mode of operation For example Hello this is xyz company If you know your party s extension number dial it now Dial 0 for the system attendant For sales dial 410 To get recorded directions to our office dial Otherwise stay on the line we will be with you shortly ALT GREETING This is the greet
528. updated Unsupervised Conference Time e Press the Page Up or Page Down button to select the second page of Category 1 2 2 e Use the cursor arrows to highlight Unsupervised Talk Time e Press until the appropriate Unsupervised Talk Time displays e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e f you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation The main Call Handling screen is again visible Program the Conference Tone Operation e Used tohighlight Category 3 Then press Enter e Used to highlight Conference Tone Then press Enter e Press until the appropriate value displays Y N e When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e lf you press Y yes you will then be prompted File
529. urce data is to be copied COPY TO e Input the CO Line directory number 740 755 where the copy data should be stored e Press baue The system prompts for the next directory number where the source data is to be copied COPY TO again e Continue inputting CO Line directory numbers for those CO Lines where the copy data should be stored e gt Press for each input directory number e When finished programming CO Lines via the Individual Copy function press al dest 8 up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen e Press EEE to return to the previous database menu Then use gt or pet to skip to the appropriate database item Copy CO Line s via Group many at a time programming method 08 11 02 e Input 08 11 02 e Press bal This advances to the Group CO Line Copy screen e Press EP The system prompts for the CO Line that should be copied COPY FROM e Input the CO Line directory number of the CO Line that has been programmed for copying to other CO Lines P7290 IMM 3 69 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Press Pal The system prompts for the CO Line Group directory number where the source data is to be copied COPY TO Input the CO Line Group directory number 9 800 806 where the copy data should be stored Press 22 The copy data is stored in all CO Lines that are part of that CO Line Group At this time the system prompts for the next CO Line Gro
530. urns to idle the Auxiliary Lamp is lit green and the display shows md in the middle of the bottom row Follow Call Forward 1 Press F x The display shows 2 Press Ft Lol The display will read Follow Me From another extension to this extension 1 Press perscte j The display shows 2 Press E The display shows 3 Input the extension number where calls are to be forwarded from Press The display shows 5 Select the type of calls to forward e co CO Line incoming or transferred calls e icm co both intercom and CO Line calls e Gm intercom calls only The display shows P7290 IMM 3 41 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 15 Input the password of the extension where the calls are to be forwarded from 16 Press save Confirmation tone is heard the extension returns to idle and the display shows huh Follow Me from this extension to another extension 1 Press preset The display shows Input the extension number where calls are to be forwarded from Press E The display shows 4 Select the type of calls to forward e co CO Line incoming or transferred calls e icm co both intercom and CO Line calls e Gm intercom calls only Confirmation tone is heard the extension returns to idle and the display shows LESH PERL aa Operation Delete Forward 1 Press middle Interactive Soft Button under the FWD in the display Each active mode of forward will be
531. use Time see Pause Insertion Call Handling PBX Auto Pause see Pause Insertion CO Line Application PBX Code Search Order System Resource Soeed Number Programming see Speed Dial Conditions a When the PBX CODE is programmed the DX 80 will apply extension toll restriction s when the code is dialed b LNR and AR will recognize the code and automatically insert a pause following the code when used c The PBX access code can be 1 to 4 digits Default Settings CO Line Application PBX Code 9 Range is any number up to four digits CO Line Application Search Order SEQL Range is SEQF SEQL RAN Programming Abstract e Program the PBX Code required to access PBX Trunk dial tone If different than 9 e Program the Search order of PBX circuits for group access P7290 IMM 3 183 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Brea ore and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the Seet operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press The DB Item Select screen displays Program PBX Code for PBX Trunk access e Input 07 01 01 08 then press E This advances to the PBX Code programming screen for
532. usic volume level at the external music source When adjusting the music for Music On Hold place a call into the system on one of the CO Lines Place this call on hold so that the external music source is heard by the calling party you Adjust the volume level of the external music source until a desirable level is reached Background Music is then adjusted at the telephone using the instrument volume control Adding an External Pager paging system One port is provided at the CPM of the DX 80 system for use with external paging system apparatus When DX 80 users dial the external pager code 777 at default or dial the Tenant Group All Page code 400 at default voice announcements can be made over the external paging equipment The DX 80 External Page port does not provide any amplification A Interface at the amplifier should be matched to approximately 600 ohms for the best performance CPM External Pager Installation Procedure d 1 Remove the KSU cover four screws at each corner of KSU1 _ 2 Connect grounded wrist strap to a suitable earth ground If a grounded wrist strap is not available bleed any static External PAGE charge from your body before touching circuit modules by connector goes to touching the gold painted surface of the inside of the KSU external amplifier cabinet If the KSU is properly grounded this will momentarily discharge static electricity from your body NOTE A GROUNDED WRIST STRAP
533. utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory then press Enter e Press any key at the program title page as requested to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the Main Menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA Menu The Database Programming menu is now displayed e Use the cursor positioning arrows to highlight System Application and then press Enter e Use the cursor arrows to highlight Category 1 and then press Enter e Use the cursor arrows to highlight the database item Hour Mode e Press Enter Each time that enter is pressed the value of this database item is updated e When all changes are made press the ESC escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes e You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y to save changes e lf you press Y yes you will then be prompted File Exists Override e Press N to abort changes and leave all data unchanged e Press Y yes to continue with the save operation e Press ESC escape again to return to the Database Programming menu e Continue making other programming changes or exit PC DBA programming Note Changes made via PC DBA are NOT updated to the DX 80 system memory until a SEND function has been performed Please refe
534. utton operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the soca d operation Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed Press EY The DB Item Select screen displays Input 02 740 755 08 then press save The CO Line Type displays for the CO Line selected Press chg until the appropriate CO Line Type displays Press Ma Y up or down to return to the DB Item Select screen and another CO Line number for programming or exit the program mode Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu Select PC DBA from the main menu Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press Use 8 to highlight CO Line Then press Use 8 to highlight Category 1 Then press Uset 8 Y to highlight the CO Line Type for the CO Line to be changed Press until the appropriate value displays When all changes are made press the escape key to exit this database programming screen You will see the prompt Exit This Feature press Y for yes You will then be prompted to Save Current Setting e Press N to abort changes and leav
535. vate Talk Conference Release Key Ring Mode System Service Room Status Saved Redial Speed Dialing Status MSG Message Touch Tone Unsupervised Conference Voice MW Key Voice Record Suffix Codes these can be changed ICM Voice Ring DND Override Camp On Callback Call Pickup Intrusion MSG Message Waiting ICM Intercom OHVA Monitor P7290 IMM FEATURE 94 FEATURE 95 FEATURE 78 FEATURE 21 FEATURE 2 FEATURE 2 FEATURE FEATURE 6 FEATURE 60 FEATURE gr FEATURE 69 FEATURE 7 FEATURE 4 FEATURE 4 FEATURE 26 FEATURE 8 FEATURE 3 FEATURE 23 FEATURE 25 FEATURE 74 FEATURE 5 FEATURE 3 FEATURE 58 FEATURE 7 FEATURE 9 FEATURE 61 FEATURE 6 FEATURE 9 FEATURE 65 FEATURE 98 FEATURE 8 FEATURE 97 FEATURE 5 FEATURE 96 FEATURE 76 FEATURE 24 FEATURE 59 FEATURE 9 FEATURE 73 FEATURE 70 FEATURE 57 FEATURE 52 FEATURE 63 FEATURE 74 FEATURE 51 FEATURE 1 FEATURE 90 FEATURE 1 FEATURE 77 FEATURE 64 FEATURE 67 0 OO OD OO EE P oz 3 129 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Flash Analog Port SLT Flash Recognition Flash refers to the command issued at an analog device to invoke system features Flash is the momentary operation of the hook switch at an analog device Conversely the on hook command at an analog device signifies an on hook disconnect hang up request
536. ve Telephone The DX 80 has one model digital telephone The Digital Executive Telephone is equipped with a half duplex speakerphone for hands free conversations and has a two row by sixteen column 32 character dot matrix Super Twist Liquid Crystal Display LCD Directly under the LCD are three Interactive Buttons to enhance system features operation During the various features operations these Interactive Buttons take on functions to aid in feature use The Super Twist LCD eliminates the need for contrast adjustment and enhances angled viewing position clarity of displayed data Since the DX 80 includes Caller ID as a standard feature the LCD also enables every designated ringing extension to receive Caller Identification data for incoming CO line calls Note this feature requires a subscription from the servicing telephone company P7290 IMM 1 11 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 The display provides a visual reference to call progress and call duration as well as time and date information The display also enables the user to send and receive visual advisory and callback messages Users may select from six canned messages i e IN A MEETING OUT OF OFFICE or they may create a custom message Calls from other DX 80 telephone users to an extension with a message active will receive the visual advisory message on their LCD display Each digital soeakerphone has thirty 30 Programmable Feature Butto
537. volume mute and other headset functions f Pressing LES will disconnect calls when the Headset mode is active Hidden Codes 6 1 A four digit code may be stored for dialing by one button operation The Hidden Code feature is reserved to use with a Flexible Feature button It must be stored on a Flexible Feature button to operate This feature is typically used with voice mail systems both internal and external When the voice mail mailbox is reached the Hidden Code button can be pressed to dial the stored code Related Features Integrated Voice Mail Flexible Feature Button Programming Operation Storing the code 1 While the telephone is idle access Flexible Feature Button Programming 3 then press the feature button to be stored with your Hidden Code 3 Press est 4 Press 6 1 the four digit code to store Press pave 5 6 Exit Flexible Feature Button Programming Operation Using the Hidden Code 1 Access the voice mail system either the DX 80 Voice or an external voice mail system 2 When you hear the prompt to enter your password press the Hidden Code button P7290 IMM 3 143 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Conditions The Hidden Code feature can only be used when stored on a Flexible Feature button Hold Exclusive When using the feature button and the hold button together you may place an outside call on private exclusive hold The held line will
538. w 0 Range is 0 7 Call Handling DISA Service is set to Always for all CO Lines Range is ALWAYS NEVER DAY EVE Call Handling DISA Talk Time is set to 5 minutes Range is 1 2 3 5 10 1 5 Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note kask EL and are LCD interactive button operations Use the pest pao EnS be three buttons Below the LCD display to actuate the EES reg operation Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed Press EY The DB Item Select screen displays P7290 IMM 3 99 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Inputthe ring time 0 99 and then press save e Presse to advance to the next data item Allowed Extension COS e Press EF to select the Extension Classes of Service that will be allowed to use the DISA feature to make system CO Line calls Extension COS 0 displays Y N e Press r to change the COS 0 value Or e Press to advance to the next Extension COS for programming e Follow this convention for each of the Extension Classes of Service using and lt operations as required Continue pressing the pest button through all Extension Classes of Service until the next database item displays or press the ESA button to exit Extension Class of Service and exit to the
539. wice to exit Feature Directory Number Lookup List of Codes Directory Numbers these can be changed in programming Co gp CO Line Group 1 9 2 8 800 806 Page Paging Tenant 400 Group1 8 401 408 EXT PAGE External 777 Hunt Hunt UCD Group 1 24 410 433 Pickup Pickup Group 1 8 440 447 Music Music Channel 1 2 771 772 Bell Loud Bell E P M S 779 Mmenf Meet Me Conf 1 8 390 397 Vir Virtual Numbers 1 30 700 729 Spd Speed Dial Individual 470 499 Speed Dial System common 500 699 Feature Access Codes Agent Log Off FEATURE 91 Alarm Clock FEATURE 92 Alarm Key FEATURE 62 All Forward FEATURE 22 Attendant Administration FEATURE 0 P7290 IMM 3 128 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Auto Hold Auto Line Select Auto Redial Busy Forward Busy Ring Allow Call Forward CBCK Callback Delete CID Table Conference DB Database Programming Default Set Distinctive Ringing Do Not Disturb DSS Key Programming External Call Forward Feature Status Flash Follow Call Forward From Follow Call Forward To Forced Release Conference Feature Code Lookup Feature Key Programming Feature Key Reset Get Held CO Line Headset Mode Hidden Code Hot Key Hotline ICM Intercom Key ICM Mode HF Private Ring Last Redial Lock Phone Memo Pad MSG Message Waiting Mute Key No Answer Call Forward Paging Answer Paging Receive Park Call Pause Pri
540. with the cursor positioned on Programming Programming Maintenance e Used toselect Maintenance and then press to enter into the Maintenance screen The Maintenance screen is shown with the cursor positioned on Configuration i Configuration i Diagnostics Status SW HW Revision Event i Logon Data l Remote Control All operations in PC DBA Maintenance require a data communications connection with the DX 80 system to be interrogated This can be done in two ways via direct connection to the KSU1 CPM PC DBA port or via the optional system modem PN 7249 Once a data communications link has been P7290 IMM 4 7 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 established F5 Cnt Connect is possible This connect operation links PC DBA to the DX 80 processor for data exchange Cable Connection to the DX 80 system on site is accomplished via the PC serial port COM Port Use a straight through 9 pin to 9 pin Male Female cable from the PC serial port to the DX 80 CPM PC DBA Port Once this connection is made it is possible to connect to the DX 80 system processor for the various Maintenance operations Modem See F9 Modem below This connection method can be used while off site PC DBA Control Menu At the bottom of the PC DBA screen special control functions of PC DBA are shown The following line bar can be found at the bottom of the display Fl Help F2 Unsave F3 RCV F4 SND F5 Cnt F6
541. y cannot be programmed from Programming via the DET System Application Individual SPD No Length is 3 Range is 1 4 System Application Individual SPD No 470 499 assigned Range is any number per Numbering Plan System Application System SPD No Length is 3 Range is 1 4 System Application System SPD No 500 699 assigned Range is any number per Numbering Plan Programming Abstract e Use the Assignment to increase or decrease speed number assignments for each extension and or system speed bins e Note that the total speed bin capacity of the system is 1000 bins regardless of how they are assigned e Change speed dial directory numbers if required using the Flexible Numbering Plan programming Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask Pest Brea E and 22 are LCD interactive button operations Use the three Buttons below the LCD display to aciuate the aseociaisd operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays To program SPD No Assignment e Input 04 08 then press 2 27 e Press Ex this advances to the Assignment for Individual Speed Dial numbers screen P7290 IMM 3 203 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Press E to change an ex
542. ys NO 2LNS 3LNS e Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode Program the Unsupervised Conference Time 03 38 e At DB Item Select screen input 03 38 e Press lt r until the Unsupervised Conference Time displays e Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode Program the Conference Tone Operation 03 23 e At DB Item Select screen Input 03 23 Then press 22 e Press lt until the appropriate Conference Tone operation displays Y N P7290 IMM 3 86 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 e Continue making other programming changes or exit the programming mode Programming via PC DBA Note PC DBA is a DOS based programming utility e Enter PC DBA by typing DX 80 at the DOS prompt in the PC DBA working directory and then pressing e Press any key at the program title page as it requests to enter the Main Menu e Select PC DBA from the main menu e Select Programming from the PC DBA menu Then press e Used EB e tohighlight System Application Then press e Used tohighlight Category 2 Then press Program the maximum number of CO Lines that may be in a Conference e Used tohighlight Category 1 Then press The CO Line Category 1 1 2 screen displays e Use tohighlight the database item CO Line Conference e Press Each time that enter is pressed the value of this database item is
543. ystem with the call to identify the mailbox where this call should be routed b Call Forward Extension settings user invoked call forward supersede Call Forward Predefined settings Default Setting Extension Predefined FWD Wrong Null for all extensions Range any extension or directory number Extension Predefined FWD Busy Null for all extensions Range any extension or directory number Extension Predefined FWD No Answer is set at Null for all extensions Range any extension or directory number Call Handling Predefined FWD Time is set at 10 seconds Range is 6 30 seconds in 2 second increments P7290 IMM 3 46 DX 80 INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL 03 01 Programming Abstract e Program the appropriate destination for Wrong Busy and No Answer conditions as required for each extension e Program the appropriate No Answer Predefined FWD Time if required Programming via the DET Digital Extension Terminal Note bask pest Braid he and ps are LCD interactive button operations Use the three buttons below the LCD display to actuate the ascociiad operation e Enter Database Administration using the feature code and then enter the DB Admin password Note This eight character password can be changed e Press Ex The DB Item Select screen displays Program the appropriate extension s for Predefined Call Forward Wrong Busy an

DX-80TM - TierOne Telecommunications

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents